B10 para

Alcatel-Lucent GSM
Telecom Parameters Dictionary
OMC Document Reference Guide Release B10
3BK 21224 AAAA PCZZA Ed.10
BLANK PAGE BREAK
Status Short title
RELEASED
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent.
2 / 1182
Contents
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.1 Parameter Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1.2 Parameter Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 VGCS Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.1 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 LCS Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 3.1 Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 3.2 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 GSM Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 4.1 Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 4.2 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 4.3 System (CST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722 GPRS Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725 5.1 Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 5.2 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786 E-GPRS Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121 6.1 Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122 6.2 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125 DTM Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141 7.1 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142 2G-3G Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145 8.1 Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146 8.2 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147 Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181 9.1 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182
2 3
7 8
3 / 1182
Contents
4 / 1182
Preface
Preface
Purpose Whats New
The BSS Parameter Dictionary lists all of the Telecom Parameters for GSM and GPRS.
In Edition 10
This document was generated from the edition 19rl of the BSS Telecom Parameters database.
In Edition 09
In Edition 08
In Edition 07
In Edition 06
In Edition 05
In Edition 04
In Edition 03
5 / 1182
Preface
In Edition 02
In Edition 01
First official release of document. This document was generated from the edition 03rl of the BSS Telecom Parameters database.
Audience Assumed Knowledge
This manual is designed for OMC-R users, O&M technicians and system designers. Not applicable.
6 / 1182
1 Introduction
1 Introduction
7 / 1182
1 Introduction
1.1 Parameter Classification

The GSM and GPRS parameters are classified into three categories: Network: customer dependent parameters, related to the network topology, defined by the customer and valid for the complete network (e.g. BTS name, Cell ID, LAC number ...). They can be adjusted by CDE scripts. Site: adjustable parameters from one cell to the next or from one BSC to the next. They are set to a default value. They can be adjusted from the OMC-R. System: fixed parameters, i.e. BSS system mandatory rules or automatically populated in the DLS skeleton and let unchanged because not customer dependent. Some of them are coded in BTS Software and configuration files.
1.2 Parameter Description

To each parameter are associated the following characteristics: Logical Parameter Name: Mnemonic conventionally used in Alcatel documentation. Definition: definition/purpose of the parameter. Coding rules:, Rules of coding, when necessary. Mandatory rules: Mandatory relationships or inter-dependence of some data. Recommended rules: Recommended relationships or inter-dependence of some data. Feature: Indicates to which feature the parameter is linked. Category: Category into which the parameter is classified. Instance: Possible instance of the parameter. Value Min/Max values: Possible range of the parameter values. Default value: Parameter value in release B9 for a generic configuration. Modifiable: Indicates if the parameter is modifiable at the OMC-R. Parameter Access: Indicates where the parameter is accessible at the OMC-R. External Comments: Specific information, when necessary, related to the parameter.
8 / 1182
2 VGCS Telecom Parameters
9 / 1182
2.1 Site (CAE)

2.1.1 (CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(n)) (CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(n))
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(n) CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(n)
Level hysteresis for cell reselection applied when the new cell is in a different location area. step size = 2dB; coded on 3 bits (000 : 0 dB, 111 : 14 dB) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 14 Default 6
Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value
Modifiable Parameter Access External Comment Cell Type Dependent Nb of TRX Dependent
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No No
10 / 1182
2.1.2 (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET) (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(BSC)
Permanent offset to C2 criterion. step size = 2dB; coded on 6 bits (000000:0 dB, 111111 : 126 dB) CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(MFS) = CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (n)(BSC) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 126 Default 0
Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value
11 / 1182
2.1.3 (EN_INBAND_NOTIF) - (EN_INBAND_NOTIF)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_INBAND_NOTIF EN_INBAND_NOTIF
Flag to disable/enable the in-band notification 0: disabled, 1:enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: No No
12 / 1182
2.1.4 (EN_INBAND_PAGING) - (EN_INBAND_PAGING)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_INBAND_PAGING EN_INBAND_PAGING
Flag to disable/enable the in-band paging 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
13 / 1182
2.1.5 (EN_UPLINK_REPLY) - (EN_UPLINK_REPLY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_UPLINK_REPLY EN_UPLINK_REPLY
Flag to disable/enable the uplink reply procedure 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
14 / 1182
2.1.6 (EN_VGCS) - (EN_VGCS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules EN_VGCS EN_VGCS
Flag to disable/enable the VGCS in the cell 0: disabled, 1: enabled EN_VGCS shall be set to disabled for non-Evolium BTS When the VGCS feature (EN_VGCS) is activated, it is recommended to- include the Response Request in the HANDOVER REQUIRED message (RESP_REQ).- to configure, at least, one TRX with TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 in the cell.- to set EN_TCH_PREEMPT to enabled, otherwise to set the value of MIN_VGCS_TS to a value greater or equal to 2 Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Category Type SubSystem Instance Value
15 / 1182
2.1.7 (INBAND_PAGING_THR) - (INBAND_PAGING_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition INBAND_PAGING_THR INBAND_PAGING_THR
If the eMLPP priority included in the Paging message from the MSC is higher than or equal to this parameter, then the BSS shall trigger in-band paging within cells, that are identified to be paged from the PAGING message, and that have existing VGC active. Coded over 3 bits000 : deactivation of inband paging001 : call priority level 4 (lowest priority)010 : call priority level 3011 : call priority level 2100 : call priority level 1101 : call priority level 0110 : call priority level B111 : call priority level A (highest priority) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4
Coding rules
Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value
16 / 1182
2.1.8 (MAX_VGCS_TS) - (MAX_VGCS_TS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_VGCS_TS MAX_VGCS_TS
Maximum number of radio timeslots that can be used by the VGCS calls in the cell. MIN_VGCS_TS <= MAX_VGCS_TSIf EN_VGCS= enabled, then "(MAX_VGCS_TS + MAX_PDCH) < Total number of TCHs of the cell".If EN_VGCS= disabled, then" MAX_VGCS_TS = 0" Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 127 Default 0
Coding rules Mandatory rules
Modifiable Parameter Access External Comment
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: 127 is a theoretical value : 16 TRX * 8 PDCH - BCCH.To support VGCS in a cell, it is mandatory to have Max_VGCS_TS > 0 No No
Cell Type Dependent Nb of TRX Dependent
17 / 1182
2.1.9 (MIN_VGCS_TS) - (MIN_VGCS_TS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MIN_VGCS_TS MIN_VGCS_TS
Minimum number of radio timeslots that are reserved for the VGCS calls in the cell in normal situation (point-to-point CS call can NOT use these timeslots). MIN_VGCS_TS <= MAX_VGCS_TS - The following rules about the upper limit are recommended :i) MIN_VGCS_TS <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0) - 2 if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "1: CCCH combined"ii) MIN_VGCS_TS <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0) - 3 if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "0: CCCH not combined"iii) MIN_VGCS_TS <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0) - 1 if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX.- If EN_VGCS = enabled , then Alcatel recommends to set EN_TCH_PREEMPT to enabled, otherwise to set the value of MIN_VGCS_TS to a value greater or equal to 2 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 31 Default 0
Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: 127 is a theoretical value : 16 TRX * 8 PDCH - BCCH. No No
18 / 1182
2.1.10 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)(BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)(BSC)
Maximum transmission power an MS is allowed to use when accessing the cell until otherwise commanded, broadcast on PBCCH for CS service establishment. P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ..., 19: 5 dBm.GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39 dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm, 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum 5 Maximum 43 Default 43
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: According to the 3GPP TS 05.05, if the BCCH frequency band is P-GSM/G1, depending on the version of MS (Phase 1 MS or Phase 2/onwards MS), the coded value "0", "1" and "2" are interpreted differently:- Coded value "0": (interpreted as 43 dBm by the Phase 1 MS; interpreted as 39 dBm by the Phase 2/onwards MS);- Coded value "1": (interpreted as 41 dBm by the Phase 1 MS; interpreted as 39 dBm by the Phase 2/onwards MS);- Coded value "2": (interpreted as 39 dBm by both the Phase 1 MS and the Phase 2/onwards MS). No No
19 / 1182
2.1.11 (NOTIF_FACCH_OTHER_VGCS_CALL_THR) (NOTIF_FACCH_OTHER_VGCS_CALL_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NOTIF_FACCH_OTHER_VGCS_CALL_THR NOTIF_FACCH_OTHER_VGCS_CALL_THR
If the eMLPP priority is higher than or equal to this parameter, the Notifications message shall be sent on FACCH of all other on-going VGCS call. Coded over 3 bits000 : deactivation of notification on FACCH of other on-going VGCS calls001 : call priority level 4 (lowest priority)010 : call priority level 3011 : call priority level 2100 : call priority level 1101 : call priority level 0110 : call priority level B111 : call priority level A (highest priority) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
Coding rules
20 / 1182
2.1.12 (NOTIF_FACCH_PTP_CALL_THR) (NOTIF_FACCH_PTP_CALL_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NOTIF_FACCH_PTP_CALL_THR NOTIF_FACCH_PTP_CALL_THR
If the eMLPP priority is higher than or equal to this parameter, the Notifications message shall be sent on FACCH of all on-going point to point call whose MS is VGCS capable. Coded over 3 bits000 : deactivation of notification on FACCH of all on going point to point calls in the cell001 : call priority level 4 (lowest priority)010 : call priority level 3011 : call priority level 2100 : call priority level 1101 : call priority level 0110 : call priority level B111 : call priority level A (highest priority) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
Coding rules
21 / 1182
2.1.13 (NOTIF_PCH_THR) - (NOTIF_PCH_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NOTIF_PCH_THR NOTIF_PCH_THR
The priority threshold for notification over PCH.The BSS shall consider, for Notification/PCH, only VGCS-Calls which have a priority (eMLPP priority) not below this parameter. If more than one is selected, all these voice group calls shall be notified on PCH and all with the same frequency of occurrence. Coded over 3 bits000 : deactivation of notification on PCH in the cell001 : call priority level 4 (lowest priority)010 : call priority level 3011 : call priority level 2100 : call priority level 1101 : call priority level 0110 : call priority level B111 : call priority level A (highest priority) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
Coding rules
22 / 1182
2.1.14 (NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS) - (NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS
This parameter defines the maximum number of blocks usable for NCH. if EN_VGCS is enabled :- BS_AG_BLKS_RES >= NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS- if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES > NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 7 Default 2
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: The parameter is significant when EN_VGCS is enabled No No
23 / 1182
2.1.15 (NY2) - (NY2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NY2 NY2
Maximum number of repetitions for the VGCS UPLINK GRANT message during an uplink access procedure Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 7 Default 3
24 / 1182
2.1.16 (PENALTY_TIME) - (PENALTY_TIME(n)(BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PENALTY_TIME PENALTY_TIME(n)(BSC)
Time during which MS shall apply TEMPORARY_OFFSET to C2 criterion. step size = 20s. 0: 20s, 1: 40s, ..., 30: 620s, 31: TEMPORARY OFFSET ignored and cell_RESELECT_OFFSET has a negative value Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit sec Minimum 20 Maximum 620 Default 20
Coding rules
Modifiable Parameter Access External Comment Cell Type Dependent
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell inhibited (31) inhibited (31) inhibited (31) inhibited (31) 20 s (0) 20 s (0) inhibited (31) inhibited (31)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
25 / 1182
2.1.17 (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(BSC)
Minimum received level at the MS required for initial access to the cell. Coded on 6 bits, 0=-110 dBm, 63=-47 dBm, step size=1dBm. RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(MFS) = RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(BSC) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -100
26 / 1182
2.1.18 (START_UPLINK_REPLY) - (START_UPLINK_REPLY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition START_UPLINK_REPLY START_UPLINK_REPLY
Maximum number of repetitions for the UPLINK FREE message (with the Uplink Access Request bit set to L) during the initial part of the uplink access procedure (i.e. before sending the first UPLINK FREE message with the Uplink Access Request bit set to H) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 1024 Default 256
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: The parameter is significant only if EN_UPLINK_REPLY is set to true. No No
27 / 1182
2.1.19 (T_NOTIF_RESPONSE_DELAY) - (T_NOTIF_RESPONSE_DELAY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_NOTIF_RESPONSE_DELAY T_NOTIF_RESPONSE_DELAY
This Timer is used to delay the Multiple SACCH Info Modify and the VGCS_ADD_INFO in order to give the MS a chance to receive the immediately transmitted VGCS_ADD_INFO/FACCH and SI6 messages step size = 100 ms Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit ms Minimum 100 Maximum 1000 Default 200
28 / 1182
2.1.20 (T_REPETITION_CHANNEL_RELEASE) (T_REPETITION_CHANNEL_RELEASE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_REPETITION_CHANNEL_RELEASE T_REPETITION_CHANNEL_RELEASE
This parameter defines the repetition period of CHANNEL RELEASE message sent on FACCH step size = 100 ms Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit ms Minimum 200 Maximum 1000 Default 200
29 / 1182
2.1.21 (T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREE) - (T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREE T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREE
Delay between consecutive repetitions of the UPLINK FREE message, sent to the mobile station. The UPLINK FREE messages shall be repeated as long as no uplink is granted to a mobile station. step size = 20 ms Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit ms Minimum 20 Maximum 480 Default 200
30 / 1182
2.1.22 (T_WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS) - (T_WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS T_WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS
Guard timer to wait for an Uplink Access. If no such bursts are received at this timer expiry, the BSC releases the voice group call channel in that cell and provide notifications containing no channel description. step size = 1sec T_Wait_Uplink_Access >= [START_UPLINK_REPLY + (10 * WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS)] * T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREE Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 3 Maximum 300 Default 60
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: The parameter is significant only if EN_UPLINK_REPLY is set to true No No
31 / 1182
2.1.23 (T_WAIT_UPLINK_REQUEST_ACK) (T_WAIT_UPLINK_REQUEST_ACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_WAIT_UPLINK_REQUEST_ACK T_WAIT_UPLINK_REQUEST_ACK
Guard timer to wait for UPLINK REQUEST ACK or UPLINK REQUEST REJECT message from the MSC. step size = 500 ms Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit ms Minimum 500 Maximum 5000 Default 500
32 / 1182
2.1.24 (T14) - (T14)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T14 T14
Maximum queuing time for the VGCS Assignment Requests step size = 1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 19 Default 6
33 / 1182
2.1.25 (T3115) - (T3115)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T3115 T3115
This timer is used for the repetition of the VGCS UPLINK GRANT message during the uplink access procedure. If the timer expires before the reception of a correctly decoded frame from MS, the BTS repeats the VGCS UPLINK GRANT message to the requesting MS step size = 20ms Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit ms Minimum 100 Maximum 480 Default 200
34 / 1182
2.1.26 (TEMPORARY_OFFSET) - (TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value TEMPORARY_OFFSET TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n)
Offset applied to C2 criterion for the duration of PENALTY_TIME. step size = 10dB. 0: 0dB, 1:10dB, 6: 60dB, 7: infinity Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum infinity Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 0 dB (0) 0 dB (0) 0 dB (0) 0 dB (0) infinity (7) infinity (7) 0 dB (0) 0 dB (0)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
35 / 1182
2.1.27 (VGCS_FIX_AMR_FR_CODEC) - (VGCS_FIX_AMR_FR_CODEC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition VGCS_FIX_AMR_FR_CODEC VGCS_FIX_AMR_FR_CODEC
This parameter defines the type of FR AMR codec used in the network. 0 : AMR Full Rate Codec 12,2 kbit/s;1 : AMR Full Rate Codec 10,2 kbit/s;2 : AMR Full Rate Codec 7,95 kbit/s;3 : AMR Full Rate Codec 7,40 kbit/s; 4 : AMR Full Rate Codec 6,70 kbit/s; 5 : AMR Full Rate Codec 5,90 kbit/s; 6 : AMR Full Rate Codec 5,15 kbit/s; 7 : AMR Full Rate Codec 4,75 kbit/st; Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 1
Coding rules
36 / 1182
2.1.28 (VGCS_FIX_AMR_HR_CODEC) - (VGCS_FIX_AMR_HR_CODEC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition VGCS_FIX_AMR_HR_CODEC VGCS_FIX_AMR_HR_CODEC
This parameter defines the type of HR AMR codec used in the network. 0 : AMR Half Rate Codec 7,95 kbit/s;1 : AMR Half Rate Codec 7,40 kbit/s;2 : AMR Half Rate Codec 6,70 kbit/s;3 : AMR Half Rate Codec 5,90 kbit/s;4 : AMR Half Rate Codec 5,15 kbit/s;5 : AMR Half Rate Codec 4,75 kbit/s; Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 2 Maximum 5 Default 4
Coding rules
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: AMR Half Rate codec mode 7,95 kb/s is not supported by Alcatel BSS.AMR Half Rate codec mode 7,4kb/s is not supported as a "stand-alone" codec No No
37 / 1182
2.1.29 (WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS) - (WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS
Maximum number of repetitions for the UPLINK FREE message (with the Uplink Access Request bit set to L) per cycle, during the non-initial part of the uplink access procedure (i.e. after sending the first UPLINK FREE message with the Uplink Access Request bit set to H).Each time the value of this counter becomes zero, the BTS send one UPLINK FREE message with the Uplink Access Request bit set to H. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 32 Default 3
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: The parameter is significant only if EN_UPLINK_REPLY is set to true. No No
38 / 1182
3 LCS Telecom Parameters
39 / 1182
3.1 Network (CDE)

3.1.1 (CONFIDENCE_ORIGIN) - (CONFIDENCE_ORIGIN)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CONFIDENCE_ORIGIN CONFIDENCE_ORIGIN
Confidence origin used in the 3D linear regression of the confidence of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when providing the reference location to the A-GPS server. step size = 0.1 Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 50.7
40 / 1182
3.1.2 (CONFIDENCE_VS_ARC_FACTOR_SLOPE) (CONFIDENCE_VS_ARC_FACTOR_SLOPE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CONFIDENCE_VS_ARC_FACTOR_SLOPE CONFIDENCE_VS_ARC_FACTOR_SLOPE
Slope ratio between the confidence and the arc factor used in the 3D linear regression of the confidence of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when providing the reference location to the A-GPS server. step size = 0.1 Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 25
41 / 1182
3.1.3 (CONFIDENCE_VS_RADIUS_SLOPE) (CONFIDENCE_VS_RADIUS_SLOPE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CONFIDENCE_VS_RADIUS_SLOPE CONFIDENCE_VS_RADIUS_SLOPE
Slope ratio between the confidence and the sum of minimum radius factor and maximum radius factor used in the 3D linear regression of the confidence of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when providing the reference location to the A-GPS server. step size = 0.01 Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 15.28
42 / 1182
3.1.4 (MS_BASED_AGPS_ASSIST_DATA_LIST) (MS_BASED_AGPS_ASSIST_DATA_LIST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MS_BASED_AGPS_ASSIST_DATA_LIST MS_BASED_AGPS_ASSIST_DATA_LIST
Bitmap (8 bits) defining the types of optional assistance data to be retrieved from the A-GPS server when using the MS based A-GPS positioning method. The following optional assistance data type are considered: Almanac, UTC model, DGPS corrections, reference time, acquisition assistance, real-time integrity. bit 8 (most significant) and bit 7 are not used (i.e. always set to 0); bit 6=1: real-time integrity is retrieived; bit 5=1: acquisition assistance is retrieived; bit 4=1: reference time is retrieived; bit 3=1: DGPS corrections is retrieived; bit 2=1: UTC model is retrieived; bit 1 (least significant)=1: Almanac is retrieived. Network (CDE) Reference MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 63 Default 0
Coding rules
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No No No
43 / 1182
3.1.5 (PREF_GPS_LIST_Priority_1) - (PREF_GPS_LIST_Priority_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules PREF_GPS_LIST_Priority_1 PREF_GPS_LIST_Priority_1
The most preferred GPS positioning method. It contains a reference to a GPS method: 1 for MS Assisted A-GPS, 2 for MS Based A-GPS, 3 for Conventional GPS. The same GPS methods reference should not be used for different priorities Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 1
Mandatory rules Recommended rules
44 / 1182

The second preferred GPS positioning method. It contains a reference to a GPS method: 1 for MS Assisted A-GPS, 2 for MS Based A-GPS, 3 for Conventional GPS. The same GPS methods reference should not be used for different priorities. Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 2
45 / 1182

The third preferred GPS positioning method. It contains a reference to a GPS method: 1 for MS Assisted A-GPS, 2 for MS Based A-GPS, 3 for Conventional GPS. The same GPS methods reference should not be used for different priorities. Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 3
46 / 1182
3.1.8 (SAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUT) - (SAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUT SAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUT
Parameter used in the context of supervision of SAGI based on TCP keep alive mechanism. This timer controls the retransmission timeout for the sending of the individual data segments. step size = 1 second Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 4 Maximum 10 Default 5
47 / 1182
3.1.9 (SAGI_TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVAL) (SAGI_TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVAL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SAGI_TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVAL SAGI_TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVAL
Parameter used in the context of supervision of SAGI based on TCP keep alive mechanism. This timer determines the interval separating keep alive retransmissions until a response is received. Once a response is received, the delay until the next keep alive transmission is again controlled by the value of this timer. The connection will be aborted after the number of retransmissions specified by SAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANS have gone unanswered. step size = 1 second Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 4 Maximum 10 Default 5
48 / 1182
3.1.10 (SAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANS) (SAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANS SAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANS
Parameter used in the context of supervision of SAGI based on TCP keep alive mechanism. This parameter controls the number of times TCP will retransmit an individual data segment before aborting the connection. The retransmission timeout is given by the parameter SAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUT. Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 4 Maximum 10 Default 5
49 / 1182
3.1.11 (T_SAGI_GUARD) - (T_SAGI_GUARD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_SAGI_GUARD T_SAGI_GUARD
Timer to guard the response from the A-GPS server (on SAGI: interface with A-GPS server). step size = 1 sec Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 300 Default 60
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No The timer is meaningful in the MFS when EN_SAGI=1. No No
50 / 1182
3.2 Site (CAE)

3.2.1 (ARC_SIZE_FACTOR) - (ARC_SIZE_FACTOR)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition ARC_SIZE_FACTOR ARC_SIZE_FACTOR
Factor used in the computation of the width in degree of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when computing location estimate based on TA positionning method. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 1.5 Default 1.2
51 / 1182
3.2.2 (AZIMUTH) - (LCS_AZIMUTH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AZIMUTH LCS_AZIMUTH
Antenna direction orientation for the sector supporting the cell (used by the MFS to compute location estimate based on TA positionning method). 0: 0 degree,, 359: 359 degree, 360: omnidirectional cell Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 360 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit cell / LCS 0 corresponds to the North orientation and is counted clockwise. No No
52 / 1182
3.2.3 (EN_CONV_GPS) - (EN_CONV_GPS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_CONV_GPS EN_CONV_GPS
Flag to enable or disable the positioning method Conventional GPS. 0 = disabled; 1 = enabled Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit cell / LCS The activation of this positioning method is meaningful when EN_LCS=1. No No
53 / 1182
3.2.4 (EN_LCS) - (EN_LCS (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_LCS EN_LCS (BSC)
Enables/Disables the Location Services (LCS) in the BSS. 0 = disabled; 1 = enabled Equal to EN_LCS (MFS) Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / LCS No No
54 / 1182
3.2.5 (EN_LCS) - (EN_LCS (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_LCS EN_LCS (MFS)
Enables/Disables the Location Services (LCS) in the BSS. 0 = disabled; 1 = enabled Equal to EN_LCS (BSC) Site (CAE) Flag MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / LCS No No
55 / 1182
3.2.6 (EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS) - (EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS
Flag to enable or disable the positioning method MS Assisted A-GPS. 0 = disabled; 1 = enabled Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit cell / LCS The activation of this positioning method is meaningful when EN_LCS=1. No No
56 / 1182
3.2.7 (EN_MS_BASED_AGPS) - (EN_MS_BASED_AGPS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_MS_BASED_AGPS EN_MS_BASED_AGPS
Flag to enable or disable the positioning method MS Based A-GPS. 0 = disabled; 1 = enabled Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / LCS The activation of this positioning method is meaningful when EN_LCS=1. No No
57 / 1182
3.2.8 (EN_SAGI) - (EN_SAGI)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_SAGI EN_SAGI
Flag indicating whether SAGI (interface with the A-GPS server) is configured or not for this BSS. 0: disabled; 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: ? Edit BSC / LCS No No
58 / 1182
3.2.9 (Geographical Coordinates) (GEOGRAPHICAL_COORDINATES_FLAG)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Geographical Coordinates GEOGRAPHICAL_COORDINATES_FLAG
Indicates whether latitude and longitude are significant or not. 0: not significant, 1: significant Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / LCS No No
59 / 1182
3.2.10 (HALFPWR_BEAM_WIDTH) - (HALFPWR_BEAM_WIDTH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition HALFPWR_BEAM_WIDTH HALFPWR_BEAM_WIDTH
Antenna half power beam for the sector supporting the cell (used by the MFS to compute location estimate based on TA positionning method). 0: half power beam width unknown, 1: 1 degree,, 360: 360 degree (omnidirectional cell) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 360 Default 0
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit cell / LCS No No
60 / 1182
3.2.11 (LATITUDE) - (LCS_LATITUDE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LATITUDE LCS_LATITUDE
Latitude of the BTS supporting the cell (used by the MFS to compute location estimate based on TA positionning method). Sequence of:- number of degrees (from 0 to 90)- number of minutes (from 0 to 59)- number of fractional minutes (from 0 to 9999)direction (boolean, true for South and false for North) Site (CAE) List of numbers MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0,0,0,false Maximum Default
Coding rules
90,59,9999,true #
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / LCS 1) 0 latitude corresponds to the Equator; 2) The coding for OMC-R HMI is described in the "BSS O&M Parameters" document, parameter "LCS-Latitude". No No
61 / 1182
3.2.12 (LONGITUDE) - (LCS_LONGITUDE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LONGITUDE LCS_LONGITUDE
Longitude of the BTS supporting the cell (used by the MFS to compute location estimate based on TA positionning method). Sequence of:- number of degrees (from 0 to 180)- number of minutes (from 0 to 59)- number of fractional minutes (from 0 to 9999)direction (boolean, true for West and false for East) Site (CAE) List of numbers MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0,0,0,false Maximum Default
Coding rules
180,59,9999,true #
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / LCS 1) 0 longitude corresponds to the Greenwich Meridian;2) The coding for OMC-R HMI is described in the "BSS O&M Parameters" document, parameter "LCS-Longitude". No No
62 / 1182
3.2.13 (MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR) - (MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR
Factor used in the computation of the maximum radius of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when computing location estimate based on TA positionning method. step size = 0.05 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.5 Maximum 1 Default 0.6
63 / 1182
3.2.14 (MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR) - (MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR
Factor used in the computation of the minimum radius of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when computing location estimate based on TA positionning method. step size = 0.05 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.5 Maximum 1 Default 0.85
64 / 1182
3.2.15 (T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant) - (T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant
SMLC timer to guard the calculation of the MS position (including the RRLP message exchange with the target MS) in case of a Delay Tolerant Location Request. step size = 1 sec T_Location + T_Location_Longer > T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant >= T_LCS_Low_Delay Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 300 Default 10
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSS / LCS The timer is meaningful in the MFS when EN_LCS=1. No No
65 / 1182
3.2.16 (T_LCS_Low_Delay) - (T_LCS_Low_Delay)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_LCS_Low_Delay T_LCS_Low_Delay
SMLC timer to guard the calculation of the MS position (including the RRLP message exchange with the target MS) in case of a Low Delay Location Request. step size = 0.1 sec T_Location + T_Location_Longer > T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant >= T_LCS_Low_Delay Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 180 Default 3
66 / 1182
3.2.17 (T_Loc_abort) - (T_Loc_abort)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_Loc_abort T_Loc_abort
BSC timer supervising the response from the SMLC in case of Location Abort. step size = 0.1 sec T_Loc_abort < T_Location Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 30 Default 2
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / LCS The timer is meaningful in the BSC when EN_LCS=1. No No
67 / 1182
3.2.18 (T_Location) - (T_Location)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_Location T_Location
BSC timer, on a per call basis, supervising the response from the SMLC in case of Location request, when no RRLP exchange is triggered with the MS. step size = 0.1 sec T_Location + T_Location_Longer > T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant >= T_LCS_Low_Delay Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 300 Default 15
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / LCS The timer is meaningful in the BSC when EN_LCS=1. No No
68 / 1182
3.2.19 (T_Location_Longer) - (T_Location_Longer)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_Location_Longer T_Location_Longer
BSC timer, on a per call basis, supervising the response from the SMLC in case of Location request, when a RRLP exchange is triggered with the MS. step size = 1 sec T_Location + T_Location_Longer > T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant >= T_LCS_Low_Delay T_Location_Longer > T_Location Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 300 Default 30
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / LCS The timer is meaningful in the BSC when EN_LCS=1, and replaces T_Location timer in case of Conventional GPS, MS Assisted A-GPS and MS Based A-GPS positioning methods. No No
69 / 1182
3.2.20 (T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant) - (T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant
SMLC timer to guard the RRLP message exchange between the SMLC and the target MS, in case of a Delay Tolerant Location Request. step size = 1 sec T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant > T_RRLP_Delay_TolerantT_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant >= T_RRLP_Low_Delay Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 300 Default 9
70 / 1182
3.2.21 (T_RRLP_Low_Delay) - (T_RRLP_Low_Delay)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_RRLP_Low_Delay T_RRLP_Low_Delay
SMLC timer to guard the RRLP message exchange between the SMLC and the target MS, in case of a Low Delay Location Request. step size = 0.1 sec T_Low_Delay > T_RRLP_Low_DelayT_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant >= T_RRLP_Low_Delay Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 120 Default 2
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / LCS The timer is meaningful in the MFS when EN_LCS=1. No No
71 / 1182
72 / 1182
4 GSM Telecom Parameters
73 / 1182
4.1 Network (CDE)

4.1.1 (ADDR_MON) - (ADDR_MON)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition ADDR_MON ADDR_MON
Time it takes to ADDR_TR to be reached to report an alarm. On timeout, the address error counter is reset. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 15
74 / 1182
4.1.2 (ADDR_TR) - (ADDR_TR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value ADDR_TR ADDR_TR
Address error threshold for alarm detection. Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 60
75 / 1182
4.1.3 (Autocleaning_Timer) - (T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Autocleaning_Timer T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP
Guard time for detection of SDCCH/TCH autocleaning procedure. step size = 1 sec In micro cells, it is recommended to set N_BAD_SACCH so that T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP > N_BAD_SACCH * 480ms + 30 seconds if T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP <> 0. Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSS Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 40
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / Procedures / General timers and procedures T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP = 0 inhibits the autocleaning procedure. No No
76 / 1182
4.1.4 (BF_HI_RX) - (BF_HI_RX)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BF_HI_RX BF_HI_RX
Threshold on LAPD RX buffers occupancy for transition from normal to busy condition. BF_HI_RX > BF_LO_RX Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 80
77 / 1182
4.1.5 (BF_HI_TX) - (BF_HI_TX)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BF_HI_TX BF_HI_TX
Threshold on LAPD TX buffers occupancy for transition from normal to busy condition. BF_HI_TX > BF_LO_TX Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 30 Default 16
78 / 1182
4.1.6 (BF_LO_RX) - (BF_LO_RX)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BF_LO_RX BF_LO_RX
Threshold on LAPD RX buffers occupancy for transition from busy to normal condition. BF_LO_RX < BF_HI_RX Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 70
79 / 1182
4.1.7 (BF_LO_TX) - (BF_LO_TX)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BF_LO_TX BF_LO_TX
Threshold on LAPD TX buffers occupancy for transition from busy to normal condition. BF_LO_TX < BF_HI_TX Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 30 Default 8
80 / 1182
4.1.8 (CGI_REQUIRED) - (CGI_REQD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules CGI_REQUIRED CGI_REQD
Controls format of cell identifications sent to the MSC. 0: CGI not used, 1: CGI used Alcatel recommend to set the CGI_REQD parameter to 1 provided that the MSC supports the CGI format. The CGI_REQD parameter shall be set to 1 if the operator wants to allow inter-PLMN 2G to 2G handovers. If this parameter needs to be changed, it is recommended to change it during a migration phase to avoid any additional Telecom outage. Network (CDE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / Interworking / MSC interworking Depends on MSC Type. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
81 / 1182
4.1.9 (COUNT_DECR) - (COUNT_DECR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition COUNT_DECR COUNT_DECR
Stepsize by which the leaky bucket counter used during the reaction to TCU overload is decremented upon T_COUNT_I expiry. Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 1
82 / 1182
4.1.10 (COUNT_I_THRESHOLD) - (COUNT_I_THRESHOLD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition COUNT_I_THRESHOLD COUNT_I_THRESHOLD
Leaky bucket counter threshold used to trigger defense actions upon TCU overload. Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 50 Default 10
83 / 1182
4.1.11 (COUNT_INCR_1) - (COUNT_INCR_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition COUNT_INCR_1 COUNT_INCR_1
Stepsize by which the leaky bucket counter used during the reaction to TCU overload is incremented upon TCU overload level 1. COUNT_INCR_1 <= COUNT_INCR_2 Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 10 Default 2
84 / 1182
4.1.12 (COUNT_INCR_2) - (COUNT_INCR_2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition COUNT_INCR_2 COUNT_INCR_2
Stepsize by which the leaky bucket counter used during the reaction to TCU overload is incremented upon TCU overload level 2. COUNT_INCR_2 >= COUNT_INCR_1 Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 4
85 / 1182
4.1.13 (CRC_MON) - (CRC_MON)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CRC_MON CRC_MON
Time in which CRC_TR is to be reached to report an alarm. On timeout, the CRC error counter is reset. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 25.5 Default 10
86 / 1182
4.1.14 (CRC_TR) - (CRC_TR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value CRC_TR CRC_TR
CRC error threshold for alarm detection. Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 50
87 / 1182
4.1.15 (EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY) (EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY
Defines if the G1 non-capable MS is supported or not in the network. 0: G1 non-capable MS-s are only supported in the cells where the BCCH is not configured on the G1 band (i.e. BCCH is configured on PGSM band or on DCS1800 band) .1: G1 non-capable MS-s are not supported in any cell that contains at least one G1 TRX of the network (Note these MS-s are still supported in other cells). When EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY is set to "0", if the BCCH is not configured on the G1 band (i.e. BCCH is configured on PGSM band or on DCS1800 band), then:1) the OMC-R does not allow the operator to define the CCCH, SDCCH and CBCH on a G1 TRX.2) TRX_PREF_MARK must be <> 0 for a hopping G1 TRX . Network (CDE) Number BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Mandatory rules
88 / 1182
4.1.16 (EN_FR_IF_HR_PREF) - (EN_FR_IF_HR_PREF)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_FR_IF_HR_PREF EN_FR_IF_HR_PREF
When set, this flag allows, when bugged MS asking for a "dual rate, half-rate preferred", to allocate a full rate channel. 0 : function disabled, 1 : function enabled Network (CDE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
89 / 1182
4.1.17 (I_TX_LAPD) - (I_TX_LAPD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value I_TX_LAPD I_TX_LAPD
Maximum LAPD transmission queue length. Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 5 Maximum 204 Default 105
90 / 1182
4.1.18 (LB_DECR) - (LB_DECR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LB_DECR LB_DECR
Stepsize by which a leaky bucket overload counter in the BSC is decremented on T_LB_OV expiry. Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 3
91 / 1182
4.1.19 (LB_INCR) - (LB_INCR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LB_INCR LB_INCR
Stepsize by which a leaky bucket overload counter in the BSC is incremented each time an OVERLOAD is received from the FU. Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 2
92 / 1182
4.1.20 (MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i [1]) - (MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i [1])

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i [1] MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i [1]
Percentage of MEASUREMENT RESULT messages discarded by the TCU at step I. Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 10
93 / 1182

94 / 1182

95 / 1182

96 / 1182

97 / 1182

98 / 1182

99 / 1182

100 / 1182

101 / 1182

102 / 1182
4.1.30 (NBLK) - (NBLK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NBLK NBLK
Maximum number of BLOCK messages that can be sent if the ACK from the MSC is not received. 255: infinite transmission Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 2
103 / 1182
4.1.31 (NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1) - (NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1 NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1
Number of steps needed to reduce the load upon TCU overload level 1. NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1 <= NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2 Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 1
104 / 1182
4.1.32 (NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2) - (NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2 NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2
Number of steps to reduce the load upon TCU overload level 2. NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2 >= NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1 Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 2
105 / 1182
4.1.33 (NUBLK) - (NUBLK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NUBLK NUBLK
Maximum number of UNBLOCK messages that are sent if the ACK from the MSC is not received. 255: infinite transmission Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 2
106 / 1182
4.1.34 (PROT_MON) - (PROT_MON)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PROT_MON PROT_MON
Time in which PROT_TH is to be reached to report an alarm. On timeout, the protocol error counter is reset. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 10
107 / 1182
4.1.35 (PROT_TH) - (PROT_TH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value PROT_TH PROT_TH
Protocol error threshold for alarm detection. Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 10
108 / 1182
4.1.36 (SDCCH_AVG_PERIOD) - (SDCCH_AVG_PERIOD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value SDCCH_AVG_PERIOD SDCCH_AVG_PERIOD
Period used to average the processor occupancy measurements. 8 bits, step size=1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 16 Default 10
109 / 1182
4.1.37 (SDCCH_HIGH_DELAY) - (SDCCH_HIGH_DELAY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SDCCH_HIGH_DELAY SDCCH_HIGH_DELAY
Delay added to SDCCH internal release when TCU processor load is high. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 10 Default 2
110 / 1182
4.1.38 (SDCCH_LOW_DELAY) - (SDCCH_LOW_DELAY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SDCCH_LOW_DELAY SDCCH_LOW_DELAY
Delay added to SDCCH internal release when TCU processor load is low. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 10 Default 0
111 / 1182
4.1.39 (SMS_INHIBIT) - (SMS_INHIBIT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value SMS_INHIBIT SMS_INHIBIT
This flag enables/disables SMS support. 0: SMS permitted, 1: SMS inhibited Network (CDE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
112 / 1182
4.1.40 (SSF) - (SSF)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SSF SSF
This parameter inditifies the numbering plan of the Signalling Point Code. coded over 4 bits.only values 0, 4, 8 and 12 are defined : Value = 0, international network; Value = 4, Spare, reserved for international use; Value = 8, National network; Value = 12 , Reserved for national use Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 12 Default 12
Coding rules
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No SSF (Sub-Service Field) is composed of 4 bits: 2bits for Network Indicator and 2 spare bits. No No
113 / 1182
4.1.41 (T_BTS_EST_CNF) - (T_BTS_EST_CNF)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_BTS_EST_CNF T_BTS_EST_CNF
Supervision of the SAPI 3 Establishment procedure. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 4
114 / 1182
4.1.42 (T_BTS_RLS_CNF) - (T_BTS_RLS_CNF)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_BTS_RLS_CNF T_BTS_RLS_CNF
Supervision of the SAPI 3 Release procedure. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 4
115 / 1182
4.1.43 (T_CBC_READY) - (T_CBC_READY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_CBC_READY T_CBC_READY
Defines the maximum period during which the BSC tries to connect to the CBC before issueing an alarm or returning CMD-MODE Resp. step size: 1 sec T_CBC_READY > 8 * T_CONNECT Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 10 Maximum 600 Default 300
116 / 1182
4.1.44 (T_COUNT_I) - (T_COUNT_I)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_COUNT_I T_COUNT_I
Supervision of the leaky bucket counter used during the reaction to TCU overload. Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 50 Default 12
117 / 1182
4.1.45 (T_i) - (T_i)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_i T_i
Duration of SSP or SPI condition that triggers an Internal Reset procedure. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 120 Default 22
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / Interworking / MSC interworking No No
118 / 1182
4.1.46 (T_LB_OV) - (T_LB_OV)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_LB_OV T_LB_OV
Supervision of the leaky bucket counter used during the reaction to FU overload. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 25.5 Default 10
119 / 1182
4.1.47 (T_OVL_MSC) - (T_OVL_MSC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_OVL_MSC T_OVL_MSC
Minimum delay between two consecutive OVERLOAD messages sent to the MSC. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 6553.5 Default 20
120 / 1182
4.1.48 (T_RCR_ACK) - (T_RCR_ACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_RCR_ACK T_RCR_ACK
Supervision of the RF Channel Release procedure. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 5
121 / 1182
4.1.49 (T_SMSCB_RESP) - (T_SMSCB_RESP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_SMSCB_RESP T_SMSCB_RESP
Maximum waiting time to get a response from the BTS to a primitive. step size = 1 sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 2
122 / 1182
4.1.50 (T_WAIT_DTM_TCH_REL) - (T_WAIT_DTM_TCH_REL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_WAIT_DTM_TCH_REL T_WAIT_DTM_TCH_REL
This timer defines the time that, upon reception of a BSCGP BSC Shared DTM Information Indication message indicating that the TCH resource allocated to a DTM capable MS is being released at the BSC side, the MFS shall wait before releasing the TCH resource in its turn. step size = 100 ms, coded from 0 to 50 Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit ms Minimum 0 Maximum 5000 Default 1000
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: The value "0" indicates that, upon reception of a BSCGP BSC Shared DTM Information Indication message, the MFS shall release immediately the related TCH resource No No
123 / 1182
4.1.51 (T1_0858) - (T1_0858)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T1_0858 T1_0858
Delay during which, after reception of an OVERLOAD from the BTS, a new OVERLOAD is ignored. step size = 0.1sec T1_0858 < T2_0858 Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 3 Maximum 6553.5 Default 30
124 / 1182
4.1.52 (T2_0858) - (T2_0858)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T2_0858 T2_0858
Minimum delay between debarring of an access class, in the case where the BTS stops sending OVERLOAD. step size = 0.1sec T2_0858 > T1_0858 Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 3 Maximum 6553.5 Default 50
125 / 1182
4.1.53 (T9101) - (T9101)

Supervision of the SCCP connection release procedure. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 10
126 / 1182
4.1.54 (T9103) - (T9103)

Supervision of the Channel Activation procedure. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 3
127 / 1182
4.1.55 (T9108) - (T9108)

Supervision of the Physical Context procedure. step size = 0.1sec Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 3
128 / 1182
4.1.56 (T9110) - (T9110)

Guards the response of the MSC when no resources are allocated to the SCCP connection (started on the reception of CONN_IND(SCCP_CON_REQ) not carrying a HANDOVER REQUEST message and stopped when a HANDOVER REQUEST message is received on the same SCCP connection as the SCCP_CON_REQ message). Guards also the response of the MSC when a HANDOVER FAILURE or ASSIGNMENT FAILURE message has been sent (stopped when a HANDOVER REQUEST or CLEAR COMMAND message is received). step size = 0.1sec T9110 << max [T(ias), T(iar)]. Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 20
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / Procedures / General Timers and procedure No No
129 / 1182
4.1.57 (TCH_INFO_PERIOD) - (TCH_INFO_PERIOD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value TCH_INFO_PERIOD TCH_INFO_PERIOD
Periodicity of TCH usage information update in the BSC. stepsize = 0.1 Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSS Unit sec Minimum 2 Maximum 25.5 Default 5
OMC Changes: Displayed RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / HO/Reselection / HO Control No No
130 / 1182
4.1.58 (THR_LB_OV) - (THR_LB_OV)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THR_LB_OV THR_LB_OV
Counter threshold for triggering global defence actions in the BSC upon FU overload. Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 50 Default 10
131 / 1182
4.1.59 (THRESHOLD_1_0) - (THRESHOLD_1_0)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THRESHOLD_1_0 THRESHOLD_1_0
Free buffer thresholds separating "no overload" condition and "overload level 1" condition when pointer P points at position 0. THRESHOLD_1_0 >= THRESHOLD_2_0 Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 25
132 / 1182

133 / 1182

134 / 1182

135 / 1182

136 / 1182

137 / 1182

138 / 1182

139 / 1182

140 / 1182

141 / 1182

142 / 1182

Free buffer thresholds separating "overload level 1" condition and "overload level 2" condition when pointer P points at position 0. THRESHOLD_2_0 <= THRESHOLD_1_0 Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 22
143 / 1182

144 / 1182

145 / 1182

146 / 1182

147 / 1182

148 / 1182

149 / 1182

150 / 1182

151 / 1182

152 / 1182

153 / 1182
4.1.81 (TL_TCUA) - (TL_TCUA)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TL_TCUA TL_TCUA
Minimum delay between two consecutive TCU load increaseby the local overload controller. step size = 0.1sec TL_TCUA >TS_TCUA Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 50 Default 20
154 / 1182
4.1.82 (TL0) - (TL0)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TL0 TL0
Threshold on TCU Processor Occupancy Level. The TCU is in "Low Overload" state if its Processor Occupancy Level is higher or equal to TL0 and less than TL3." The TCU is in "No Overload" state if its Processor Occupancy Level is less than TL0. TL0 < TL3 < TL4 Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 60
155 / 1182
4.1.83 (TL1) - (TL1)

BSC processor occupancy threshold used to decrement pointer P on buffer occupancy thresholds. TL1 < TL2 Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 70
156 / 1182
4.1.84 (TL2) - (TL2)

BSC processor occupancy threshold used to increment pointer P on buffer occupancy thresholds. TL3 > TL4 Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 85
157 / 1182
4.1.85 (TL3) - (TL3)

Threshold on TCU Processor Occupancy Level:1) In upward direction, the TCU Overload State is in "High Overload" state if "TL3 <= TCU Processor Occupancy Level < TL4";2) In downward direction, the TCU Overload State is still in "Very High Overload" State if "TL3 <= TCU Processor Occupancy Level < TL4";3) In downward direction, the TCU Overload State is in "Low Overload" state if "TL0 <= TCU Processor Occupancy Level < TL3. T0 < TL3 < TL4 Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 75
158 / 1182
4.1.86 (TL4) - (TL4)

Threshold on TCU Processor Occupancy Level. The TCU is in "Very High Overload" state if its Processor Occupancy Level is higher or equal to TL4. TL4 > TL3 > TL0 Network (CDE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 95
159 / 1182
4.1.87 (TRG_SDCCH) - (TRG_SDCCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TRG_SDCCH TRG_SDCCH
Controls if local overload controller is triggered upon SDCCH overload. 1 for TCU, 0 for others Network (CDE) Flag BSC BSC proc Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No This parameter is set by default to 1 for TCUs. It shall be set to 0 for other BSC processors No No
160 / 1182
4.1.88 (TS_TCUA) - (TS_TCUA)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TS_TCUA TS_TCUA
Minimum delay between two consecutive TCU load reduction by the local overload controller. step size = 0.1sec TS_TCUA < TL_TCUA Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 50 Default 10
161 / 1182
4.2 Site (CAE)

4.2.1 (A_LEV_HO) - (A_LEV_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value A_LEV_HO A_LEV_HO
Window size for level averages for handover. A_LEV_HO + W_LEV_HO < 32 A_LEV_HO = 2 x A_LEV_PC. A_PBGT_HO = 2 x A_LEV_HO Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 31 Default 8
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO & PC thresholds / Averaging PC-HO Window Size Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 8 8 8 8 4 8 8 8
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
162 / 1182
4.2.2 (A_LEV_MCHO) - (A_LEV_MCHO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value A_LEV_MCHO A_LEV_MCHO
Window size for level averages for microcell handover. A_LEV_MCHO + W_LEV_MCHO < 16 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 15 Default 2
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO Parameters /Lower Layer HO Control Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A N/A N/A 2 N/A N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
163 / 1182
4.2.3 (A_LEV_PC) - (A_LEV_PC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value A_LEV_PC A_LEV_PC
Window size for level averages for power control. A_LEV_PC + W_LEV_PC < 32 A_LEV_HO = 2 x A_LEV_PC Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 31 Default 4
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO & PC thresholds / Averaging PC-HO Window Size No No
164 / 1182
4.2.4 (A_PBGT_DR) - (A_PBGT_DR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value A_PBGT_DR A_PBGT_DR
Window size for neighbour cell level averages for forced directed retry. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 15 Default 4
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: DIR Edit Cell / HO parameters / Directed Retry No No
165 / 1182
4.2.5 (A_PBGT_HO) - (A_PBGT_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition A_PBGT_HO A_PBGT_HO
Window size for averaging neighbour cell levels and averaging current cell levels for power budget calculation. A_PBGT_HO + W_PBGT_HO < 32 A_PBGT_HO = 2 x A_LEV_HO Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 31 Default 16
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO & PC thresholds / Averaging PC-HO Window Size should be set to 6 in suburban area, to 8 in urban area and to 12 in rural area Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 12 12 12 12 6 12 12 12
Cell Type Dependent
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
166 / 1182
4.2.6 (A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR) - (A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR
Quality averaging window size for AMR FR-to-HR channel adaptation. step size = 1 Samfr A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR >= A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 61 Default 61
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: RRM Edit Cell / HO & PC thresholds / Averaging PC-HO Window Size No No
167 / 1182
4.2.7 (A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR) - (A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR
Quality averaging window size for AMR HR-to-FR channel adaptation. step size = 1 Samfr A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR >= A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 61 Default 8
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: RRM Edit Cell / HO & PC thresholds / Averaging PC-HO Window Size No No
168 / 1182
4.2.8 (A_QUAL_HO) - (A_QUAL_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value A_QUAL_HO A_QUAL_HO
Window size for quality averages for handover. A_QUAL_HO + W_QUAL_HO < 32 A_QUAL_HO = 2 x A_QUAL_PC Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 31 Default 8
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO & PC thresholds / Averaging PC-HO Window Size Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 8 8 8 8 4 8 8 8
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
169 / 1182
4.2.9 (A_QUAL_PC) - (A_QUAL_PC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value A_QUAL_PC A_QUAL_PC
Window size for quality averages for power control. A_QUAL_PC + W_QUAL_PC < 32 A_QUAL_HO = 2 x A_QUAL_PC Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 31 Default 4
170 / 1182
4.2.10 (A_RANGE_HO) - (A_RANGE_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value A_RANGE_HO A_RANGE_HO
Window size for distance averages. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 31 Default 8
171 / 1182
4.2.11 (A_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (A_TRAFFIC_LOAD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value A_TRAFFIC_LOAD A_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Window size for load averages. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 16 Default 12
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: RRM Edit Cell / Cell Information / Dedicated Radio Resources 1/3 No
Nb of TRX Dependent t01 4 t02 4 t03 8 t04 8 t05 12 t06 12 t07 12 t08 12 t09 12 t010 12 t011 12 t012 12
172 / 1182
4.2.12 (AC 0) - (AC_0)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value AC 0 AC_0
Indicates if Access Class 0 is barred. 0: not barred, 1: barred Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / RACH Ctrl No No
173 / 1182
4.2.13 (AC 1) - (AC_1)

174 / 1182
4.2.14 (AC 11) - (AC_11)

175 / 1182
4.2.15 (AC 12) - (AC_12)

176 / 1182
4.2.16 (AC 13) - (AC_13)

177 / 1182
4.2.17 (AC 14) - (AC_14)

178 / 1182
4.2.18 (AC 15) - (AC_15)

179 / 1182
4.2.19 (AC 2) - (AC_2)

180 / 1182
4.2.20 (AC 3) - (AC_3)

181 / 1182
4.2.21 (AC 4) - (AC_4)

182 / 1182
4.2.22 (AC 5) - (AC_5)

183 / 1182
4.2.23 (AC 6) - (AC_6)

184 / 1182
4.2.24 (AC 7) - (AC_7)

185 / 1182
4.2.25 (AC 8) - (AC_8)

186 / 1182
4.2.26 (AC 9) - (AC_9)

187 / 1182
4.2.27 (ADDITIONAL_RESELECT_PARAM) (ADDITIONAL_RESELECT_PARAM)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition ADDITIONAL_RESELECT_PARAM ADDITIONAL_RESELECT_PARAM
Indicates if C2 cell selection parameters are present in SYS_INFO_7&8 or SYS_INFO_4. 1bit; 0= the SI 4 rest octets, if present, are used to derive the value of PI and possibly C2 parameters.1= the value of PI and possibly C2 parameters in a SYS INFO TYPE or message 8 are used Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: SEL Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Selection No No
188 / 1182
4.2.28 (AG_PREMPT_PCH) - (AG_PREMPT_PCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AG_PREMPT_PCH AG_PREMPT_PCH
Flag to enable pre-emption of Paging sub-channels for Access Grant messages when there is one remaining free AGCH block. 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled Lets define the free AGCH blocks as the number of blocks remaining for the AGCH messages when the BCCH extended block and NCH blocks have been excluded.- If there is no free AGCH block then the flag is not used (pre-emption mandatory, default value 0 is not used by BTS )- If there is only one free AGCH block then AG_PREMPT_PCH =1 or 0 (pre-emption allowed)- If there is more than one free AGCH then AG_PREMPT_PCH = 0 (pre-emption forbidden). Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Ctrl Channel No No
189 / 1182
4.2.29 (ALLOC_ANYWAY) - (ALLOC_ANYWAY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition ALLOC_ANYWAY ALLOC_ANYWAY
Controls whether a queued request can be allocated on free resource at expiry of its queuing timer independently of the threshold NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO. Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / HO Parameters / General HO Control only relevant when NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO > 0 No No
190 / 1182
4.2.30 (AMR_FR_HYST) - (AMR_FR_HYST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules AMR_FR_HYST AMR_FR_HYST
Hysteresis for AMR-NB FR codec mode adaptation. step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, , 15 = 7.5 dB As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_FR_HYST + AMR_FR_THR_i <= 16dB (with i = 13). Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 7.5 Default 2
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: RRM Edit Cell / Cell Information / Dedicated Radio Resources 2/3 Default value corresponds to the optimal default codec subset (12.2kbit/s, 7.95kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s).Significant only if EN_AMR_FR is set to TRUE. No No
191 / 1182
4.2.31 (AMR_FR_SUBSET) - (AMR_FR_SUBSET)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AMR_FR_SUBSET AMR_FR_SUBSET
Bitmap (8 bits) defining the codec subset that shall be used for AMR-NB FR calls (1 to 4 codecs). bit 8 (most significant)=1: 12,2 kbit/s is part of the subset; bit 7=1: 10,2 kbit/s is part of the subset; bit 6=1: 7,95 kbit/s is part of the subset; bit 5=1: 7,40 kbit/s is part of the subset; bit 4=1: 6,70 kbit/s is part of the subset; bit 3=1: 5,90 kbit/s is part of the subset; bit 2=1: 5,15 kbit/s is part of the subset; bit 1 (least significant)=1: 4,75 kbit/s is part of the subset In one subset a maximum of 4 codec modes can be chosen (a maximum of 4 bits can be set to 1). Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 240 Default 164
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: RRM Edit BSC / Procedures / AMR Default value corresponds to an optimal codec subset:12.2kbit/s, 7.95kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s No No
192 / 1182
4.2.32 (AMR_FR_THR_1) - (AMR_FR_THR_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AMR_FR_THR_1 AMR_FR_THR_1
Threshold for AMR-NB FR codec mode adaptation between lowest codec mode and second lowest codec mode. step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, , 63 = 31.5 dB AMR_FR_THR_1 <= AMR_FR_THR_2 As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_FR_HYST + AMR_FR_THR_1 <= 16dB. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 31.5 Default 6.5
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: RRM Edit Cell / Cell Information / Dedicated Radio Resources 2/3 Default value corresponds to the optimal default codec subset (12.2kbit/s, 7.95kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s). AMR_FR_THR_1 is not used if less than 2 codecs are in the AMR FR subset.Significant only if EN_AMR_FR is set to TRUE. No No
193 / 1182

Threshold for AMR-NB FR codec mode adaptation between second lowest codec mode and third lowest codec mode. step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, , 63 = 31.5 dB AMR_FR_THR_3 >= AMR_FR_THR_2 >= AMR_FR_THR_1 As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_FR_HYST + AMR_FR_THR_2 <= 16dB. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 31.5 Default 11.5
194 / 1182

Threshold for AMR-NB FR codec mode adaptation between third lowest codec mode and fourth lowest codec mode. step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, , 63 = 31.5 dB AMR_FR_THR_3 >= AMR_FR_THR_2 As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_FR_HYST + AMR_FR_THR_3 <= 16dB. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 31.5 Default 11.5
195 / 1182
4.2.35 (AMR_HR_HYST) - (AMR_HR_HYST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules AMR_HR_HYST AMR_HR_HYST
Hysteresis for AMR-NB HR codec mode adaptation. step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, , 15 = 7.5 dB As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_HR_HYST + AMR_HR_THR_i <= 16dB (with i = 13). Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 7.5 Default 2
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: RRM Edit Cell / Cell Information / Dedicated Radio Resources 2/3 Default value corresponds to the optimal default codec subset (7.4kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s, 5.15kbit/s).Significant only if EN_AMR_HR is set to TRUE. No No
196 / 1182
4.2.36 (AMR_HR_SUBSET) - (AMR_HR_SUBSET)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AMR_HR_SUBSET AMR_HR_SUBSET
Bitmap (6 bits) defining the codec subset that shall be used for AMR-NB HR calls (1 to 4 codecs). Coded on 1 byte. Bit 8 (most significant) = Bit 7 = 0; bit 6 =1: 7,95 kbit/s is part of the subset; bit 5=1: 7,40 kbit/s is part of the subset; bit 4=1: 6,70 kbit/s is part of the subset; bit 3=1: 5,90 kbit/s is part of the subset; bit 2=1: 5,15 kbit/s is part of the subset; bit 1 (least significant)=1: 4,75 kbit/s is part of the subset; In one subset a maximum of 4 codec modes can be chosen (a maximum of 4 bits can be set to 1). The subset shall not contain only 7.4 kbit/s codec mode. The codec mode 7.95 kbit/s is not supported by Alcatel BSS. Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 60 Default 22
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: RRM Edit BSC / Procedures / AMR Default value corresponds to the optimal default codec subset (7.4kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s, 5.15kbit/s). No No
197 / 1182
4.2.37 (AMR_HR_THR_1) - (AMR_HR_THR_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AMR_HR_THR_1 AMR_HR_THR_1
Threshold for AMR-NB HR codec mode adaptation between lowest codec mode and second lowest codec mode. step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, , 63 = 31.5 dB AMR_HR_THR_1 <= AMR_HR_THR_2 As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_HR_HYST + AMR_HR_THR_1 <= 16dB. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 31.5 Default 11
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: RRM Edit Cell / Cell Information / Dedicated Radio Resources 2/3 Default value corresponds to the optimal default codec subset (7.4kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s, 5.15kbit/s). AMR_HR_THR_1 is not used if less than 2 codecs are in the AMR HR subset.Significant only if EN_AMR_HR is set to TRUE. No No
198 / 1182

Threshold for AMR-NB HR codec mode adaptation between second lowest codec mode and third lowest codec mode. step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, , 63 = 31.5 dB AMR_HR_THR_3 >= AMR_HR_THR_2 >= AMR_HR_THR_1 As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_HR_HYST + AMR_HR_THR_2 <= 16dB. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 31.5 Default 12.5
199 / 1182

Threshold for AMR-NB HR codec mode adaptation between third lowest codec mode and fourth lowest codec mode. step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, , 63 = 31.5 dB AMR_HR_THR_3 >= AMR_HR_THR_2 As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_HR_HYST + AMR_HR_THR_3 <= 16dB. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 31.5 Default 12.5
200 / 1182
4.2.40 (AMR_START_MODE_FR) - (AMR_START_MODE_FR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AMR_START_MODE_FR AMR_START_MODE_FR
Indicates the codec used at the beginning of a AMR-NB FR call, until codec mode adaptation is started by the BTS. 0: implicit rule is used for initial codec mode; 1: lowest codec mode of the subset; 2: second lowest codec mode (used if the subset contains more than one codec mode); 3: third lowest codec mode (used if the subset contains more than two codec modes); 4: highest codec mode (used if the subset contains four codec modes) Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4 Default 0
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / Procedures / AMR No No
201 / 1182
4.2.41 (AMR_START_MODE_HR) - (AMR_START_MODE_HR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AMR_START_MODE_HR AMR_START_MODE_HR
Indicates the codec used at the beginning of a AMR-NB HR call, until codec mode adaptation is started by the BTS. 0: implicit rule is used for initial codec mode; 1: lowest codec mode of the subset; 2: second lowest codec mode (used if the subset contains more than one codec mode); 3: third lowest codec mode (used if the subset contains more than two codec modes); 4: highest codec mode (used if the subset contains four codec modes) If AMR_START_MODE_HR is explicit (I.e. not equal to 0), the chosen codec mode shall not correspond to 7.40 kbit/s. Use codec mode 6.7 kbit/s as start mode for AMR-NB HR should be avoided. Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4 Default 0
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
OMC Changes: PRC &SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / Procedures / AMR No No
202 / 1182
4.2.42 (AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1) - (AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1 AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1
Hysteresis for AMR-WB GMSK codec mode adaptation, for transition between lowest codec mode and second lowest codec mode. step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, , 15 = 7.5 dB AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_ 1<=AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2 As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB, following rules is highly recommended : AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1 + AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 <= 16dB. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 7.5 Default 2.5
Recommended rules
203 / 1182
4.2.43 (AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2) - (AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2 AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2
Hysteresis for AMR-WB GMSK codec mode adaptation, for transition between highest codec mode and second lowest codec mode. step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, , 15 = 7.5 dB AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_ 1<=AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2 As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB, following rules is highly recommended : AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2 + AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2 <= 16dB. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 7.5 Default 2.5
Recommended rules
204 / 1182
4.2.44 (AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1) - (AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1
Threshold for AMR-WB GMSK codec mode adaptation between lowest codec mode and second lowest codec mode. step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, , 63 = 31.5 dB AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 < AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1+ AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1<=AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2+ AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2 As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1 + AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 <= 16dB. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 31.5 Default 6
Recommended rules
205 / 1182
4.2.45 (AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2) - (AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2 AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2
Threshold for AMR-WB GMSK codec mode adaptation between second lowest codec mode and highest codec mode. step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, , 63 = 31.5 dB AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 < AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1+ AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1<=AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2+ AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2 As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2 + AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2 <= 16dB. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 31.5 Default 8
Recommended rules
206 / 1182
4.2.46 (AUTO_BAR_BSS_OVERLOAD) - (EN_BSS_OVRL_CLASS_BAR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition AUTO_BAR_BSS_OVERLOAD EN_BSS_OVRL_CLASS_BAR
This flag enables/disables access class automatic barring upon BTS/BSC overload. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / Procedures / Overload and Barring No No
207 / 1182
4.2.47 (AUTO_BAR_CELL) - (AUT_BAR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value AUTO_BAR_CELL AUT_BAR
This flag enables/inhibits automatic barring of cell. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
208 / 1182
4.2.48 (AUTO_BAR_EC) - (EC_BAR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value AUTO_BAR_EC EC_BAR
This flag enables/disables automatic barring of Emergency Class. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
209 / 1182
4.2.49 (Automatic AC barring on TCH load) - (EN_LOAD_MNGT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Automatic AC barring on TCH load EN_LOAD_MNGT
This flag enables/disables automatic barring of access classes on TCH load criterion. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: SEL Edit Cell / Cell Information / RACH Ctrl No No
210 / 1182
4.2.50 (B_NUM) - (B_NUM)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value B_NUM B_NUM
Number of BLOCK/UNBLOCK messages sent in one burst. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 35 Default 5
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / Interworking / MSC interworking Default value depends on MSC type. No No
211 / 1182
4.2.51 (BCC) - (BCC (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value BCC BCC (BSC)
BTS colour code of the cell. coded over 3 bits Equal to BCC (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
Modifiable Parameter Access
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Description (+ Edit External cell / circuit1/2) Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
External Comment
212 / 1182
4.2.52 (BCC) - (BCC (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value BCC BCC (MFS)
BTS colour code of the cell. coded over 3 bits Equal to BCC (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Description (+ Edit External cell / circuit1/2) Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
External Comment
213 / 1182
4.2.53 (BCC) - (BCC (n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value BCC BCC (n)
BTS colour code of the adjacent cell. coded over 3 bits Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No Edit External Cell / Circuit 1/2 Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
214 / 1182
4.2.54 (BCCH_ARFCN) - (BCCH_ARFCN(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BCCH_ARFCN BCCH_ARFCN(n)
Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number of the BCCH of the adjacent cell. - BCCH_FREQUENCY(n) = BCCH_ARFCN(n)1) for Non Evolium serving cell : The cell neighborhood for reselection is controlled by EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION value and FDD_ARFCN_LIST content.The cell neighborhood for handover is controlled by EN_3G_HO and FDD_ARFCN values.- if the neighborhood of the serving cell for reselection is 2G only, then there can be up to 32 different BCCH 2G frequencies for the set of all the target cells.- if the neighborhood of the serving cell for reselection is mixed 2G/3G, and if all 2G frequencies can be encoded in the SI2 or SI2bis message, and if the SI2ter message is used to encode only 3G frequencies, then there shall be no more than 31 different BCCH 2G frequencies for the set of all the target cells.- since the neighborhood of the serving cell for handover is 2G only, then there can be up to 32 different Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1023 Default None
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Adjacencies No No
215 / 1182
4.2.55 (BCCH_ARFCN) - (BCCH_FREQUENCY(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules BCCH_ARFCN BCCH_FREQUENCY(n)
Indicates the frequency used as BCCH. - BCCH_FREQUENCY(n) = BCCH_ARFCN(n)1) for Non Evolium serving cell : Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1023 Default None
216 / 1182
4.2.56 (BCCH_EXT) - (BCCH_EXT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules BCCH_EXT BCCH_EXT
This flag enables / disables the use of extended BCCH. 0: false, 1:true -BCCH_EXT cannot be set to true if the associated BTS is a non-Evolium one.-When EN_SOLSA is enabled, the BCCH_EXT shall be set to true.-When EN_VGCS is disabled :. if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >= 1-When EN_VGCS is enabled : . if BCCH_EXT = false, BS_AG_BLKS_RES >= NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS . if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES > NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS The support of extended BCCH (parameter BCCH_EXT) is HIGHLY recommended in cells having adjacent cells in several frequency bands and at least 18 adjacent frequencies within the same band. Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Recommended rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / Radio Channel Config / TRX Configuration No No
217 / 1182
4.2.57 (BS_AG_BLKS_RES) - (BS_AG_BLKS_RES (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_AG_BLKS_RES BS_AG_BLKS_RES (BSC)
Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the access grant channel (AGCH). coded on 3 bits (000 : 0, ...111 : 7) -BS_AG_BLKS_RES (MFS) = BS_AG_BLKS_RES (BSC) for a given cell-when CCCH_CONF=0 and CBCH is configured in the cell, BS_AG_BLKS_RES>0- when CCCH_CONF=2, max value of BS_AG_BLKS_RES is 7 and BS_AG_BLKS_RES must be > 0 if CBCH is configured in the cell.-When EN_VGCS is disabled :. if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >= 1-When EN_VGCS is enabled : . if BCCH_EXT = false, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >= NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS . if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES > NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: PAG Edit Cell / Cell Information / Ctrl Channel Maximum and Default values given for CCCH_CONF=0For CCCH_CONF=1, max=2, def=1 No No
218 / 1182
4.2.58 (BS_P_CON_ACK) - (BS_P_CON_ACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value BS_P_CON_ACK BS_P_CON_ACK
Supervision of the BS Power Control procedure. step size=1 (2 x Samfr) Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit 2 x Samfr Minimum 0 Maximum 31 Default 3
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / PC parameters / General PC Control Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
219 / 1182
4.2.59 (BS_P_CON_INT) - (BS_P_CON_INT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value BS_P_CON_INT BS_P_CON_INT
Minimum delay between two consecutive BS power commands. step size=1 (2 x Samfr) Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit 2 x Samfr Minimum 0 Maximum 31 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / PC parameters / General PC Control Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
220 / 1182
4.2.60 (BS_PA_MFRMS) - (BS_PA_MFRMS (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_PA_MFRMS BS_PA_MFRMS (BSC)
Number of 51 frame multiframes between consecutive occurrences of a Paging Group. coded on 3 bits (000 : 2, ... 111: 9) BS_PA_MFRMS (BSC) = BS_PA_MFRMS (MFS) for a given cell Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 2 Maximum 9 Default 5
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: PAG Edit Cell / Cell Information / Ctrl Channel The bigger this parameter is, the lesser the MS power consumption is. No No
221 / 1182
4.2.61 (BS_TXPWR_MAX) - (BS_TXPWR_MAX (BSC))

When a cell is shared, the BS_TX_POWER_MAX and BS_TX_POWER_MAX_INNER powers must always be defined against the actual physical power of the main sector. If the actual power of the secondary sector is lower than the actual power of the main sector, the operator has to adjust the values of BS_TX_POWER_MAX and BS_TX_POWER_MAX_INNER to avoid requiring too high an output power than is actually available. Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_TXPWR_MAX BS_TXPWR_MAX (BSC)
This parameter defines the power reduction relative to the maximum GMSK output power of the BTS. step size = 2dB. 0: 0 dB, 1: -2dB, ..., 15: -30dB BS_TXPWR_MAX >= BS_TXPWR_MINEqual to BS_TXPWR_MAX (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -30 Maximum 0 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / PC parameters / General PC Control The BTS maximum allowed transmit power is defined relatively to the BTS maximum RF transmit power in GMSK (due to hardware limitation). No No
222 / 1182
4.2.62 (BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER) - (BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER (BSC))

When a cell is shared, the BS_TX_POWER_MAX and BS_TX_POWER_MAX_INNER powers must always be defined against the actual physical power of the main sector. If the actual power of the secondary sector is lower than the actual power of the main sector, the operator has to adjust the values of BS_TX_POWER_MAX and BS_TX_POWER_MAX_INNER to avoid requiring too high an output power than is actually available. Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER (BSC)
This parameter defines the power reduction relative to the maximum GMSK output power of the TRX of the inner zone in a concentric or multi-band cell. step size = 2dB. 0: 0 dB, 1: -2dB, ..., 15: -30dB Equal to BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER (MFS) and BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER >= BS_TXPWR_MIN Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -30 Maximum 0 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / PC parameters / General PC Control The BTS maximum allowed transmit power is defined relatively to the BTS maximum RF transmit power in GMSK (due to hardware limitation).Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes.
223 / 1182
Cell Type Dependent
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell
N/A N/A # # N/A N/A N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
224 / 1182
4.2.63 (BS_TXPWR_MIN) - (BS_TXPWR_MIN)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules BS_TXPWR_MIN BS_TXPWR_MIN
BTS minimum allowed transmission power. step size = 2dB. 0: 0 dB, 1: -2dB, ..., 15: -30dB BS_TXPWR_MIN <= BS_TXPWR_MAXBS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER >= BS_TXPWR_MIN Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -30 Maximum 0 Default -24
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / PC parameters / General PC Control No No
225 / 1182
4.2.64 (BSC Primary X25 Address) - (BSC_X25_primary_address)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value BSC Primary X25 Address BSC_X25_primary_address
BSC X25 primary address. 0 to 15 characters string. *: default = empty string changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference OMC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default *
OMC Changes: OAM RNO Changes: No DCN Management / Add a BSS The minimum, maximum and default values indicated are only for implementation purposes. No No
226 / 1182
4.2.65 (BSC Primary X25 Address [1]) - (BSC_X25_primary_address_i [1])

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value BSC Primary X25 Address [1] BSC_X25_primary_address_i [1]
First character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
227 / 1182

Tenth character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
228 / 1182

Eleventh character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
229 / 1182

Twelfth character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
230 / 1182

Thirteenth character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
231 / 1182

Fourteenth character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
232 / 1182

Fifteenth character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
233 / 1182

Second character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
234 / 1182

Third character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
235 / 1182

Fourth character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
236 / 1182

Fifth character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
237 / 1182

Sixth character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
238 / 1182

Seventh character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
239 / 1182

Eighth character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
240 / 1182

Ninth character of BSC X25 primary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
241 / 1182
4.2.80 (BSC Secondary X25 Address) - (BSC_X25_secondary_address)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value BSC Secondary X25 Address BSC_X25_secondary_address
BSC X25 secondary address. 0 to 15 characters string. *: default = empty string changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference OMC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default *
242 / 1182
4.2.81 (BSC Secondary X25 Address [1]) (BSC_X25_secondary_address_i [1])

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value BSC Secondary X25 Address [1] BSC_X25_secondary_address_i [1]
First character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
243 / 1182

Tenth character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
244 / 1182

Eleventh character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
245 / 1182

Twelfth character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
246 / 1182

Thirteenth character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
247 / 1182

Fourteenth character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
248 / 1182

Fifteenth character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
249 / 1182

Second character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
250 / 1182

Third character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
251 / 1182

Fourth character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
252 / 1182

Fifth character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
253 / 1182

Sixth character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
254 / 1182

Seventh character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
255 / 1182

Eighth character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
256 / 1182

Ninth character of BSC X25 secondary address. 1character of a string. default = blank character changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 20
257 / 1182
4.2.96 (BSC Signalling Point Code) - (OPC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value BSC Signalling Point Code OPC
Signalling Point Code of the BSC. coded over 14 bits Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 16383 Default 12
OMC Changes: EML RNO Changes: No BSS parameters / A interface info Must be equal to DPC and SSF used by the MSC for adressing the BSC. Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
258 / 1182
4.2.97 (BSC_EN_RF_RES_IND) - (BSC_EN_RF_RES_IND)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BSC_EN_RF_RES_IND BSC_EN_RF_RES_IND
Enables/disables the RF RESOURCE INDICATION processing by the BSC. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: SEL No No
259 / 1182
4.2.98 (BSIC) - (BSIC (GSM))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value BSIC BSIC (GSM)
Concatenation of the NCC and the BCC. Site (CAE) Abstract BSC cell Unit None Minimum # Maximum # Default #
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Description No No
260 / 1182
4.2.99 (BTS_Queue_Length) - (BTS_Q_LENGTH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BTS_Queue_Length BTS_Q_LENGTH
Maximum number of Assignment Requests and Handover Requests that can be queued simultaneously. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 64 Default 3
261 / 1182
4.2.100 (CALL_RE_ESTABLISHMENT) - (RE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CALL_RE_ESTABLISHMENT RE
This flag indicates to the MS if call reestablishment is allowed in the cell. 0: allowed, 1: not allowed Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: SEL Edit Cell / Cell Information / RACH Ctrl No No
262 / 1182
4.2.101 (Call_User_Data_Selector) - (Call_user_data_sel)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Call_User_Data_Selector Call_user_data_sel
Identifies the higher protocol selector for an outgoing connection. 0 to 16 bytes string Can be changed only when SMSCB_State is disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / Interworking / CBC interworking Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes.Each byte of the string can get a value in the range [0..255]. No No
263 / 1182
4.2.102 (Candidate cell priority) - (PRIORITY(0,n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Candidate cell priority PRIORITY(0,n)
Priority of the cell n in the HO candidate cell evaluation process. 0: highest priority, 5: lowest priority Site (CAE) Number BSC adj Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 5 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Adjacencies No No
264 / 1182
4.2.103 (CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION) (CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION
This parameter determines the condition on traffic load in the serving cell to trigger a "general capture" handover. 0: Any load, 1: Not low, 2: High Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO parameters / Hierarchical and multiband HO ctrl No No
265 / 1182
4.2.104 (CBC Primary X25 Address) - (CBC_X25_primary_address)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value CBC Primary X25 Address CBC_X25_primary_address
CBC X25 primary address. 0 to 15 characters string. *: default = empty string changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 32
OMC Changes: changeable RNO Changes: No DCN management/Modify Peer Entities The minimum, maximum and default values indicated are only for implementation purposes. No No
266 / 1182
4.2.105 (CBC Secondary X25 Address) - (CBC_X25_secondary_address)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value CBC Secondary X25 Address CBC_X25_secondary_address
CBC X25 secondary address. 0 to 15 characters string. *: default = empty string changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 32
OMC Changes: changeable RNO Changes: No DCN management/Modify Peer Entities The minimum, maximum and default values indicated are only for implementation purposes. No No
267 / 1182
4.2.106 (CBC_Operator) - (Operator)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules CBC_Operator Operator
Identifies the CBC operator. 0 to 20 characters string (default = empty string) are sent by the OMC on the OMC/BSC interface . BSC performs the padding of OMC string with space characters on the right side of the string until 20 bytes are reached. At Upload, OMC RNL removes padded space characters from the retrieved BSC value. Can be changed only when SMSCB_State is disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 32
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / Interworking / CBC interworking Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
268 / 1182
4.2.107 (CBC_Password) - (Password)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules CBC password. 0 to 20 characters string (default = empty string) are sent by the OMC on the OMC/BSC interface. BSC performs the padding of OMC string with space characters on the right side of the string until 20 bytes are reached. At Upload, OMC RNL removes padded space characters from the retrieved BSC value. Can be changed only when SMSCB_State is disabled Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Modifiable Parameter Access External Comment Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 32 CBC_Password Password
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / Interworking / CBC interworking Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
269 / 1182
4.2.108 (CBC_Window) - (CBC_window)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CBC_Window CBC_window
Maximum number of outstanding primitives on the BSC/CBC interface for both incoming and outgoing primitives. Can be changed only when SMSCB_State is disabledshall be set to "1" when SMSCB_FEATURE_SET="FS1" Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / Interworking / CBC interworking Default value corresponds to SMSCB_FEATURE_SET = FS1.If SMSCB_FEATURE_SET = FS2, CBC_Window should be set to 3. No No
270 / 1182
4.2.109 (CCCH_LOAD_IND_PERIOD) - (RACHRT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CCCH_LOAD_IND_PERIOD RACHRT
Minimum delay between two consecutive sendings of CCCH LOAD INDICATION messages. step size=1 (51mfr) RACHRT > RACH_LOAD_MEAS_PER Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit 51mfr Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 255
OMC Changes: Displayed(PRC&SC) RNO Changes: PAG Edit Cell / Cell Information / Ctrl Channel No No
271 / 1182
4.2.110 (CCCH_LOAD_MEAS_PERIOD) - (RACH_LOAD_MEAS_PER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value CCCH_LOAD_MEAS_PERIOD RACH_LOAD_MEAS_PER
Period over which CCCH load measurements are made. step size=1 RACH_LOAD_MEAS_PER < RACHRT Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit 51mfr Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 32
272 / 1182
4.2.111 (Cell Type) - (Cell_Type)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Cell Type Cell_Type
Combination of CELL_DIMENSION_TYPE, CELL_LAYER_TYPE, CELL_PARTITION_TYPE, CELL_RANGE for an OMC own cell. Used for cell default parameter template. Single (0), Concentric (1), Umbrella (2), Micro (3), Umbrella Concentric (4), Mini (5), Extended Inner (6), Extended Outer (7), Mini Concentric (8), Micro Concentric (9), Indoor (10), Indoor Concentric(11) - EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO shall be set to disabled when CELL_TYPE is equal to "Extended inner" or "Extended outer".A couple of mate cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall have the same LAC (respectively RAC when they are PS capable).The "micro concentric", "mini concentric" and "indoor concentric" cells must be multiband (the allowed FREQUENCY_RANGE is "PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800"). This restriction does not apply to the external cells. Site (CAE) Abstract OMC cell Unit None Minimum * Maximum * Default #
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Modifiable
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: SEL/PAG/RRM/HPC/HOC/DIR/GPR Create Cell(+ External OMC cell information) *: possible values are:- Single- Umbrella- Umbrella ConcentricMicro- Mini- Micro Concentric- Mini Concentric - Indoor- Indoor Concentric (labelled "Indoor Multiband" on the HMI)- Extended InnerExtended Outer No No
Parameter Access External Comment
273 / 1182
4.2.112 (CELL_BAR_QUALIFY) - (CELL_BAR_QUALIFY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value CELL_BAR_QUALIFY CELL_BAR_QUALIFY
Indicates the priority of the cell for cell selection. 0: normal priority, 1: low priority Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: SEL Edit Cell / Cell Information / RACH Control No No
274 / 1182
4.2.113 (CELL_EVALUATION) - (CELL_EV)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value CELL_EVALUATION CELL_EV
Handover cell evaluation process applied in the cell. 0: Order, 1: Grade Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / HO parameters / General HO Control Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell grade (1) grade (1) grade (1) grade (1) order (0) grade (1) grade (1) grade (1)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
275 / 1182
4.2.114 (CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS) (CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
Level hysteresis for cell reselection applied when the new cell is in a different location area or, for a GPRS MS, in a different routing area, or when a GPRS MS is in GMM ready state. step size = 2dB; coded on 3 bits (000 : 0 dB, 111 : 14 dB) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 14 Default 6
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: SEL Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Selection If the VGCS is licensed, the parameter is modifiable only via the provisioning context of the OMC. No No
276 / 1182
4.2.115 (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET) - (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (BSC)
Permanent offset to C2 criterion. step size = 2dB; coded on 6 bits (000000:0 dB, 111111 : 126 dB) CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (MFS) = CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (BSC) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 126 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: SEL Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Selection No No
277 / 1182
4.2.116 (CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND) (CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND
Indicates to the MS if parameters for C2 reselection criterion are broadcast. 0: not present, 1: present Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: SEL Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Selection No No
278 / 1182
4.2.117 (Cell_Type) - (Cell_Type (n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Cell_Type Cell_Type (n)
Combination of CELL_DIMENSION_TYPE, CELL_LAYER_TYPE, CELL_PARTITION_TYPE, CELL_RANGE for an adjacent cell (OMC own cell or OMC external cell). Single (0), Concentric (1), Umbrella (2), Micro (3), Umbrella Concentric (4), Mini (5), Extended Inner (6), Extended Outer (7), Mini Concentric (8), Micro Concentric (9), Indoor (10), Indoor Concentric(11), GAN(12) - EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO shall be set to disabled when CELL_TYPE is equal to "Extended inner" or "Extended outer".A couple of mate cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall have the same LAC (respectively RAC when they are PS capable).- The "micro concentric", "mini concentric" and "indoor concentric" cells must be multiband (the allowed FREQUENCY_RANGE is "PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800"). This restriction does not apply to the external cells.The "GAN" value is allowed only for external cells. Site (CAE) Abstract OMC cell Unit None Minimum * Maximum * Default #
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: *: possible values are:- Single- Umbrella- Umbrella ConcentricMicro- Mini- Micro Concentric- Mini Concentric - Indoor- Indoor Concentric (labelled "Indoor Multiband" on the HMI)- Extended InnerExtended Outer- GAN No No
279 / 1182
4.2.118 (CI) - (CI (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Cell Identity. LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same timeEqual to CI (MFS) Site (CAE) Reference BSC cell Unit None Modifiable Parameter Access Minimum 0 Maximum 65535 Default 65535 CI CI (BSC)
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Description ( + Edit External cell / circuit1/2) Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
External Comment
280 / 1182
4.2.119 (CI) - (CI(n)(BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules CI CI(n)(BSC)
Cell Identity of adjacent cell. LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same timeEqual to CI(n)(MFS) Site (CAE) Reference BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 65535 Default 65535
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
281 / 1182
4.2.120 (Ciphering Algorithms Priority 1) - (BSS_CIPH_LIST (Priority 1))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Ciphering Algorithms Priority 1 BSS_CIPH_LIST (Priority 1)
List of encryption algorithms in their prioritized order. coded as an array of 7 bytes. Each byte contains a reference to an encryption algorithm: 1 for A5/1, ... 7 for A5/7. The same encryption algorithm reference cannot be used for two different priorities Site (CAE) List of numbers BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 2 Default 1
Mandatory rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / Procedures / Ciphering No No
282 / 1182
4.2.121 (Ciphering Algorithms Priority 2) - (BSS_CIPH_LIST (Priority 2))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Ciphering Algorithms Priority 2 BSS_CIPH_LIST (Priority 2)
List of encryption algorithms in their prioritized order. coded as an array of 7 bytes. Each byte contains a reference to an encryption algorithm: 1 for A5/1, ... 7 for A5/7. The same encryption algorithm reference cannot be used for two different priorities Site (CAE) List of numbers BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 2 Default 2
Mandatory rules
283 / 1182
4.2.122 (ciphering capabilities) - (BTS_CIPH_CAP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules ciphering capabilities BTS_CIPH_CAP
List of flags indicating what are the BTS ciphering capabilities. Coded as a 8 bits bitmap. Each bit indicates if corresponding encryption algorithm is supported.bit 1 (LSB) : no encryption. bit 2 : A5/1. bit 3 : A5/2...bit 8 : A5/7. bit x =0: encryption not supported. bit x =1: encryption supported Site (CAE) Flag BSC BTS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 1
OMC Changes: Displayed(EML) RNO Changes: No Create/Modify/Copy/Move BTS / Additional information Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
284 / 1182
4.2.123 (Circuit Identity Code) - (CIC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Circuit Identity Code CIC
Circuit Identity Code of an A interface circuit. Coded over 16 bits: top 11 bits = pcm number, remaining 5 bits = TS number Site (CAE) Reference BSC A ch Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 65535 Default 65535
OMC Changes: displayed(EML) RNO Changes: No BSS parameters / A interface info Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
285 / 1182
4.2.124 (DELTA_DEC_HO_MARGIN) - (DELTA_DEC_HO_margin)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DELTA_DEC_HO_MARGIN DELTA_DEC_HO_margin
Correction factor favouring handover cause "Power budget" when traffic is high in the serving cell and low in neighbour cell(s). Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 24 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO & PC thresholds / Level Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 5 dB (5) 5 dB (5) 5 dB (5) 5 dB (5) 4 dB (4) 5 dB (5) 5 dB (5) 5 dB (5)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
286 / 1182
4.2.125 (DELTA_INC_HO_MARGIN) - (DELTA_INC_HO_margin)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DELTA_INC_HO_MARGIN DELTA_INC_HO_margin
Correction factor penalizing handover cause "Power budget" when traffic is low in the serving cell and high in neighbour cell(s). Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 24 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO & PC thresholds / Level Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 5 dB (5) 5 dB (5) 5 dB (5) 5 dB (5) 4 dB (4) 5 dB (5) 5 dB (5) 5 dB (5)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
287 / 1182
4.2.126 (Directed_Retry) - (EN_DR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Directed_Retry EN_DR
This flag enables/disables the execution of Directed Retry. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: DIR Edit Cell / HO parameters / Directed Retry No No
288 / 1182
4.2.127 (DL_DTX_AMR_WB_GMSK) - (DL_DTX_AMR_WB_GMSK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DL_DTX_AMR_WB_GMSK DL_DTX_AMR_WB_GMSK
This flag enables / disables the use of downlink DTX for AMR-WB GMSK speech calls. 0 : DL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK disabled, 1 : DL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK enabled The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_WB =1 Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
289 / 1182
4.2.128 (Downlink DTX) - (DOWNLINK_DTX_ENABLE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Downlink DTX DOWNLINK_DTX_ENABLE
This flag defines if downlink DTX is allowed for FR and EFR calls. 0: DTX not allowed, 1: DTX allowed should be enabled when EN_TFO = 1 Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / Procedures / General Timers and procedure No No
290 / 1182
4.2.129 (DOWNLINK_DTX_AMR_FR) - (Downlink_DTX_enable_AMR_FR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DOWNLINK_DTX_AMR_FR Downlink_DTX_enable_AMR_FR
This flag enables / disables the use of downlink DTX for AMR-NB FR speech calls. 0 : DL DTX for AMR FR disabled, 1 : DL DTX for AMR FR enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
291 / 1182
4.2.130 (DOWNLINK_DTX_AMR_HR) - (Downlink_DTX_enable_AMR_HR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DOWNLINK_DTX_AMR_HR Downlink_DTX_enable_AMR_HR
This flag enables / disables the use of downlink DTX for AMR-NB HR speech calls. 0 : DL DTX for AMR HR disabled, 1 : DL DTX for AMR HR enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
292 / 1182
4.2.131 (DOWNLINK_DTX_HR) - (Downlink_DTX_enable_HR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DOWNLINK_DTX_HR Downlink_DTX_enable_HR
This flag enables / disables the use of downlink DTX for HR speech calls. 0 : DL DTX for HR disabled, 1 : DL DTX for HR enabled should be enabled when EN_TFO = 1 Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
293 / 1182
4.2.132 (DTX_FR_INDICATOR) - (DTX_INDICATOR_FR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DTX_FR_INDICATOR DTX_INDICATOR_FR
Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM Phase 1 and 2 for FR. Applies for all codecs types except AMR. coding rules : 0: MS May Use DTX for FR 1: MS Shall Use DTX for FR, 2: MS shall not use DTX for FR The following combinations between DTX_INDICATOR_FR / DTX_INDICATOR_HR are possible (FR/HR):may/shall, may/shall not, may/may, shall/shall, shall/shall not, shall/may, shall not/shall and shall not/shall not.The only combination that is NOT allowed is: DTX_INDICATOR_FR = shall not and DTX_INDICATOR_HR = may, I.e. shall not/may. Site (CAE) Flag OMC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 2
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Description No No
294 / 1182
4.2.133 (DTX_FR_INDICATOR_AMR) - (DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DTX_FR_INDICATOR_AMR DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR
Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM phase 2 MS. Applies only for AMR-NB FR. 0: MS May Use DTX for AMR FR 1: MS Shall Use DTX for AMR FR, 2: MS shall not use DTX for AMR FR The following combinations between DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR / DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR are possible (FR_AMR / HR_AMR):may/shall, may/shall not, may/may, shall/shall, shall/shall not, shall/may, shall not/shall and shall not/shall not.The only combination that is NOT allowed is: DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR = shall not and DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR = may, I.e. shall not/may. Site (CAE) Flag OMC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 2
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
295 / 1182
4.2.134 (DTX_HR_INDICATOR) - (DTX_INDICATOR_HR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DTX_HR_INDICATOR DTX_INDICATOR_HR
Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM phase 2 for HR. Applies for all codecs types except AMR. 0: MS May Use DTX for HR 1: MS Shall Use DTX for HR, 2: MS shall not use DTX for HR The following combinations between DTX_INDICATOR_FR / DTX_INDICATOR_HR are possible (FR/HR):may/shall, may/shall not, may/may, shall/shall, shall/shall not, shall/may, shall not/shall and shall not/shall not.The only combination that is NOT allowed is: DTX_INDICATOR_FR = shall not and DTX_INDICATOR_HR = may, I.e. shall not/may. Site (CAE) Flag OMC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 2
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
296 / 1182
4.2.135 (DTX_HR_INDICATOR_AMR) - (DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DTX_HR_INDICATOR_AMR DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR
Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM phase 2 MS. Applies only for AMR-NB HR. 0: MS May Use DTX for AMR HR 1: MS Shall Use DTX for AMR HR, 2: MS shall not use DTX for AMR HR The following combinations between DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR / DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR are possible (FR_AMR / HR_AMR):may/shall, may/shall not, may/may, shall/shall, shall/shall not, shall/may, shall not/shall and shall not/shall not.The only combination that is NOT allowed is: DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR = shall not and DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR = may, I.e. shall not/may. Site (CAE) Flag OMC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 2
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
297 / 1182
4.2.136 (DTX_INDICATOR_SACCH_AMR_WB_GMSK) (DTX_INDICATOR_SACCH_AMR_WB_GMSK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DTX_INDICATOR_SACCH_AMR_WB_GMSK DTX_INDICATOR_SACCH_AMR_WB_GMSK
Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM phase 2 MS. Applies only to AMR-WB GMSK. 0= the MS may use UL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK, 1= the MS shall use UL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK, 2=the MS shall not use UL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK, The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_WB =1 Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 2
Coding rules
298 / 1182
4.2.137 (DWELL_TIME_STEP) - (DWELL_TIME_STEP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DWELL_TIME_STEP DWELL_TIME_STEP
Step value for the modification (increasing or decreasing) of MIN_DWELL_TIME. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 30 Default 2
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / HO/Reselection / HO Control No No
299 / 1182
4.2.138 (EDR_ASSIGN_FAIL_CAUSE) - (EDR_ASSIGN_FAIL_CAUSE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EDR_ASSIGN_FAIL_CAUSE EDR_ASSIGN_FAIL_CAUSE
This parameter determines the cause filled in ASSIGNMENT FAILURE sent in case of External Directed Retry. coded over 8 bits Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 127 Default 13
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / Procedures / External Direct retry Default value depends on MSC type No No
300 / 1182
4.2.139 (EDR_MSG_ORDER) - (EDR_MSG_ORDER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EDR_MSG_ORDER EDR_MSG_ORDER
This parameter determines the order of transmission of ASSIGNMENT FAILURE and HANDOVER REQUIRED on the A interface in case of an External Directed Retry. 0: Ass Failure before HO Reqd, 1: Ass Failure after HO Reqd Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
301 / 1182
4.2.140 (EDR_QUEUING_MAINTAINED) - (EDR_QUEUING_MAINTAINED)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EDR_QUEUING_MAINTAINED EDR_QUEUING_MAINTAINED
This flag indicates whether or not Assignment Request is maintained in queue during External Directed Retry attempt. 0: Request not maintained in queue, 1: Request maintained in queue Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
302 / 1182
4.2.141 (EDR_SEND_ASSIGN_FAIL) - (EDR_SEND_ASSIGN_FAIL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EDR_SEND_ASSIGN_FAIL EDR_SEND_ASSIGN_FAIL
This flag indicates whether ASSIGNMENT FAILURE is sent to the MSC in case of External Directed Retry. 0: Assignment Failure not sent, 1: Assignment Failure sent Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
303 / 1182
4.2.142 (EFR_ENABLED) - (EFR_ENABLED)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EFR_ENABLED EFR_ENABLED
This flag indicates whether the operation of enhanced full rate (EFR) is allowed in the cell. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: PAG Edit Cell / Cell Information / Dedicated Radio Resources 1/3 No No
304 / 1182
4.2.143 (EMERGENCY_CALL) - (EC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EMERGENCY_CALL EC
Indicates if Emergency calls are allowed for all access classes or only for access classes 11 to 15. 0: all access classes, 1: access classes 11 to 15 only Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
305 / 1182
4.2.144 (EN_4_DR_TRE_PER_TCU) - (EN_4_DR_TRE_PER_TCU)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_4_DR_TRE_PER_TCU EN_4_DR_TRE_PER_TCU
Defines if the limitation of TRE is static or dynamic. For static limitation only Nb FR TRE + 2 x DR TRE < 200 is allowed. For dynamic limitation only Nb TRE < 200 is allowed. 0: static1:dynamic Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
306 / 1182
4.2.145 (EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR) - (EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR
This flag enables/disables intracell HO for AMR-NB channel adaptation (Handover Cause 27). 0: disabled, 1: enabled EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR can be enabled only if {EN_AMR_FR=1 AND EN_AMR_HR=1} Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
307 / 1182
4.2.146 (EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR) - (EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR
This flag enables/disables intracell HO for AMR-NB channel adaptation (Handover Cause 26). 0: disabled, 1: enabled EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR can be enabled only if {EN_AMR_FR=1 AND EN_AMR_HR=1} Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
308 / 1182
4.2.147 (EN_AMR_FR) - (EN_AMR_FR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_AMR_FR EN_AMR_FR
This flag controls whether or not AMR-NB full rate is allowed in the cell. 0: disabled; 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: RRM Edit Cell / Cell Information / Dedicated Radio Resources 2/3 No No
309 / 1182
4.2.148 (EN_AMR_HR) - (EN_AMR_HR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_AMR_HR EN_AMR_HR
This flag controls whether or not AMR-NB half rate is allowed in the cell. 0: disabled; 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: RRM Edit Cell / Cell Information / Dedicated Radio Resources 2/3 No No
310 / 1182
4.2.149 (EN_AMR_WB_GMSK) - (EN_AMR_WB_GMSK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_AMR_WB_GMSK EN_AMR_WB_GMSK
This flag controls whether or not AMR WB GMSK is allowed in the cell. 0: disabled; 1: enabled In front of non-Evolium cells, the parameter value shall be forced to 0. Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
311 / 1182
4.2.150 (EN_BALANCED_CI) - (EN_BALANCED_CI)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_BALANCED_CI EN_BALANCED_CI
This flag enables/disables to balance the C/I measure. 0:disable, 1: enable Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: RRM Edit RMS Template / Template X / Description Up to 16 instances of this parameter with different values can be defined. This allows to define "RMS templates" (see parameter RMS_template). No No
312 / 1182
4.2.151 (EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO) - (EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO
This flag enables/disables the detection of "too high level in outer zone" handover cause (cause 13). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO parameters / General HO Control Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A enable (1) enable (1) N/A N/A N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
313 / 1182
4.2.152 (EN_BI-BAND_MS(n)) - (EN_BI-BAND_MS(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_BI-BAND_MS(n) EN_BI-BAND_MS(n)
This flag enables/disables the incoming handovers of bi-band MSs from the preferred band. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / HO parameters / General HO Control (+ Edit External cell / circuit1/2) No No
External Comment Cell Type Dependent Nb of TRX Dependent
314 / 1182
4.2.153 (EN_BS_PC) - (EN_BS_PC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_BS_PC EN_BS_PC
This flag enables/disables BS Power Control. 0: disabled1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
315 / 1182
4.2.154 (EN_CIRCUIT_GROUP) - (EN_CIRCUIT_GROUP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_CIRCUIT_GROUP EN_CIRCUIT_GROUP
This flag enables/disables the sending of Circuit group messages. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
316 / 1182
4.2.155 (EN_DIST_HO) - (EN_DIST_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_DIST_HO EN_DIST_HO
This flag enables/disables the detection of "distance" handover cause (cause 6). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO & PC thresholds / Distance Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell enable (1) enable (1) enable (1) enable (1) disable (0) enable (1) enable (1) enable (1)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
317 / 1182
4.2.156 (EN_EDR) - (EN_EXT_DR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_EDR EN_EXT_DR
This flag enables/disables the Outgoing External Directed Retry procedure. 0: disabled, 1: enabled EN_EXT_DR should be set to enable when EN_TCH_PREEMPT is set to enable. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / Procedures / External Direct retry For external directed retries, the serving BSC does not know whether or not the external target cells (towards which the directed retry is triggered) are congested. Therefore, Alcatel recommend to set RESP_REQ to 1 if EN_EDR is enabled in order to get a Handover Reject message from the MSC in case all target cells are congested and thus to attempt other procedures. No No
318 / 1182
4.2.157 (EN_EXT_MEAS_REP) - (EN_EXT_MEAS_REP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_EXT_MEAS_REP EN_EXT_MEAS_REP
This flag enables/disables the extended measurement reporting for Mobile Assisted Frequency Allocation. 0: disabled; 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / RMS & MAFA No No
319 / 1182
4.2.158 (EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO) - (EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO
This flag enables/disables the use of Fast traffic handovers. 0: disabled; 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / HO Parameters / General HO Control No No
320 / 1182
4.2.159 (EN_FORCED_DR) - (EN_FORCED_DR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_FORCED_DR EN_FORCED_DR
This flag enables/disables the "Forced Directed Retry" handover cause detection. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / HO parameters / Directed Retry No No
321 / 1182
4.2.160 (EN_GAN_HO) - (EN_GAN_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_GAN_HO EN_GAN_HO
This flag enables/disables the handover to GAN 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
322 / 1182
4.2.161 (EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO) - (EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO
This flag enables/disables the detection of "general capture" handover cause (cause 24). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO parameters / Hierarchical and Multiband HO ctrl No No
323 / 1182
4.2.162 (EN_HSL) - (EN_HSL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_HSL EN_HSL
Enables SS7 HSL (High speed Signalling Link). 0: HSL disabled1: HSL enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Changeable on the BSC terminal.if EN_HSL = 1 the following new Q703 parameters:Q703_N1_HSL, Q_703_N2_HSL, Q703_T1_HSL, Q703_T4E_HSL and Q703_T4N_HSLreplaces the old ones:Q703_N1, Q_703_N2, Q703_T1, Q703_T4E and Q703_T4N. No No
324 / 1182
4.2.163 (EN_IMM_ASS_REJ) - (EN_IM_ASS_REJ)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_IMM_ASS_REJ EN_IM_ASS_REJ
This flag indicates if the Immediate Assignment Reject procedure is enabled. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / Procedures / General Timers and procedure This parameter is only valid for circuit switched traffic. For packet traffic (GPRS or EGPRS) sending of IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT messages cannot be disabled. No No
325 / 1182
4.2.164 (EN_INCOMING_HO) - (EN_IC_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_INCOMING_HO EN_IC_HO
This flag enables/disables incoming handovers in the cell. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: SEL Edit Cell / HO parameters / General HO Control No No
326 / 1182
4.2.165 (EN_INTERBAND_HO) - (EN_INTERBAND_NEIGH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_INTERBAND_HO EN_INTERBAND_NEIGH
This flag enables / disables the multiband operation by filtering the sending of SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE 2ter/5ter. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
327 / 1182
4.2.166 (EN_INTRA_DL) - (EN_INTRA_DL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_INTRA_DL EN_INTRA_DL
This flag enables/disables the detection of "intracell downlink" handover cause (cause 16) for non AMR calls. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO & PC thresholds / Quality No No
328 / 1182
4.2.167 (EN_INTRA_DL_AMR) - (EN_INTRA_DL_AMR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_INTRA_DL_AMR EN_INTRA_DL_AMR
This flag enables/disables the detection of "intracell downlink" handover cause (cause 16) for AMR-NB calls. 0: disable, 1: enable It is recommended to disable this intracell uplink handover when frequency hopping is applied Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / HO & PC thresholds / Quality No No
329 / 1182
4.2.168 (EN_INTRA_DL_AMR_WB_GMSK) (EN_INTRA_DL_AMR_WB_GMSK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_INTRA_DL_AMR_WB_GMSK EN_INTRA_DL_AMR_WB_GMSK
This flag enables/disables the detection of "intracell downlink" handover cause (cause 16) 0: disable, 1: enable It is recommended to disable this intracell uplink handover when frequency hopping is applied. Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
330 / 1182
4.2.169 (EN_INTRA_UL) - (EN_INTRA_UL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_INTRA_UL EN_INTRA_UL
This flag enables/disables the detection of "intracell uplink" handover cause (cause 15) for non AMR calls. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
331 / 1182
4.2.170 (EN_INTRA_UL_AMR) - (EN_INTRA_UL_AMR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_INTRA_UL_AMR EN_INTRA_UL_AMR
This flag enables/disables the detection of "intracell uplink" handover cause (cause 15) for AMR-NB calls. 0: disable, 1: enable It is recommended to disable this intracell uplink handover when frequency hopping is applied Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
332 / 1182
4.2.171 (EN_INTRA_UL_AMR_WB_GMSK) (EN_INTRA_UL_AMR_WB_GMSK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_INTRA_UL_AMR_WB_GMSK EN_INTRA_UL_AMR_WB_GMSK
This flag enables/disables the detection of "intracell uplink" handover cause (cause 15) for AMR-WB GMSK calls. 0: disable, 1: enable It is recommended to disable this intracell uplink handover when frequency hopping is applied. Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
333 / 1182
4.2.172 (EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED) - (EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED
This flag enables/disables the repetition of intracell handover attempts. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO parameters / General HO Control No No
334 / 1182
4.2.173 (EN_LOAD_BALANCE) - (EN_LOAD_BALANCE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_LOAD_BALANCE EN_LOAD_BALANCE
Flag to enable/disable the balancing of load between the inner and outer zone of a multiband cell. 0: disabled; 1: enabled EN_LOAD_BALANCE & EN_LOAD_OUTER should not be both "Enabled". Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell /HO Parameters / Hierarchical & Multiband HO Control EN_LOAD_BALANCE significant only if EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO is enabled Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A disable (0) disable (0) N/A N/A N/A N/A
Cell Type Dependent
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
335 / 1182
4.2.174 (EN_LOAD_ORDER) - (EN_LOAD_ORDER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_LOAD_ORDER EN_LOAD_ORDER
This flag indicates whether or not traffic load has to be taken into account when setting up the list of target cells. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
336 / 1182
4.2.175 (EN_MA_SELECTION) - (EN_MA_SELECTION)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_MA_SELECTION EN_MA_SELECTION
This flag enables/disables channel selection according to Mobile Allocation criterion. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / Dedicated Radio Resources 1/3 No No
337 / 1182
4.2.176 (EN_MCHO_H_DL) - (EN_MCHO_H_DL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_MCHO_H_DL EN_MCHO_H_DL
This flag enables/disables the detection of "level downlink micro-cell" handover cause (cause 18). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO Parameters / Lower Layer HO Control Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell disable (0) * disable (0) * disable (0) * disable (0) * enable (1) disable (0) * disable (0) * disable (0) *
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
338 / 1182
4.2.177 (EN_MCHO_H_UL) - (EN_MCHO_H_UL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_MCHO_H_UL EN_MCHO_H_UL
This flag enables/disables the detection of "level uplink mirco-cell " handover cause (cause 17). 0: disabled1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / Lower Layer HO Control Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell disable (0) * disable (0) * disable (0) * disable (0) * enable (1) disable (0) * disable (0) * disable (0) *
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
339 / 1182
4.2.178 (EN_MCHO_NCELL) - (EN_MCHO_NCELL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_MCHO_NCELL EN_MCHO_NCELL
This flag enables/disables the detection of "high level in neighbour lower or indoor cell" handover cause (cause 14). 0: disabled, 1: enabled In a lower layer cell, the flag shall be disabled if there is no indoor layer. Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO parameters / Hierarchical and multiband HO Ctrl Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell disable (0) * enable (1) disable (0) * enable (1) disable (0) disable (0) disable (0) * disable (0) *
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
340 / 1182
4.2.179 (EN_MCHO_RESCUE) - (EN_MCHO_RESCUE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_MCHO_RESCUE EN_MCHO_RESCUE
This flag enables/disables the detection of "consecutive bad SACCH frames" handover cause (cause 7). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO Parameters / Lower Layer HO Control Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell disable (0) * disable (0) * disable (0) * disable (0) * enable (1) disable (0) * disable (0) * disable (0) *
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
341 / 1182
4.2.180 (EN_MS_PC) - (EN_MS_PC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_MS_PC EN_MS_PC
This flag enables/disables MS Power Control. 0: disabled1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
342 / 1182
4.2.181 (EN_MULTIBAND_PBGT_HO) - (EN_MULTIBAND_PBGT_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_MULTIBAND_PBGT_HO EN_MULTIBAND_PBGT_HO
This flag enables/disables the power budget handovers Cause 12 and the traffic handovers Cause 23 between cells belonging to different frequency bands. 0 : function disabled, 1 : function enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / HO parameters / General HO Control No No
343 / 1182
4.2.182 (EN_PBGT_FILTERING) - (EN_PBGT_FILTERING)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_PBGT_FILTERING EN_PBGT_FILTERING
This flag enables/disables filtering of candidate neighbour cells on HO_MARGIN_DIST/LEV/QUAL criterion. 0: disabled, 1: enabled This parameter must be set to disabled in case of extended cell Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO parameters / General HO Control Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell enable (1) enable (1) enable (1) enable (1) disable (0) enable (1) disable (0) disable (0)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
344 / 1182
4.2.183 (EN_PBGT_HO) - (EN_PBGT_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_PBGT_HO EN_PBGT_HO
This flag enables/disables the detection of "power budget" handover cause (cause 12). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO & PC thresholds / Level No No
345 / 1182
4.2.184 (EN_PREFERRED_BAND_HO) - (EN_PREFERRED_BAND_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_PREFERRED_BAND_HO EN_PREFERRED_BAND_HO
This flag enables/disables the detection of handover cause 21 (high level in neighbour cell in the preferred band). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO parameters / Hierarchical and multiband HO Ctrl No No
346 / 1182
4.2.185 (EN_PRIORITY_ORDERING) - (EN_PRIORITY_ORDERING)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_PRIORITY_ORDERING EN_PRIORITY_ORDERING
This flag enables/disables the use of the parameter PRIORITY(0,n) in the candidate cell evaluation process. 0: Priority(0,n) not taken into account, 1: Priority(0,n) taken into account Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
Coding rules
347 / 1182
4.2.186 (EN_RADIOLINK_RECOVERY) - (EN_RL_RECOV)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_RADIOLINK_RECOVERY EN_RL_RECOV
This flag enables/disables the Radio Link Recovery procedure. Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / PC parameters / Radio Link Supervision Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell enable (1) enable (1) enable (1) enable (1) enable (1) enable (1) enable (1) enable (1)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
348 / 1182
4.2.187 (EN_RESCUE_UMBRELLA) - (EN_RESCUE_UM)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_RESCUE_UMBRELLA EN_RESCUE_UM
This flag determines if emergency handovers are directed preferentially to umbrella cells. 0: disabled, 1: enabled, 2: indefinite Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO parameters / Hierarchical and multiband HO Ctrl Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A N/A N/A enable (1) disable (0) N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
349 / 1182
4.2.188 (EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO) - (EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO
Flag enabling the intracell handovers allowing to move TCH from the PS zone to the CS zone of PDCH/TCH allocation Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
350 / 1182
4.2.189 (EN_RXLEV_DL) - (EN_RXLEV_DL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_RXLEV_DL EN_RXLEV_DL
This flag enables/disables the detection of "level downlink" handover cause (cause 5). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
351 / 1182
4.2.190 (EN_RXLEV_UL) - (EN_RXLEV_UL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_RXLEV_UL EN_RXLEV_UL
This flag enables/disables the detection of "level uplink" handover cause (cause 3). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
352 / 1182
4.2.191 (EN_RXQUAL_DL) - (EN_RXQUAL_DL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_RXQUAL_DL EN_RXQUAL_DL
This flag enables/disables the detection of "quality downlink" handover cause (cause 4). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
353 / 1182
4.2.192 (EN_RXQUAL_UL) - (EN_RXQUAL_UL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_RXQUAL_UL EN_RXQUAL_UL
This flag enables/disables the detection of "quality uplink" handover cause (cause 2). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
354 / 1182
4.2.193 (EN_SEND_OLD_CHAN_MODE) - (EN_SEND_OLD_CHAN_MODE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_SEND_OLD_CHAN_MODE EN_SEND_OLD_CHAN_MODE
This flag controls "Current channel" OIE inclusion in HANDOVER REQUIRED. 0: IE is not included, 1: IE is included Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / HO/Reselection / HO Control Default value depends on MSC type No No
355 / 1182
4.2.194 (EN_SEND_SPEECH_VER) - (EN_SEND_SPEECH_VER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_SEND_SPEECH_VER EN_SEND_SPEECH_VER
This flag controls "Speech version (used)" OIE inclusion in HANDOVER REQUIRED. 0: IE is not included, 1: IE is included Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / HO/Reselection / HO Control Default value depends on MSC type No No
356 / 1182
4.2.195 (EN_SOLSA) - (EN_SOLSA)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_SOLSA EN_SOLSA
This flag enables / disables SoLSA feature. 0: disabled, 1: enabled May be set to Enabled only if BCCH_EXT=TRUE. Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / Dedicated Radio Resources 3/3 No No
357 / 1182
4.2.196 (EN_SOLSA) - (EN_SOLSA(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_SOLSA EN_SOLSA(n)
This flag enables / disables SoLSA feature. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag MFS adj Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No Edit External Cell / Circuit 2/2 This parameter is for every cell. The operator needs only to configure the value of that parameter for OMC external cells ; the parameter is autonomously filled by the OMC in case the adjacent cell is an OMC internal cell. No No
358 / 1182
4.2.197 (EN_SPEED_DISCRIMINATION) - (EN_SPEED_DISC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_SPEED_DISCRIMINATION EN_SPEED_DISC
This flag enables/disables the speed discrimination process. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO parameters / Hierarchical and multiband HO Ctrl Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell disable (0) * disable (0) disable (0) * disable (0) disable (0) disable (0) disable (0) * disable (0) *
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
359 / 1182
4.2.198 (EN_TCH_PREEMPT) - (EN_TCH_PREEMPT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_TCH_PREEMPT EN_TCH_PREEMPT
This flag enables/disables the TCH/VGCH pre-emption feature. If enabled, a point-to-point or voice group call with the pvi (pre-emption vulnerability indication) bit set might be pre-empted for a point-to-point or voice group call that has the pci (pre-emption capability indication) bit set if the concerned cell is in congestion state. 0:disabled, 1:enabled - EN_EXT_DR should be set to enable when EN_TCH_PREEMPT is set to enable.- If EN_VGCS = enabled , then Alcatel recommends to set EN_TCH_PREEMPT to enabled, otherwise to set the value of MIN_VGCS_TS to a value greater or equal to 2. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / Procedures / Gen. Timers & Proc. In case one or more TCHs have been reserved for emergency handovers (NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO > 0) in the concerned cell, the BSC will first try to use one of these resources before actually releasing an ongoing call with lower priority and the pvi bit set.In case the cell is congested, if EN_TCH_PREEMPT is enabled and the MSC does not allow the queing, the BSC will queue an incoming point-to-point request with pre-emption capability indicator set during at most T11_forced seconds for a normal assignment or during at most T_qho seconds for an handover request. For the voice group call request, the BSC will follow the MSC indicator. No No
360 / 1182
4.2.199 (EN_TFO) - (EN_TFO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_TFO EN_TFO
This flag enables/ disables TFO function for FR, EFR and HR codecs. 0: disabled; 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / Cell Information / Dedicated Radio Resources 2/3 No No
361 / 1182
4.2.200 (EN_TFO_AMR_WB) - (EN_TFO_AMR_WB)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_TFO_AMR_WB EN_TFO_AMR_WB
This flag enables/ disables TFO function for AMR-WB codec. 0: disabled; 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
362 / 1182
4.2.201 (EN_TFO_MATCH) - (EN_TFO_MATCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_TFO_MATCH EN_TFO_MATCH
This flag enables/disables TFO codec mismatch resolution function (for FR, EFR, AMR-WB and HR codecs). 0: disabled; 1: enabled may be set to 1 only if EN_TFO=1or if EN_TFO_AMR_WB=1May be set to 0 only if EN_TFO_OPT = 0 Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
363 / 1182
4.2.202 (EN_TFO_OPT) - (EN_TFO_OPT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_TFO_OPT EN_TFO_OPT
This flag enables/disables TFO codec optimisation function. 0: disabled; 1: enabled may be set to 1 only if EN_TFO_MATCH=1 Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
364 / 1182
4.2.203 (EN_TRAFFIC_HO) - (EN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_TRAFFIC_HO EN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n)
This flag enables/disables the detection of "traffic" handover cause (cause 23). 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC adj Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Adjacencies As the traffic load of cells external to the BSC is unknown, no HO cause 23 will be triggered towards these cells, even if EN_TRAFFIC_HO = 1. No No
365 / 1182
4.2.204 (EN_UNEQUIPPED_CIRCUIT) - (EN_UNEQUIPPED_CIRCUIT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_UNEQUIPPED_CIRCUIT EN_UNEQUIPPED_CIRCUIT
This flag enables/disables the sending of UNEQUIPPED CIRCUIT message. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / Interworking / MSC interworking Default value depends on MSC type No No
366 / 1182
4.2.205 (EXT_HO_FORCED) - (EXT_HO_FORCED)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EXT_HO_FORCED EXT_HO_FORCED
This flag, when set, forces internal intercell handovers to be executed as external HO. 0: BSC performs internal HO, 1: MSC performs internal HO Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
367 / 1182
4.2.206 (Extended CBCH) - (Use_of_Extended_CBCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Extended CBCH Use_of_Extended_CBCH
This flag indicates if the extended CBCH is used. 0: not used, 1: used shall be set to "No" when SMSCB_FEATURE_SET="FS1"can be changed only when SMSCB_STATE="inactive" Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: PAG Edit Cell / Cell Information / SMSCB Default value correspond to SMSCB_FEATURE_SET = FS1.If SMSCB_FEATURE_SET = FS2, Use_of_Extended_CBCH should be set to "Yes". No No
368 / 1182
4.2.207 (FORBID_AMR_NS) - (FORBID_AMR_NS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value FORBID_AMR_NS FORBID_AMR_NS
Flag to forbid / allow AMR noise suppressor in the MS. 0: the MS can use AMR NS, 1: the MS shall not use AMR NS. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / Procedures / AMR Significant only if EN_AMR_FR, EN_AMR_HR or EN_AMR_WB_GMSK is set to TRUE. No No
369 / 1182
4.2.208 (FORBID_DTXD_NH_BCCH_F) - (FORBID_DTXD_NH_BCCH_F)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules FORBID_DTXD_NH_BCCH_F FORBID_DTXD_NH_BCCH_F
Forbid use of downlink DTX on non hopping TCH of the BCCH TRX. 0 : DTX DL on non-hopping BCCH TRX is allowed; 1 : DTX DL on non-hopping BCCH TRX is forbidden Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / Procedures / General timers and procedures No No
370 / 1182
4.2.209 (Force TFO versus AMR) - (FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Force TFO versus AMR FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR
Flag to enable/disable the basic functions of Tandem Free Operation (TFO) for GSM FR SV1, FR SV2 and HR SV1 codec types when the current codec is AMR-NB FR or AMR-NB HR. 0: disabled (no TFO negotiation if AMR used); 1: enabled (TFO negotiation will start even if AMR used) FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR = 1 only if EN_TFO=1 Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / Cell Information / Dedicated Radio Resources 2/3 FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR relevant only if (EN_AMR_FR = 1) OR (EN_AMR_HR = 1) No No
371 / 1182
4.2.210 (Forced_Queuing) - (QUEUE_ANYWAY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Forced_Queuing QUEUE_ANYWAY
This flag enables/disables forced queuing for Assignment requests when queuing is not allowed by the MSC. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
372 / 1182
4.2.211 (Forward_CM_3) - (EN_SEND_CM3)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Forward_CM_3 EN_SEND_CM3
This flag enables/disables sending of "Classmark 3" IE to the MSC. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled EN_SEND_CM3 and STRIP_O5_CM2 shall not be both set to 1 at the same time. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / Interworking / MSC interworking The value of this parameter depends on whether the MSC supports the MS classmark 3 IE or not: if the MSC supports the MS classmark 3 IE then the parameter shall be set to "1", otherwise the parameter shall be set to "0". No No
373 / 1182
4.2.212 (Free_Factor_1) - (Freefactor_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Free_Factor_1 Freefactor_1
Correction factor used in the cell evaluation process to take into account the number of free TCHs in the candidate cell. Freefactor_1 <= Freefactor_2 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -16 Maximum 16 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HOC Edit Cell / HO parameters / Load Classif No No
374 / 1182

Correction factor used in the cell evaluation process to take into account the number of free TCHs in the candidate cell. Freefactor_1 <= Freefactor_2 <= Freefactor_3 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -16 Maximum 16 Default 0
375 / 1182

376 / 1182

377 / 1182

Correction factor used in the cell evaluation process to take into account the number of free TCHs in the candidate cell. Freefactor_5 >= Freefactor_4 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -16 Maximum 16 Default 0
378 / 1182
4.2.217 (Free_Level_1) - (Freelevel_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Free_Level_1 Freelevel_1
Boundary on free TCH number for determination of Freefactor of the cell. Freelevel_1 < Freelevel_2 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HOC Edit Cell / HO parameters / Load Classif No
379 / 1182

Boundary on free TCH number for determination of Freefactor of the cell. Freelevel_3 > Freelevel_2 > Freelevel_1 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 3
380 / 1182

Boundary on free TCH number for determination of Freefactor of the cell. Freelevel_4 > Freelevel_3 > Freelevel_2 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 5
381 / 1182

Boundary on free TCH number for determination of Freefactor of the cell. Freelevel_4 > Freelevel_3 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 10
382 / 1182
4.2.221 (Free_Level_DR) - (Freelevel_DR(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Free_Level_DR Freelevel_DR(n)
Minimum number of free TCHs in neighbour cell n to allow forced directed retry to cell n. Freelevel_DR > N_TCH_HO Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 4
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: DIR Edit Cell / HO parameters / Directed Retry (+ Edit External cell / circuit1/2) Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell See TRXnb See TRXnb See TRXnb See TRXnb See TRXnb See TRXnb 255 * 255 *
External Comment Cell Type Dependent
383 / 1182
4.2.222 (FREQUENCY_RANGE) - (FREQUENCY_RANGE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules FREQUENCY_RANGE FREQUENCY_RANGE
This parameter indicates the frequency range of the cell. 0: PGSM (GSM 900), 1: DCS 1800, 2: EGSM, 3: DCS 1900, 4: PGSM-DCS1800, 5: EGSM-DCS1800, 6: GSM 850, 7..255: for future use. The parameter shall be coded over 8 bits as a provision for future frequency bands support. - if FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GSM-DCS" then CELL_PARTITION_TYPE must be equal to "Concentric" .The "micro concentric", "mini concentric" and "indoor concentric" cells must be multiband (the allowed FREQUENCY_RANGE is "PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800"). This restriction does not apply to the external cells.- The frequency range of an extended inner cell has to be the same as the frequency range of the corresponding extended outer cell, where PGSM (0) and EGSM (2) are here considered as belonging to the same frequency range.The OMC-R checks the consistency between the setting of FREQUENCY_RANGE and PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS parameters:- At cell creationWhen the value of FREQUENCY_RANGE parameter is modified.However, no check is performed when the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is modified.Only the following values of the FREQUENCY_RANGE parameter are allowed depending on the value of the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS parameter:FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM (GSM900)" or "EGSM (GSM900)" or "DCS1800" or "PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800" if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM900 and DCS1800 bands",- FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GSM850" or "DCS1800" if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM850 and DCS1800 bands",- FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GSM850" or "DCS1900" if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM850 and DCS1900 bands",- FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM (GSM900)" or "EGSM (GSM900)" or "DCS1900" if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM900 and DCS1900 bands". Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 6 Default 0
Mandatory rules
Modifiable
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: SEL/PAG/RRM/HPC/HOC/DIR/GPR
384 / 1182
Parameter Access External Comment Cell Type Dependent Nb of TRX Dependent
Edit Cell / Cell Description (+ Edit External cell / circuit1/2) No No
385 / 1182
4.2.223 (FREQUENCY_RANGE) - (FREQUENCY_RANGE(n)(MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition FREQUENCY_RANGE FREQUENCY_RANGE(n)(MFS)
This parameter indicates the frequency range of the adjacent cell (GAN cell excluded). 0: PGSM (GSM 900), 1: DCS 1800, 2: EGSM, 3: DCS 1900, 4: PGSM-DCS1800, 5: EGSM-DCS1800, 6: GSM 850, 7..255: for future use. The parameter shall be coded over 8 bits as a provision for future frequency bands support. - If FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) = "GSM-DCS" then CELL_PARTITION_TYPE(n) must be equal to "Concentric". The "micro concentric", "mini concentric" and "indoor concentric" cells must be multiband (the allowed FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) is "PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800"). This restriction does not apply to the external cells.- The frequency range of an extended inner cell has to be the same as the frequency range of the corresponding extended outer cell, where PGSM (0) and EGSM (2) are here considered as belonging to the same frequency range. Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 6 Default 0
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit external cell / circuit 1/2 Within the same PLMN, the FREQUENCY_RANGE parameter of a given cell shall be selected among one of the following values:- PGSM (GSM900) or EGSM (GSM900) or DCS1800 or PGSM-DCS1800 or EGSM-DCS1800 if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM900 and DCS1800 bands",- GSM850 or DCS1800 if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM850 and DCS1800 bands",- GSM850 or DCS1900 if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM850 and DCS1900 bands. No No
386 / 1182
4.2.224 (FREQUENCY_RANGE) - (FREQUENCY_RANGE(n)(OMC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition FREQUENCY_RANGE FREQUENCY_RANGE(n)(OMC)
This parameter indicates the frequency range of the adjacent cell (internal or external to the OMC). 0: PGSM (GSM 900), 1: DCS 1800, 2: EGSM, 3: DCS 1900, 4: PGSM-DCS1800, 5: EGSM-DCS1800, 6: GSM 850, 7: GAN, 8..255: for future use. The parameter shall be coded over 8 bits as a provision for future frequency bands support. - if FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GSM-DCS" then CELL_PARTITION_TYPE must be equal to "Concentric" .if FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GAN" then CELL_RANGE must be equal to "GAN"- the value GAN is only allowed for the OMC external cells- The "micro concentric", "mini concentric" and "indoor concentric" cells must be multiband (the allowed FREQUENCY_RANGE is "PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800"). This restriction does not apply to the external cells.- The frequency range of an extended inner cell has to be the same as the frequency range of the corresponding extended outer cell, where PGSM (0) and EGSM (2) are here considered as belonging to the same frequency range.The OMC-R checks the consistency between the setting of FREQUENCY_RANGE and PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS parameters:- At cell creation- When the value of FREQUENCY_RANGE parameter is modified.However, no check is performed when the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is modified.Only the following values of the FREQUENCY_RANGE parameter are allowed depending on the value of the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS parameter:FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM (GSM900)" or "EGSM (GSM900)" or "DCS1800" or "PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800" if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM900 and DCS1800 bands",- FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GSM850" or "DCS1800" if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM850 and DCS1800 bands",- FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GSM850" or "DCS1900" if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM850 and DCS1900 bands",- FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM (GSM900)" or "EGSM (GSM900)" or "DCS1900" if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM900 and DCS1900 bands". Site (CAE) Number OMC cell
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance
387 / 1182
Value
Unit None
Minimum 0
Maximum 7
Default 0
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Value "7" exists only starting from MR2. No No
388 / 1182
4.2.225 (GSM_PHASE) - (GSM_PHASE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GSM_PHASE GSM_PHASE
This flag indicates the GSM Phase used by the BSC to format messages towards the MSC. 0: GSM Phase 1, 1: GSM Phase 2 Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / Interworking / MSC interworking Default value depends on MSC type.The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
389 / 1182
4.2.226 (H_LOAD_OBJ) - (H_LOAD_OBJ)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition H_LOAD_OBJ H_LOAD_OBJ
High threshold on busy TCH timeslots percentage to reduce MIN_DWELL_TIME variable. step size = 10% H_LOAD_OBJ >= L_LOAD_OBJ Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 80
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO parameters / Hierarchical and multiband HO Ctrl Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A See TRXnb N/A See TRXnb N/A N/A N/A N/A
390 / 1182
4.2.227 (H_MIN_DWELL_TIME) - (H_MIN_DWELL_TIME)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value H_MIN_DWELL_TIME H_MIN_DWELL_TIME
Maximum allowed value for MIN_DWELL_TIME variable. H_MIN_DWELL_TIME >= L_MIN_DWELL_TIME Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 120 Default 20
391 / 1182
4.2.228 (High Priority Access Class Ordering P1) (AC_PRIORITY_LIST(priority=1))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules High Priority Access Class Ordering P1 AC_PRIORITY_LIST(priority=1)
List of access classes 11..15 and EC (=10) in their priority order. Priority 1 is the highest priority, Priority 6 is the lowest priority, 10 (EC) is coded as 5, 11 (access class 11) is coded as 0, 12 (access class 12) is coded as 1, 13 (access class 13) is coded as 2, 14 (access class 14) is coded as 3, 15 (access class 15) is coded as 4. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 10 Maximum 15 Default 10
392 / 1182

List of access classes 11..15 and EC (=10) in their priority order. Priority 1 is the highest priority, Priority 6 is the lowest priority 10 (EC) is coded as 5, 11 (access class 11) is coded as 0, 12 (access class 12) is coded as 1, 13 (access class 13) is coded as 2, 14 (access class 14) is coded as 3, 15 (access class 15) is coded as 4. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 10 Maximum 15 Default 15
393 / 1182

List of access classes 11..15 and EC (=10) in their priority order. Priority 1 is the highest priority, Priority 6 is the lowest priority10 (EC) is coded as 5, 11 (access class 11) is coded as 0, 12 (access class 12) is coded as 1, 13 (access class 13) is coded as 2, 14 (access class 14) is coded as 3, 15 (access class 15) is coded as 4. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 10 Maximum 15 Default 14
394 / 1182

395 / 1182

396 / 1182

397 / 1182
4.2.234 (HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Load threshold used to determine when traffic load is high for circuit switched calls. HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD >= LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 80
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: RRM Edit Cell / Cell Information / Dedicated Radio Resources 1/3 Default value depends on the number of TRX in the cell (see TRXnb default value). The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No
Cell Type Dependent
398 / 1182
4.2.235 (Highest BA range ARFCNs) - (RANGEi_HIGHER (1<=i<=13))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Highest BA range ARFCNs RANGEi_HIGHER (1<=i<=13)
Highest ARFCN of range i indicated in "BA Range" Information Element. RANGEi_HIGHER >= RANGEi_LOWER Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum -1 Maximum 1023 Default -1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Reselection RANGEi_HIGHER = -1 means that it shall not be included in "BA Range" IE. Moreover, all BA RANGE following this one will be considered as not significant by the OMC and not send to the BSC. (i.e. -1 = indicator of end of BA Range) No No
399 / 1182
4.2.236 (HO_ALARM_PERSISTENCE) - (T_FILTER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition HO_ALARM_PERSISTENCE T_FILTER
Maximum time a handover alarm is maintained while no more alarm condition is detected. step size = 2 x SACCH frames = 0.96s. Coded over 5 bits:0: 0s, 1: 0.96s, , 31: 29.76s Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit 2 x Samfr Minimum 0 Maximum 31 Default 3
Coding rules
400 / 1182
4.2.237 (HO_MARGIN) - (HOmargin (0,n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition HO_MARGIN HOmargin (0,n)
Difference in power budget (PBGT) between cell(0) and cell(n) which is required for a power budget HO. Site (CAE) Number BSC adj Unit dB Minimum -127 Maximum 127 Default 5
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Adjacencies Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 5 dB 5 dB 5 dB 5 dB 4 dB 5 dB 5 dB 5 dB
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
401 / 1182
4.2.238 (HO_MARGIN_DIST) - (HO_MARGIN_DIST(0,n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition HO_MARGIN_DIST HO_MARGIN_DIST(0,n)
Criterion for candidate neighbour cell filtering on distance handover causes. Site (CAE) Number BSC adj Unit dB Minimum -127 Maximum 127 Default 2
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Adjacencies Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 2 dB 2 dB 2 dB 2 dB 5 dB 2 dB -29 dB 5 dB
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
402 / 1182
4.2.239 (HO_MARGIN_LEV) - (HO_MARGIN_LEV(0,n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition HO_MARGIN_LEV HO_MARGIN_LEV(0,n)
Criterion for candidate neighbour cell filtering on level handover causes. Site (CAE) Number BSC adj Unit dB Minimum -127 Maximum 127 Default 2
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
403 / 1182
4.2.240 (HO_MARGIN_QUAL) - (HO_MARGIN_QUAL(0,n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition HO_MARGIN_QUAL HO_MARGIN_QUAL(0,n)
Criterion for candidate neighbour cell filtering on quality handover causes Site (CAE) Number BSC adj Unit dB Minimum -127 Maximum 127 Default 1
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
404 / 1182
4.2.241 (HR_ENABLED) - (HR_ENABLED)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value HR_ENABLED HR_ENABLED
This flag controls if Half Rate TCH is enabled. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: PAG Edit Cell / Cell Information / Dedicated Radio Resources 1/3 No No
405 / 1182
4.2.242 (IGNORE_2Mbit_FAILURE) - (IGNORE_2MBIT_FAIL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition IGNORE_2Mbit_FAILURE IGNORE_2MBIT_FAIL
This flag indicates whether or not a transmission alarm triggers the telecom defence activities (call release, blocking messages towards MSC). Note that the O&M activities are not dependent on this flag. 0: transmission alarms are not ignored and the telecom defence activities (call release, blocking messages towards MSC) are triggered;1: transmission alarms are ignored and telecom defence activities (call release, blocking messages towards MSC) are not triggered; If BSS_TRANSPORT_MODE = IP, should be set to FALSE. Due to TDM switching on TC side, there is no more interaction between Atermux and ATR failures. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / Interworking / MSC interworking No No
406 / 1182
4.2.243 (IMSI Attach/Detach) - (ATT (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition IMSI Attach/Detach ATT (BSC)
This flag indicates to the MS if IMSI Attach/detach procedure is allowed in the cell. 0: not allowed, 1: allowed Equal to ATT (MFS) Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Description No No
407 / 1182
4.2.244 (IMSI Attach/Detach) - (ATT (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition IMSI Attach/Detach ATT (MFS)
This flag indicates to the MS whether IMSI Attach/detach procedure is allowed in the cell. 0: not allowed, 1: allowed Equal to ATT (BSC) Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
408 / 1182
4.2.245 (IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Load threshold used to determine when traffic load is indefinite for circuit switched calls. IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD = 0 OR LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD <= IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD <= HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 0
409 / 1182
4.2.246 (INTAVE) - (INTAVE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition INTAVE INTAVE
Averaging period for interference measurements on idle TCH timeslots. step size=1 Samfr INTAVE < T_INTRF_L3 Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 31 Default 10
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: SEL Edit Cell / Cell Information / Dedicated Radio Resources 1/3 No No
410 / 1182
4.2.247 (INTERCELL_HO) - (HO_INTERCELL_ALLOWED)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition INTERCELL_HO HO_INTERCELL_ALLOWED
This flag enables/disables the execution of all outgoing intercell handovers. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO parameters / General HO Control Valid for both TCH and SDCCH. This parameter has no influence on Directed Retry No No
411 / 1182
4.2.248 (Interference bands 1-2 limit) - (INTFBD1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Interference bands 1-2 limit INTFBD1
Limit between interference band 1 and interference band 2. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm INTFBD1 < INTFBD2 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -100
412 / 1182

Limit between interference band 2 and interference band 3. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm INTFBD3 > INTFBD2 > INTFBD1 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -95
413 / 1182

414 / 1182

415 / 1182
4.2.252 (INTRACELL_HO) - (HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value INTRACELL_HO HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED
This flag enables/disables the execution of intracell handovers. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO parameters / General HO Control Valid for both TCH and SDCCH.The flags specific to the TFO feature, I.e. EN_TFO, EN_TFO_MATCH, EN_TFO_OPT, EN_IPE_PREF_CODEC_TYPE, are set independently of the flag HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED. Additionally, the flag related to handover cause 30, EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO is setindependently of the flag HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED. The handovers for TFO reasons (cause 29) and RAE4 reasons (cause 30) can therefore be performed even if HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED = disabled. No No
416 / 1182
4.2.253 (Keep codec on handover) - (KEEP_CODEC_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Keep codec on handover KEEP_CODEC_HO
Indicates if the BSC tries to keep the same codec for internal incoming handovers. 0:free choice of the codec ; 1:try to maintain codec for TFO calls only; 2: try to maintain codec for all calls Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 0
Coding rules
417 / 1182
4.2.254 (L_LOAD_OBJ) - (L_LOAD_OBJ)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition L_LOAD_OBJ L_LOAD_OBJ
Low threshold on busy TCH timeslots percentage to increase MIN_DWELL_TIME variable. step size = 10% L_LOAD_OBJ <= H_LOAD_OBJ Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 60
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO parameters / Hierarchical and multiband HO Ctrl Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A See TRXnb N/A See TRXnb N/A N/A N/A N/A
418 / 1182
4.2.255 (L_MIN_DWELL_TIME) - (L_MIN_DWELL_TIME)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value L_MIN_DWELL_TIME L_MIN_DWELL_TIME
Minimum allowed value for MIN_DWELL_TIME variable. L_MIN_DWELL_TIME <= H_MIN_DWELL_TIME Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 120 Default 8
419 / 1182
4.2.256 (L_RXLEV_CPT_HO) - (L_RXLEV_CPT_HO(0,n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition L_RXLEV_CPT_HO L_RXLEV_CPT_HO(0,n)
Minimum received downlink level from cell n for umbrella to neighbour lower layer cell n handover or from classical band to preferred band cell n handover. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm Site (CAE) Threshold BSC adj Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -85
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / HO parameters / Hierarchical and multiband HO Ctrl (+ Edit Adjacency) No No
420 / 1182
4.2.257 (L_RXLEV_DL_H) - (L_RXLEV_DL_H)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules L_RXLEV_DL_H L_RXLEV_DL_H
Downlink level threshold for handover. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm L_RXLEV_DL_H < U_RXLEV_DL_P.L_RXLEV_DL_H < RXLEV_DL_IH L_RXLEV_D_H < L_RXLEV_DL_PIf CELL_PARTITION_TYPE = "Concentric" AND FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM" or "DCS1800" or "EGSM" or "DCS 1900":RXLEV_DL_ZONE >= L_RXLEV_DL_H (This rule only applies to concentric and monoband cell.) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -96
Recommended rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO & PC thresholds / Level Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell -91 dBm (19) -91 dBm (19) -91 dBm (19) -91 dBm (19) -96 dBm (14) -91 dBm (19) -96 dBm (14) -98 dBm (12)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
421 / 1182
4.2.258 (L_RXLEV_DL_P) - (L_RXLEV_DL_P)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value L_RXLEV_DL_P L_RXLEV_DL_P
Lower downlink level threshold for power control. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm L_RXLEV_DL_P < U_RXLEV_DL_P Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -85
422 / 1182
4.2.259 (L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR) - (L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n)
Minimum level received from neighbour cell n to allow forced directed retry to cell n. Coded over 6 bits :0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -110
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: DIR Edit Cell / HO parameters / Directed Retry (+ Edit External cell / circuit1/2) Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell -85 dBm (25) -85 dBm (25) -85 dBm (25) -85 dBm (25) -70 dBm (40) -85 dBm (25) N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
423 / 1182
4.2.260 (L_RXLEV_UL_H) - (L_RXLEV_UL_H)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules L_RXLEV_UL_H L_RXLEV_UL_H
Uplink level threshold for handover. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm L_RXLEV_UL_H < U_RXLEV_UL_P L_RXLEV_UL_H < RXLEV_UL_IH L_RXLEV_UL_H < L_RXLEV_UL_PIf CELL_PARTITION_TYPE = "Concentric" AND FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM" or "DCS1800" or "EGSM" or "DCS 1900":RXLEV_UL_ZONE >= L_RXLEV_UL_H (This rule only applies to concentric and monoband cell.) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -100
Recommended rules
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
424 / 1182
4.2.261 (L_RXLEV_UL_P) - (L_RXLEV_UL_P)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value L_RXLEV_UL_P L_RXLEV_UL_P
Lower uplink level threshold for power control. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm L_RXLEV_UL_P < U_RXLEV_UL_P Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -90
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
425 / 1182
4.2.262 (L_RXQUAL_DL_H) - (L_RXQUAL_DL_H)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value L_RXQUAL_DL_H L_RXQUAL_DL_H
Downlink quality threshold for handover for non AMR calls. step size = 0.1, (1==0.1 70==7) L_RXQUAL_DL_H >= L_RXQUAL_DL_P Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO & PC thresholds / Quality Higher value is the worst quality No No
426 / 1182
4.2.263 (L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR) - (L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR
Downlink quality threshold for handovers (cause 16) on AMR-NB calls. step size = 0.1, (1==0.1 70==7) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4.5
427 / 1182
4.2.264 (L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK) (L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK
Downlink quality threshold for handovers (cause 16) on AMR-WB GMSK calls. step size = 0.1, (1==0.1 70==7) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4.5
428 / 1182
4.2.265 (L_RXQUAL_DL_P) - (L_RXQUAL_DL_P)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value L_RXQUAL_DL_P L_RXQUAL_DL_P
Lower downlink quality threshold for power control. step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 70==7) L_RXQUAL_DL_P > U_RXQUAL_DL_P Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 3
429 / 1182
4.2.266 (L_RXQUAL_UL_H) - (L_RXQUAL_UL_H)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value L_RXQUAL_UL_H L_RXQUAL_UL_H
Uplink quality threshold for handover for non AMR calls. step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 70==7) L_RXQUAL_UL_H >= L_RXQUAL_UL_P Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4
430 / 1182
4.2.267 (L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR) - (L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR
Uplink quality threshold for handovers (cause 15) on AMR-NB calls. step size = 0.1, (1==0.1 70==7) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4.5
431 / 1182
4.2.268 (L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK) (L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK
Uplink quality threshold for handovers (cause 15) on AMR-WB GMSK calls. step size = 0.1, (1==0.1 70==7) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4.5
432 / 1182
4.2.269 (L_RXQUAL_UL_P) - (L_RXQUAL_UL_P)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value L_RXQUAL_UL_P L_RXQUAL_UL_P
Lower uplink quality threshold for power control. step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 70==7) L_RXQUAL_UL_P > U_RXQUAL_UL_P Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 3
433 / 1182
4.2.270 (LAC) - (LAC (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules LAC LAC (BSC)
Location Area Code. LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same timeEqual to LAC (MFS)A couple of mate extended cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall have the same LAC. Site (CAE) Reference BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 65535 Default 65535
External Comment
434 / 1182
4.2.271 (Link_factor) - (Linkfactor (0,n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Link_factor Linkfactor (0,n)
Correction factor used in cell evaluation process to handicap or favour cell n. Site (CAE) Number BSC adj Unit dB Minimum -24 Maximum 24 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Adjacencies No No
435 / 1182
4.2.272 (Load computation in outer zone) - (EN_LOAD_OUTER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Load computation in outer zone EN_LOAD_OUTER
Flag to enable/disable the load computation on the outer zone of a Concentric/multiband cell instead of the load computation on the whole cell. 0: disabled; 1: enabled When enabled, the values of the parameters FREElevel_1 to FREElevel_4 need to be updated to number of TRX considered in the load computation.EN_LOAD_BALANCE & EN_LOAD_OUTER should not be both "Enabled". Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / HO/Reselection / HO significant only for concentric and multiband cells. No No
436 / 1182
4.2.273 (LOAD_EV_PERIOD) - (LOAD_EV_PERIOD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LOAD_EV_PERIOD LOAD_EV_PERIOD
Number of load samples (received every TCH_INFO_PERIOD) for load averaging. Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 30 Default 12
437 / 1182
4.2.274 (Load_Factor_1) - (Loadfactor_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Load_Factor_1 Loadfactor_1
Correction factor used in cell evaluation process to take into account the TCH load in the candidate cell. Loadfactor_1 >= Loadfactor_2 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -16 Maximum 0 Default 0
438 / 1182

Correction factor used in cell evaluation process to take into account the TCH load in the candidate cell. Loadfactor_1 >= Loadfactor_2 >= Loadfactor_3 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -16 Maximum 0 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HOC Edit Cell / HO parameters / Load Classif Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 0 0
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
439 / 1182

Nb of TRX Dependent
No
440 / 1182

Nb of TRX Dependent
No
441 / 1182

Correction factor used in cell evaluation process to take into account the TCH load in the candidate cell. Loadfactor_5 <= Loadfactor_4 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -16 Maximum 0 Default 0
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
442 / 1182
4.2.279 (Load_Level_1) - (Loadlevel_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Load_Level_1 Loadlevel_1
Boundary on cell load for determination of Loadfactor of the cell. Loadlevel_1 < Loadlevel_2 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 50
443 / 1182

Boundary on cell load for determination of Loadfactor of the cell. Loadlevel_1 < Loadlevel_2 < Loadlevel_3 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 60
444 / 1182

Boundary on cell load for determination of Loadfactor of the cell. Loadlevel_2 < Loadlevel_3 < Loadlevel_4 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 80
445 / 1182

Boundary on cell load for determination of Loadfactor of the cell. Loadlevel_4 > Loadlevel_3 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 90
446 / 1182
4.2.283 (LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Load threshold used to determine when traffic load is low for circuit switched calls. LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD <= HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: RRM Edit Cell / Cell Information / Dedicated Radio Resources 1/3 If LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD is set to 0 in a given cell n, then no Handover Cause 23 (i.e. Traffic Handovers) can be triggered towards that cell n. No
Cell Type Dependent
447 / 1182
4.2.284 (LOWER_TIMING_ADVANCE) - (L_TIME_ADVANCE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LOWER_TIMING_ADVANCE L_TIME_ADVANCE
Low threshold to trigger handover cause "too short distance" in outer cell. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit bper Minimum 0 Maximum 63 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO & PC thresholds / Distance Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 0
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
448 / 1182
4.2.285 (Lowest BA range ARFCNs) - (RANGEi_LOWER (1<=i<=13))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Lowest BA range ARFCNs RANGEi_LOWER (1<=i<=13)
Lowest ARFCN of range i indicated in "BA Range" Information Element. Coded on 16 bits. RANGEi_HIGHER >= RANGEi_LOWER Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum -1 Maximum 1023 Default -1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Reselection RANGEi_LOWER = -1 means that it shall not be included in "BA Range" IE Moreover, all BA RANGE following this one will be considered as not significant by the OMC and not send to the BSC. (i.e. -1 = indicator of end of BA Range) No No
449 / 1182
4.2.286 (LSA_ID_I) - (LSA_ID_array (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules LSA_ID_I LSA_ID_array (BSC)
List of authorised LSAs on a cell (up to 5). coded on 3 bytes max Equal to LSA_ID_array (MFS) The LSA_ID may either be a Universal LSA identity (in case of odd number) or a PLMN significant LSA identity (in case of even number), as defined in GSM 03.03. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 16777215 Default 16777215
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / Dedicated Radio Resources 3/3 The default value depends on the configuration. The value given here is for implementation purposes only. No No
450 / 1182
4.2.287 (LSA_ID_I) - (LSA_ID_array (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules LSA_ID_I LSA_ID_array (MFS)
List of authorised LSAs on a cell (up to 5). coded on 3 bytes max Equal to LSA_ID_array (BSC) The LSA_ID may either be a Universal LSA identity (in case of odd number) or a PLMN significant LSA identity (in case of even number), as defined in GSM 03.03. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 16777215 Default 16777215
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / Dedicated Radio Resources 3/3 The default value depends on the configuration. The value given here is for implementation purposes only. No No
451 / 1182
4.2.288 (LSA_ID_I(n)) - (LSA_ID_array (n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value LSA_ID_I(n) LSA_ID_array (n)
List of authorised LSAs on a neighbour cell (up to 5). coded on 3 bytes max Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 16777215 Default 16777215
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No External Cell / Circuit 2/2 This parameter is for every cell. The operator needs only to configure the value of that parameter for OMC external cells ; the parameter is autonomously filled by the OMC in case the adjacent cell is an OMC internal cell. No No
452 / 1182
4.2.289 (LSA_OFFSET) - (LSA_OFFSET)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LSA_OFFSET LSA_OFFSET
Offset to be used for LSA cell reselection between cells with the same LSA priorities. coded from 0 to 7, where 0 = 0 dB, 1 = 4 dB, 2 = 8 dB, 3 = 16 dB, 4 = 24 dB, 5 = 32 dB, 6 = 48 dB, 7 = 64 dB. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 64 Default 0
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / Dedicated Radio Resources 3/3 The default value corresponds to an unused parameter for the MS. No No
453 / 1182
4.2.290 (LSA_PRIO_THR) - (PRIO_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules LSA_PRIO_THR PRIO_THR
Signal threshold for applying LSA cell reselection. coded from 0 to 7; step size = 6 dB (i.e. 0 = 0 dB, 1 = 6 dB, 2 = 12 dB, 3 = 18 dB, 4 = 24 dB, 5 = 30 dB, 6 = 36 dB, 7 = infinite = 42 dB). Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 42 Default 42
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / Dedicated Radio Resources 3/3 The default value corresponds to an unused parameter for the MS.The maximum and default values correspond to an infinite threshold. No No
454 / 1182
4.2.291 (MATE_CI) - (MATE_CI (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules MATE_CI MATE_CI (BSC)
Cell Identity of the Mate cell MATE_CI (BSC) = MATE_CI (MFS)If one mate cell is configured with GPRS (MAX_PDCH > 0) then the other mate cell shall also be configured with GPRS (MAX_PDCH > 0)For an extended cell, MATE_LAC and MATE_CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same time Site (CAE) Reference BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 65535 Default 65535
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes.(MATE_LAC + MATE_CI) is relevant for extended cells only No No
455 / 1182
4.2.292 (MATE_LAC) - (MATE_LAC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules MATE_LAC MATE_LAC
Location Area Code of the Mate cell. Step size = 1 For an extended cell, MATE_LAC and MATE_CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same time A couple of mate extended cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall have the same LAC Site (CAE) Reference BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 65535 Default 65535
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes.(MATE_LAC + MATE_CI) is relevant for extended cells only No No
456 / 1182
4.2.293 (MAX_POW_INC) - (MAX_POW_INC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value MAX_POW_INC MAX_POW_INC
Maximum Power increase in one power command. step size = 2dB Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 2 Maximum 16 Default 8
457 / 1182
4.2.294 (MAX_POW_RED) - (MAX_POW_RED)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value MAX_POW_RED MAX_POW_RED
Maximum Power reduction in one power command. step size = 2dB Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 2 Maximum 16 Default 8
458 / 1182
4.2.295 (MAX_RETRANS) - (Max_retrans (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_RETRANS Max_retrans (BSC)
Maximum number of CHANNEL REQUEST retransmissions by the MS on the RACH. Possible values are:1, 2 ,4 and 7 respectively binary coded:00, 01, 10 and 11 Max_retrans (BSC) = Max_retrans (MFS) for a given cell Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 7 Default 2
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: PAG Edit Cell / Cell Information / RACH Ctrl No No
459 / 1182
4.2.296 (MEAS_STAT_BFI_1) - (MEAS_STAT_BFI_i [1])

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MEAS_STAT_BFI_1 MEAS_STAT_BFI_i [1]
Threshold on successive Bad Frame Indication to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. step size = 1 MEAS_STAT_BFI2 > MEAS_STAT_BFI1 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 24 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: BSS Edit RMS Template / Template X/ Measurements 1/3 Up to 16 instances of this parameter with different values can be defined. This allows to define "RMS templates" (see parameter RMS_template). No No
460 / 1182

Threshold on successive Bad Frame Indication to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. step size = 1 MEAS_STAT_BFI3 > MEAS_STAT_BFI2 > MEAS_STAT_BFI1 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 24 Default 2
461 / 1182

462 / 1182

463 / 1182

464 / 1182

465 / 1182

466 / 1182

467 / 1182

Threshold on successive Bad Frame Indication to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. step size = 1 MEAS_STAT_BFI9 > MEAS_STAT_BFI8 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 24 Default 22
468 / 1182
4.2.305 (MEAS_STAT_C_I_1) - (MEAS_STAT_C_I_i [1])

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MEAS_STAT_C_I_1 MEAS_STAT_C_I_i [1]
Threshold on radio C/I (Carrier/Interference) measurements to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. coded from 1 to +125, step size = 1dB ( 1= -62 db, , 125 = +62 dB) MEAS_STAT_CI1 < MEAS_STAT_CI2 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit dB Minimum -62 Maximum 62 Default -12
469 / 1182

Threshold on radio C/I (Carrier/Interference) measurements to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. coded from 1 to +125, step size = 1dB ( 1= -62 db, , 125 = +62 dB) MEAS_STAT_CI1 < MEAS_STAT_CI2 < MEAS_STAT_CI3 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit dB Minimum -62 Maximum 62 Default -9
470 / 1182

471 / 1182

472 / 1182

Threshold on radio C/I (Carrier/Interference) measurements to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. coded from 1 to +125, step size = 1dB ( 1= -62 db, , 125 = +62 dB) MEAS_STAT_CI4 < MEAS_STAT_CI5 < MEAS_STAT_CI6 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit dB Minimum -62 Maximum 62 Default 0
473 / 1182

474 / 1182

475 / 1182

476 / 1182

Threshold on radio C/I (Carrier/Interference) measurements to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. coded from 1 to +125, step size = 1dB ( 1= -62 db, , 125 = +62 dB) MEAS_STAT_CI8 < MEAS_STAT_CI9 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit dB Minimum -62 Maximum 62 Default 12
477 / 1182
4.2.314 (MEAS_STAT_LEV_1) - (MEAS_STAT_LEV_i [1])

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MEAS_STAT_LEV_1 MEAS_STAT_LEV_i [1]
Threshold on radio level to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. coded 1 to 62, 1 = -109 dBm, . . . 62 = -48 dBm, step = 1dBm MEAS_STAT_LEV_1 > MEAS_STAT_LEV_2 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit dBm Minimum -109 Maximum -48 Default -53
478 / 1182

Threshold on radio level to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. coded 1 to 62, 1 = -109 dBm, . . . 62 = -48 dBm, step = 1dBm MEAS_STAT_LEV_1 > MEAS_STAT_LEV_2 > MEAS_STAT_LEV_3 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit dBm Minimum -109 Maximum -48 Default -60
479 / 1182

480 / 1182

481 / 1182

482 / 1182

483 / 1182

484 / 1182

485 / 1182

Threshold on radio level to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. coded 1 to 62, 1 = -109 dBm, . . . 62 = -48 dBm, step = 1dBm MEAS_STAT_LEV_8 > MEAS_STAT_LEV_9 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit dBm Minimum -109 Maximum -48 Default -104
486 / 1182
4.2.323 (MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL_1) - (MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL_i [1])

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL_1 MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL_i [1]
Threshold on path balance to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. coded from 1 to +219, step size = 1dB (1 = -109 dB, 219 = +109 dB) MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL1 < MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL2 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit dB Minimum -109 Maximum 109 Default -50
487 / 1182

Threshold on path balance to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. coded from 1 to +219, step size = 1dB (1 = -109 dB, 219 = +109 dB) MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL3 > MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL2 > MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL1 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit dB Minimum -109 Maximum 109 Default -30
488 / 1182

489 / 1182

490 / 1182

Threshold on path balance to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. coded from 1 to +219, step size = 1dB (1 = -109 dB, 219 = +109 dB) MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL6 > MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL5 > MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL4 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit dB Minimum -109 Maximum 109 Default 0
491 / 1182

492 / 1182

493 / 1182

494 / 1182

Threshold on path balance to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. coded from 1 to +219, step size = 1dB (1 = -109 dB, 219 = +109 dB) MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL9 > MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL8 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit dB Minimum -109 Maximum 109 Default 50
495 / 1182
4.2.332 (MEAS_STAT_S_1) - (MEAS_STAT_S_i [1])

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MEAS_STAT_S_1 MEAS_STAT_S_i [1]
Threshold on radio link counter to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. step size = 1 Samfr MEAS_STAT_S1 < MEAS_STAT_S2 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 127 Default 1
496 / 1182

Threshold on radio link counter to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. step size = 1 Samfr MEAS_STAT_S3 > MEAS_STAT_S2 > MEAS_STAT_S1 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 127 Default 4
497 / 1182

498 / 1182

499 / 1182

500 / 1182

501 / 1182

502 / 1182

503 / 1182

Threshold on radio link counter to define bands used for Radio Measurements Statistics. step size = 1 Samfr MEAS_STAT_S9 > MEAS_STAT_S8 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 127 Default 22
504 / 1182
4.2.341 (MEAS_STAT_TA_1) - (MEAS_STAT_TA_i [1])

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MEAS_STAT_TA_1 MEAS_STAT_TA_i [1]
Upper limit of the first TA band, lower limit of the second TA band (for the RMS TA measurements) 0 < MEAS_STAT_TA_1 < MEAS_STAT_TA_2 Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit bper Minimum 1 Maximum 62 Default 7
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Up to 16 instances of this parameter with different values can be defined. This allows to define "RMS templates" (see parameter RMS_template). No No
505 / 1182

Upper limit of the 2nd TA band, lower limit of the 3rd TA band (for the RMS TA measurements) MEAS_STAT_TA_1 < MEAS_STAT_TA_2 < MEAS_STAT_TA_3 Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit bper Minimum 1 Maximum 62 Default 13
506 / 1182

Upper limit of the 3rd TA band, lower limit of the 4th TA band (for the RMS TA measurements) MEAS_STAT_TA_2 < MEAS_STAT_TA_3 < MEAS_STAT_TA_4 Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit bper Minimum 1 Maximum 62 Default 19
507 / 1182

Upper limit of the 4th TA band, lower limit of the 5th TA band (for the RMS TA measurements) MEAS_STAT_TA_3 < MEAS_STAT_TA_4 < MEAS_STAT_TA_5 Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit bper Minimum 1 Maximum 62 Default 25
508 / 1182

509 / 1182

510 / 1182

511 / 1182

512 / 1182

Upper limit of the 9th TA band, lower limit of the 10th TA band (for the RMS TA measurements) MEAS_STAT_TA_8 < MEAS_STAT_TA_9 < 63 Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit bper Minimum 1 Maximum 62 Default 55
513 / 1182
4.2.350 (MIN_CONNECT_TIME) - (MIN_CONNECT_TIME)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MIN_CONNECT_TIME MIN_CONNECT_TIME
Maximum connection time after a handover in an overlaid cell to declare the MS "fast" when leaving the cell with a handover. step size=1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 120 Default 40
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO Parameters / Lower Layer HO Control Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A N/A N/A 20 s 40 s N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
514 / 1182
4.2.351 (MIN_RLF_TIME_DL) - (MIN_RLF_TIME_DL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MIN_RLF_TIME_DL MIN_RLF_TIME_DL
Minimum time before detecting a radio link failure of a DL TBF, triggered by N3105 or NstagnatingWindowDL. step size = 100 ms It is recommended to set a value close to the time of temporary very bad radio conditions that the operator would like to support during a DL TBF. Typically, a few seconds. Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit ms Minimum 0 Maximum 25000 Default 4000
515 / 1182
4.2.352 (Mobile Country Code (MCC)) - (MCC (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Mobile Country Code (MCC) MCC (BSC)
Mobile Country Code of the own PLMN. 3 digits BCD The OMC-R shall ensure that the following rules are always fulfilled:MCC (BSC) = MCC (MFS).- The cells belonging to the same BSC shall have the same (MCC,MNC) couple.- The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells internal to the OMC-R shall be selected from the set of own PLMNs.- The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells external to the OMC-R can be selected from the set of own or foreign PLMNs. Site (CAE) Reference BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 999 Default 999
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No Network The value depends on the configuration. The default value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
516 / 1182
4.2.353 (Mobile Network Code (MNC)) - (MNC (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Mobile Network Code (MNC) MNC (BSC)
Mobile Network Code of the own PLMN. 3 digits BCD The OMC-R shall ensure that the following rules are always fulfilled:MNC (BSC) = MNC (MFS).- The cells belonging to the same BSC shall have the same (MCC,MNC) couple.- The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells internal to the OMC-R shall be selected from the set of own PLMNs.- The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells external to the OMC-R can be selected from the set of own or foreign PLMNs. Site (CAE) Reference BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 999 Default 999
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No RNUSM / Edit Network The value depends on configuration. The default value indicated here is for implementation purposes.The operator is allowed to enter 2 or 3 digits MNC in the CDE table.MNC such as yz or Fyz correspond to a 2 digits MNC (y, z = 0..9). (F binary coded 1111)MNC such as xyz correspond to a 3 digits MNC (x = 0..9). No No
517 / 1182
4.2.354 (MS_P_CON_ACK) - (MS_P_CON_ACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value MS_P_CON_ACK MS_P_CON_ACK
Supervision of the MS Power Control procedure. step size=1 (2 x Samfr) Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit 2 x Samfr Minimum 0 Maximum 31 Default 3
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / PC parameters / General PC Control Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 3s 3s 3s 3s 2s 3s 3s 3s
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
518 / 1182
4.2.355 (MS_P_CON_INT) - (MS_P_CON_INT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value MS_P_CON_INT MS_P_CON_INT
Minimum delay between two consecutive MS power commands. step size=1 (2 x Samfr) Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit 2 x Samfr Minimum 0 Maximum 31 Default 2
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / PC parameters / General PC Control Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 1s 1s 1s 1s 0s 1s 1s 1s
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
519 / 1182
4.2.356 (MS_TXPWR_MAX) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules MS_TXPWR_MAX MS_TXPWR_MAX
MS maximum allowed transmission power. P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm,...., 19: 5 dBm.GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39 dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm,..., 15: 0 dBm.DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm, 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm. MS_TXPWR_MAX >= MS_TXPWR_MIN Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum 5 Maximum 43 Default 43
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / PC parameters / General PC Control (+ Edit External cell / circuit1/2) According to the 3GPP TS 05.05, if the BCCH frequency band is P-GSM/G1, depending on the version of MS (Phase 1 MS or Phase 2/onwards MS), the coded value "0", "1" and "2" are interpreted differently:- Coded value "0": (interpreted as 43 dBm by the Phase 1 MS; interpreted as 39 dBm by the Phase 2/onwards MS);- Coded value "1": (interpreted as 41 dBm by the Phase 1 MS; interpreted as 39 dBm by the Phase 2/onwards MS);- Coded value "2": (interpreted as 39 dBm by both the Phase 1 MS and the Phase 2/onwards MS). No No
External Comment
520 / 1182
4.2.357 (MS_TXPWR_MAX) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules MS_TXPWR_MAX MS_TXPWR_MAX(n)
MS maximum allowed transmission power. P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ..., 19: 5 dBm.GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39 dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm, 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm. MS_TXPWR_MAX >= MS_TXPWR_MIN Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum 5 Maximum 43 Default 43
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No External Cell / Circuit 1/2 According to the 3GPP TS 05.05, if the BCCH frequency band is P-GSM/G1, depending on the version of MS (Phase 1 MS or Phase 2/onwards MS), the coded value "0", "1" and "2" are interpreted differently:- Coded value "0": (interpreted as 43 dBm by the Phase 1 MS; interpreted as 39 dBm by the Phase 2/onwards MS);- Coded value "1": (interpreted as 41 dBm by the Phase 1 MS; interpreted as 39 dBm by the Phase 2/onwards MS);-Coded value "2": (interpreted as 39 dBm by both the Phase 1 MS and the Phase 2/onwards MS). No No
521 / 1182
4.2.358 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH (BSC)
Maximum transmission power an MS is allowed to use when accessing the cell until otherwise commanded. P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ..., 19: 5 dBm.GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39 dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm, 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum 5 Maximum 43 Default 43
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Selection According to the 3GPP TS 05.05, if the BCCH frequency band is P-GSM/G1, depending on the version of MS (Phase 1 MS or Phase 2/onwards MS), the coded value "0", "1" and "2" are interpreted differently:- Coded value "0": (interpreted as 43 dBm by the Phase 1 MS; interpreted as 39 dBm by the Phase 2/onwards MS);- Coded value "1": (interpreted as 41 dBm by the Phase 1 MS; interpreted as 39 dBm by the Phase 2/onwards MS);- Coded value "2": (interpreted as 39 dBm by both the Phase 1 MS and the Phase 2/onwards MS). No No
522 / 1182
4.2.359 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER
MS maximum allowed transmission power in the inner zone of a concentric or multiband cell. P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ..., 19: 5 dBm.GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39 dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm, 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm. MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER >= MS_TXPWR_MIN Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum 5 Maximum 43 Default 43
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / PC parameters / General PC Control According to the 3GPP TS 05.05, if the BCCH frequency band is P-GSM/G1, depending on the version of MS (Phase 1 MS or Phase 2/onwards MS), the coded value "0", "1" and "2" are interpreted differently:- Coded value "0": (interpreted as 43 dBm by the Phase 1 MS; interpreted as 39 dBm by the Phase 2/onwards MS);- Coded value "1": (interpreted as 41 dBm by the Phase 1 MS; interpreted as 39 dBm by the Phase 2/onwards MS);- Coded value "2": (interpreted as 39 dBm by both the Phase 1 MS and the Phase 2/onwards MS).Meaninful only in cells where: CELL_PARTITION_TYPE = concentric.
523 / 1182
Cell Type Dependent
Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell
N/A N/A # # N/A N/A N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
524 / 1182
4.2.360 (MS_TXPWR_MIN) - (MS_TXPWR_MIN)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules MS_TXPWR_MIN MS_TXPWR_MIN
MS minimum allowed transmission power. P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ...,13: 17 dBm,, 19: 5 dBm.GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39 dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 13: 17 dBm,, 19: 5 dBm.DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 13: 4 dBm,, 15: 0 dBm.DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 13: 4 dBm,, 15: 0 dBm, 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm. MS_TXPWR_MIN <= MS_TXPWR_MAX and MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER >= MS_TXPWR_MIN Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum 5 Maximum 43 Default 17
Mandatory rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / PC parameters / General PC Control (+ Edit External cell / circuit1/2) The default value depends on the BCCH frequency band:Default value for P-GSM/G1: 17 dBmDefault value for GSM850: 17 dBmDefault value for DCS1800: 4 dBmDefault value for DCS1900: 4 dBm No No
External Comment
525 / 1182
4.2.361 (MSC Signalling Point Code) - (DPC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value MSC Signalling Point Code DPC
Signalling Point Code of the MSC. coded over 14 bits Site (CAE) Reference BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 16383 Default 12
OMC Changes: EML RNO Changes: No BSS parameters / A interface info Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
526 / 1182
4.2.362 (MSCR) - (MSCR (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MSCR MSCR (BSC)
Year corresponding to the version of ETSI/3GPP recommendations used to implement MSC software. 0 = MSC is release 98 or older; 1 = MSC is release 99 onwards MSCR (BSC) = MSCR (MFS) Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / Internetworking MSC Internetworking No No
527 / 1182
4.2.363 (MSCR) - (MSCR (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MSCR MSCR (MFS)
Year corresponding to the version of ETSI/3GPP recommendations used to implement MSC software. 0 = MSC is release 98 or older; 1 = MSC is release 99 onwards MSCR (BSC) = MSCR (MFS) Site (CAE) Flag MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / Internetworking MSC Internetworking No No
528 / 1182
4.2.364 (MTP_Sequence_Number_Format) (MTP_Sequence_Number_Format)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value MTP_Sequence_Number_Format MTP_Sequence_Number_Format
Defines the format to be used for the sequence number of MTP2. 0: Normal1: Extended Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Value "Extended" is refused by the BSC if EN_HSL=0 No No
529 / 1182
4.2.365 (MULTIBAND_REPORTING) - (MULTIBAND_REPORTING (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MULTIBAND_REPORTING MULTIBAND_REPORTING (BSC)
Minimum number of cells of each supported frequency band to be included in MEASUREMENT REPORT by the MS. Coded over 2 bits:00: normal reporting of the six strongest cells, with known and allowed NCC part of BSIC, irrespective of the band used;01: the MS shall report the strongest cell, with known and allowed NCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the BA list, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell;10: the MS shall report the two strongest cells, with known and allowed NCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the BA list, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell; 11: the MS shall report the three strongest cells, with known and allowed NCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the BA list, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell. Equal to MULTIBAND_REPORTING (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 3 Default 0
Coding rules
530 / 1182
4.2.366 (MULTIBAND_REPORTING) - (MULTIBAND_REPORTING (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MULTIBAND_REPORTING MULTIBAND_REPORTING (MFS)
Minimum number of cells of each supported frequency band to be included in MEASUREMENT REPORT by the MS. Coded over 2 bits:00: normal reporting of the six strongest cells, with known and allowed NCC part of BSIC, irrespective of the band used;01: the MS shall report the strongest cell, with known and allowed NCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the BA list, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell;10: the MS shall report the two strongest cells, with known and allowed NCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the BA list, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell; 11: the MS shall report the three strongest cells, with known and allowed NCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the BA list, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell. Equal to MULTIBAND_REPORTING (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 3 Default 0
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / HO parameters / Hierarchical and multiband HO Ctrl No No
531 / 1182
4.2.367 (MULTIBAND_TRAFFIC_CONDITION) (MULTIBAND_TRAFFIC_CONDITION)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MULTIBAND_TRAFFIC_CONDITION MULTIBAND_TRAFFIC_CONDITION
This parameter determines the condition on traffic load in the serving cell to trigger a multiband handover. 0: Any load, 1: Not low, 2: High Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 0
532 / 1182
4.2.368 (N_BAD_SACCH) - (N_BAD_SACCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N_BAD_SACCH N_BAD_SACCH
Number of consecutive bad SACCH frames to trigger a rescue handover. 1) N_BAD_SACCH = RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS - N_BSTXPWR_M + 12) In micro cells, it is recommended to set N_BAD_SACCH so that T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP > N_BAD_SACCH * 480ms + 30 seconds if T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP <> 0. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 0 Maximum 128 Default 4
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO Parameters / Lower Layer HO Control Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A N/A N/A 4 N/A N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
533 / 1182
4.2.369 (N_TCH_HO) - (N_TCH_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value N_TCH_HO N_TCH_HO
Number of less interfered Full Rate TCH reserved for handover. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 3
534 / 1182
4.2.370 (N_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (N_TRAFFIC_LOAD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N_TRAFFIC_LOAD N_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Number of consecutive load averages used in traffic load evaluation process. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 8 Default 1
535 / 1182
4.2.371 (NB_CLR_REQ) - (N_CLR_REQ)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value NB_CLR_REQ N_CLR_REQ
Maximum number of CLEAR REQUEST message transmission. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 8 Default 4
536 / 1182
4.2.372 (NB_PREF_CELLS) - (N_PREF_CELLS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NB_PREF_CELLS N_PREF_CELLS
Maximum number of candidate cells sent in one HANDOVER REQUIRED. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 16 Default 3
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / HO/Reselection / Handover Control No No
537 / 1182
4.2.373 (Nbr AC 11-15 unbarred in one step) - (M2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Nbr AC 11-15 unbarred in one step M2
Number of high priority access classes (11..15) are unbarred in one step. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 5 Default 2
538 / 1182
4.2.374 (Nbr. AC 0-9 barred in one step) - (N1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Nbr. AC 0-9 barred in one step N1
Number of low priority access classes (0..9) are barred in one step. Value 0 inhibits the automatic barring of low priority access classes. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 10 Default 2
539 / 1182
4.2.375 (Nbr. AC 0-9 unbarred in one step) - (N2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Nbr. AC 0-9 unbarred in one step N2
Number of low priority access classes (0..9) are unbarred in one step. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 2
540 / 1182
4.2.376 (Nbr. AC 11-15 barred in one step) - (M1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Nbr. AC 11-15 barred in one step M1
Number of high priority access classes (11..15) are barred in one step. Value 0 inhibits the automatic barring of high priority access classes Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 5 Default 2
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC /Procedures / Overload and Barring No No
541 / 1182
4.2.377 (NBR_RESET_CIC_REP) - (NBR_RESET_CIC_REP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NBR_RESET_CIC_REP NBR_RESET_CIC_REP
Maximum number of RESET CIRCUIT message repetitions when not acknowledged by the MSC. 255: RESET CIRCUIT message is indefinitely repeated Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 6
542 / 1182
4.2.378 (NBR_RESET_REP) - (NBR_RESET_REP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NBR_RESET_REP NBR_RESET_REP
Number of times the RESET message is sent without being acknowledged by the MSC before an alarm is reported. If NBR_RESET_REP = 0, RESET message is not sent Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 127 Default 6
543 / 1182
4.2.379 (NCC) - (NCC (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value NCC NCC (BSC)
Network Colour code of the cell. Coded over 3 bits. Equal to NCC (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Description (+Edit External cell / circuit1/2) Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
External Comment
544 / 1182
4.2.380 (NCC) - (NCC (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value NCC NCC (MFS)
Network Colour code of the cell. Coded over 3 bits. Equal to NCC (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Description (+ Edit External cell / circuit1/2) Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
External Comment
545 / 1182
4.2.381 (NCC) - (NCC(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value NCC NCC(n)
Network Colour code of the neighbour cell. Coded over 3 bits. Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Description (+ Edit External cell / circuit1/2) Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes.This parameter is for every cell. The operator needs only to configure the value of that parameter for OMC external cells ; the parameter is autonomously filled by the OMC in case the adjacent cell is an OMC internal cell No No
External Comment
546 / 1182
4.2.382 (NCC permitted) - (NCC_permitted)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NCC permitted NCC_permitted
Indicates which NCC values the MS considers as belonging to the network. Coded over 8 bits. each bit corresponds to a NCC value: MSB corresponds to NCC = 7, LSB corresponds to NCC = 0. For each bit:0= NCC not permitted, 1= NCC permitted Site (CAE) List of numbers BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 0
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Description The value depends on configuration. The default value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
547 / 1182
4.2.383 (NCI) - (NCI)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NCI NCI
This flag indicates to the MS if it reports a HANDOVER FAILURE in case of out of range timing advance. 0: Out of range timing advance is ignored, 1: Out of range timing advance triggers a Handover Failure procedure Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
548 / 1182
4.2.384 (NEIGHBOUR_RXLEV) - (NEIGHBOUR_RXLEV(0,n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NEIGHBOUR_RXLEV NEIGHBOUR_RXLEV(0,n)
Threshold of maximum received level from the neighbour cells for cause 13. coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm Site (CAE) Threshold BSC adj Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -47
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Adjacencies Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A -47 dBm (63) -47 dBm (63) N/A N/A N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
549 / 1182
4.2.385 (NUM_TCH_EMERGENCY_HO) - (NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NUM_TCH_EMERGENCY_HO NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO
Number of full rate TCH reserved for incoming emergency handovers (plus Cause 12 and Cause 27 handovers). step size = 1 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / HO Parameters / General HO Control The Pre-emption procedure (in case EN_TCH_PREEMPT = enabled) might use these reserved TCHs in order to avoid releasing an on-going call unnecessarily. No No
550 / 1182
4.2.386 (NY_1) - (NY1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value NY_1 NY1
Maximum number of repetitions of PHYSICAL INFORMATION. For rules, see T3105_D and T3105_F_FR, T3105_F_HR. For rules, see T3105_D and T3105_F_FR, T3105_F_HR. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 3 Maximum 35 Default 20
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / Timers No No
551 / 1182
4.2.387 (OFFSET_CA_HIGH) - (OFFSET_CA_HIGH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value OFFSET_CA_HIGH OFFSET_CA_HIGH
Offset for AMR channel adaptation hysteresis under high load. step size = 0.1 (0 coded as 0, 0.1 coded as 1 7 coded as 70) OFFSET_CA_HIGH >= OFFSET_CA_NORMAL Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4.5
552 / 1182
4.2.388 (OFFSET_CA_NORMAL) - (OFFSET_CA_NORMAL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value OFFSET_CA_NORMAL OFFSET_CA_NORMAL
Offset for AMR channel adaptation hysteresis under normal load. step size = 0.1 (0 coded as 0, 0.1 coded as 1 7 coded as 70) OFFSET_CA_HIGH >= OFFSET_CA_NORMAL Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4.5
553 / 1182
4.2.389 (OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER) - (OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER
Offset which allows to take into account the radio differences between the inner and the outer zone (especially in multiband cells). Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -127 Maximum 127 Default 0
554 / 1182
4.2.390 (OFFSET_HOPPING_HO) - (Offset_Hopping_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition OFFSET_HOPPING_HO Offset_Hopping_HO
Offset applied in the handover quality causes for radio hopping channels. step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 70==7) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 1
555 / 1182
4.2.391 (OFFSET_HOPPING_PC) - (Offset_Hopping_PC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition OFFSET_HOPPING_PC Offset_Hopping_PC
Offset applied in the power control quality causes for hopping radio channels. step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 70==7) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
556 / 1182
4.2.392 (OUTDOOR_UMB_LEV) - (OUTDOOR_UMB_LEV(0,n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition OUTDOOR_UMB_LEV OUTDOOR_UMB_LEV(0,n)
Minimum received level from umbrella cell n to allow handover cause "level uplink micro-cell" or "level downlink micro-cell". coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm Site (CAE) Threshold BSC adj Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -80
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / HO Parameters / Low Layer HO Ctrl (+ Edit Adjacency) Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A N/A N/A -88 dBm (22) -88 dBm (22) N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
557 / 1182
4.2.393 (PAGING) - (PAG_BAR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value PAGING PAG_BAR
This flag indicates if transmission of Pagings is allowed in the cell. 0: Pagings are not barred, 1: Pagings are barred Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: PAG Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Description this flag can be used by an operator to temporarily prevent phones from ringing in specific cells No No
558 / 1182
4.2.394 (PENALTY_TIME) - (PENALTY_TIME(BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PENALTY_TIME PENALTY_TIME(BSC)
Time during which MS shall apply TEMPORARY_OFFSET to C2 criterion. step size = 20s. 0: 20s, 1: 40s, ..., 30: 620s, 31: TEMPORARY OFFSET ignored and cell_RESELECT_OFFSET has a negative value Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit sec Minimum 20 Maximum 620 Default 20
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: SEL Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Selection Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell inhibited (31) inhibited (31) inhibited (31) inhibited (31) 20 s (0) 20 s (0) inhibited (31) inhibited (31)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
559 / 1182
4.2.395 (PENALTY_TIME) - (PENALTY_TIME(MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PENALTY_TIME PENALTY_TIME(MFS)
Time during which MS shall apply TEMPORARY_OFFSET to C2 criterion. step size = 20s. 0: 20s, 1: 40s, ..., 30: 620s, 31: TEMPORARY OFFSET ignored and cell_RESELECT_OFFSET has a negative value. PENALTY_TIME(MFS) = PENALTY_TIME(BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit sec Minimum 20 Maximum 620 Default 20
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Selection No No
560 / 1182
4.2.396 (PENALTY_TIME) - (PENALTY_TIME(n)(MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PENALTY_TIME PENALTY_TIME(n)(MFS)
Time during which MS shall apply TEMPORARY_OFFSET to C2 criterion. step size = 20s. 0: 20s, 1: 40s, ..., 30: 620s, 31: TEMPORARY OFFSET ignored and cell_RESELECT_OFFSET has a negative value Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit sec Minimum 20 Maximum 620 Default 20
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No Edit external cell / packet No No
561 / 1182
4.2.397 (PING_PONG_HANDICAP) - (PING_PONG_HCP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PING_PONG_HANDICAP PING_PONG_HCP
A transient handicap is applied to power budget of previous cell to avoid a "ping-pong" effect. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 127 Default 15
562 / 1182
4.2.398 (POW_INC_FACTOR) - (POW_INC_FACTOR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value POW_INC_FACTOR POW_INC_FACTOR
Weighting factor for power increase. step size = 0.1 POW_INC_FACTOR >= POW_RED_FACTOR Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0.8
563 / 1182
4.2.399 (POW_INC_STEP_SIZE) - (POW_INC_STEP_SIZE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition POW_INC_STEP_SIZE POW_INC_STEP_SIZE
Power increase step size in case of power command triggered on quality criterion. step size = 2dB. 1: 2dB, 2: 4dB, ..., 7: 14 dB POW_INC_STEP_SIZE > POW_RED_STEP_SIZE Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 2 Maximum 14 Default 6
564 / 1182
4.2.400 (POW_RED_FACTOR) - (POW_RED_FACTOR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value POW_RED_FACTOR POW_RED_FACTOR
Weighting factor for power reduction. step size = 0.1 POW_RED_FACTOR <= POW_INC_FACTOR Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0.5
565 / 1182
4.2.401 (POW_RED_STEP_SIZE) - (POW_RED_STEP_SIZE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition POW_RED_STEP_SIZE POW_RED_STEP_SIZE
Power reduction step size in case of power command triggered on quality criterion. step size = 2dB. 1: 2dB, 2: 4dB POW_RED_STEP_SIZE < POW_INC_STEP_SIZE Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 2 Maximum 4 Default 2
566 / 1182
4.2.402 (Preference Mark) - (TRX_PREF_MARK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Preference Mark TRX_PREF_MARK
Preference mark assigned to a given TRX. 0: PS/CS TRX: This TRX can carry PS and CS traffic and has the lowest preference in the TCH sub-channel selection process used to serve a CS call. 1: CS TRX with preference mark 1: This TRX can carry only CS traffic and has the preference mark 1 in the TCH sub-channel selection process used to serve a CS call.7: CS TRX with preference mark 7: This TRX can carry only CS traffic and has the highest preference in the TCH sub-channel selection process used to served a CS call. It means that this TRX has the highest priority for CS traffic. 1) For a TRX in the inner zone of a monoband or multiband concentric cell, the parameter TRX_PREF_MARK shall be set to a non-null value.2) For a hopping G1 TRX, if EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY = 0 and BCCH/CCCH are configured on PGSM TRX then TRX_PREF_MARK <> 03)The following conditions are verified by the OMC-R in order to check the upper limit of MAX_PDCH:i) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) 1 if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "1: CCCH combined"ii) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) - 2 if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "0: CCCH not combined"iii) MAX_PDCH <= NB_TS_MPDCH + 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRX.4) In case of cell shared over 2 BTSs, the GPRS TRXs of the cell (ie TRX_PREF_MARK=0) can be either on the main sector or on the secondary, but not on both. Site (CAE) Number BSC TRX Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 1
Mandatory rules
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / TRX Configuration
567 / 1182
External Comment
If EGPRS is activated in the cell, TRX_PREF_MARK (BCCH TRX) = 0 and the BCCH TRX is associated to a TRE hardware and a transmission pool allowing the usage of 8-PSK, the operator shall ensure that the difference in the mean output powers between GSMK and 8-PSK signals is less than 2 dB in order to be compliant with 3GPP TS 05.05 and 3GPP TS 05.08 requirements (or 4 dB if an SDCCH timeslot is defined in timeslot number 7 of the BCCH TRX). No No
568 / 1182
4.2.403 (PREFERRED_BAND) - (PREFERRED_BAND)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PREFERRED_BAND PREFERRED_BAND
Frequency band to which the multiband MS are preferentially directed. 0: none, 1: GSM, 2: DCS Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / HO/Reselection / HO Control Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
569 / 1182
4.2.404 (Preventive cyclic retransmission flag) - (EN_PCR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Preventive cyclic retransmission flag EN_PCR
This flag enables preventive cyclic retransmission. 0 : disabled, 1 : enabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No This parameter is set to 1 by the BSC in case the Ater links of a BSS are configured as satellite links. No No
570 / 1182
4.2.405 (PWRC) - (PWRC (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PWRC PWRC (BSC)
This flag indicates to the MS if it includes measurements made on BCCH frequency in case of frequency hopping channel. 0: measurements made on BCCH frequency are included, 1: measurements made on BCCH frequency are not included. Equal to PWRC (MFS) Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
Coding rules
571 / 1182
4.2.406 (PWRC) - (PWRC (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PWRC PWRC (MFS)
This flag indicates to the MS whether or not it shall include measurements made on BCCH frequency in case of frequency hopping channel. 0: measurements made on BCCH frequency shall be included, 1: measurements made on BCCH frequency shall not be included Equal to PWRC (BSC) Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
Coding rules
572 / 1182
4.2.407 (Q703_N1) - (Q703_N1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Q703_N1 Q703_N1
Maximum number of MSU available for retransmission. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 127 Default 127
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No not used if EN_HSL = 1 No No
573 / 1182
4.2.408 (Q703_N1_HSL) - (Q703_N1_HSL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Q703_N1_HSL Q703_N1_HSL
Maximum number of MSU available for retransmission (if HSL is used). step size 1 Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 4095 Default 4095
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: used if EN_HSL = 1 No No
574 / 1182
4.2.409 (Q703_N2) - (Q703_N2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Q703_N2 Q703_N2
Maximum number of MSU octets which are available for retransmission. Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit bytes Minimum 1 Maximum 8192 Default 4096
575 / 1182
4.2.410 (Q703_N2_HSL) - (Q703_N2_HSL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Q703_N2_HSL Q703_N2_HSL
Maximum number of MSU octets which are available for retransmission (if HSL is used). step size = 1 Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit bytes Minimum 1 Maximum 65535 Default 32767
576 / 1182
4.2.411 (Q703_T1) - (Q703_T1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Q703_T1 Q703_T1
MTP2 timer "alignment ready". Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 40 Maximum 50 Default 50
577 / 1182
4.2.412 (Q703_T1_HSL) - (Q703_T1_HSL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Q703_T1_HSL Q703_T1_HSL
MTP2 timer "alignment ready" for 2Mbit/s (if HSL is used). step size = 1 Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 25 Maximum 350 Default 300
578 / 1182
4.2.413 (Q703_T2) - (Q703_T2)

MTP2 timer "not aligned". Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 5 Maximum 150 Default 30
579 / 1182
4.2.414 (Q703_T3) - (Q703_T3)

MTP2 timer "aligned". step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 2 Default 1
580 / 1182
4.2.415 (Q703_T4E) - (Q703_T4E)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Q703_T4E Q703_T4E
MTP2 Emergency proving period. step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.4 Maximum 0.6 Default 0.5
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No Applicable to LSL and HSL. No No
581 / 1182
4.2.416 (Q703_T4N) - (Q703_T4N)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Q703_T4N Q703_T4N
MTP2 Normal proving period. step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 7.5 Maximum 9.5 Default 8.2
582 / 1182
4.2.417 (Q703_T4N_HSL) - (Q703_T4N_HSL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Q703_T4N_HSL Q703_T4N_HSL
MTP2 Normal proving period for 2Mbit/s (if HSL is used). step size = 1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 3 Maximum 70 Default 30
583 / 1182
4.2.418 (Q703_T5) - (Q703_T5)

MTP2 timer "sending SIB". Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit ms Minimum 80 Maximum 120 Default 100
584 / 1182
4.2.419 (Q703_T6) - (Q703_T6)

MTP2 timer "remote congestion". step size = 0.1sec Q707_T1 >= Q703_T6 Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 3 Maximum 6 Default 5.4
585 / 1182
4.2.420 (Q703_T7) - (Q703_T7)

MTP2 timer "excessive delay of acknowledgement". step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 2 Default 1
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No In case of a Ater satellite connection, this parameter is set to 2 seconds by the BSC. No No
586 / 1182
4.2.421 (Q704_T2) - (Q704_T2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Q704_T2 Q704_T2
MTP3 timer supervising the reception of changeover acknowledgement. step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.7 Maximum 2 Default 2
587 / 1182
4.2.422 (Q704_T4) - (Q704_T4)

MTP3 timer supervising the reception of changeback acknowledgement (first attempt). step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 1.2 Default 1
588 / 1182
4.2.423 (Q704_T5) - (Q704_T5)

MTP3 timer supervising the reception of changeback acknowledgement (second attempt). step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 1.2 Default 1
589 / 1182
4.2.424 (Q707_T1) - (Q707_T1)

MTP3 timer supervising the reception of signalling link test acknowledgement. step size = 0.1sec Q707_T1 >= Q703_T6 Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 4 Maximum 12 Default 6.4
590 / 1182
4.2.425 (Q707_T2) - (Q707_T2)

MTP3 delay between transmission of consecutive signalling link test message. step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 30 Maximum 90 Default 60
591 / 1182
4.2.426 (RACH/PRACH_TA_FILTER) - (RACH_TA_FILTER (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RACH/PRACH_TA_FILTER RACH_TA_FILTER (BSC)
Timing Advance threshold for CHANNEL REQUIRED and PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST filtering. 64: no filtering Equal to RACH_TA_FILTER (MFS). Disable the filtering for extended cells. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit bper Minimum 0 Maximum 64 Default 64
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: PAG Edit Cell / Cell Information / RACH Ctrl One unit corresponds to a distance of about 550m. CHANNEL REQUIRED or PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST messages with Timing Advance greater or equal to RACH_TA_FILTER are discarded. No No
592 / 1182
4.2.427 (RACH_BUSY_THRES) - (RACH_BUSY_THRES)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules RACH_BUSY_THRES RACH_BUSY_THRES
Received level above which a RACH TS is deemed busy. This parameter is encoded with a step size of 4 dB as follows:1: -110 dBm5: -106 dBm9: -102 dBm13: -98 dBm17: -94 dBm21: -90 dBm25: -86 dBm29: -82 dBm33: -78 dBm37: -74 dBm41: -70 dBm45: -66 dBm49: -62 dBm53: -58 dBm57: -54 dBm61: -50 dBm Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -50 Default -106
593 / 1182
4.2.428 (RADIOLINK_FAILURE_THRES) - (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value RADIOLINK_FAILURE_THRES RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS
Counter threshold to detect a radio link failure on the uplink path. RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS > N_BSTXPWR_M Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 18
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / PC parameters / Radio Link Supervision Values higher than 128 are not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent (very far to the 3GPP values):It will significantly increase the delay for retransmission of a message. For instance, if a HANDOVER COMMAND is sent to a given MS, but not received, the MS will have to wait longer to get the repeated HO CMD, which may lead to call drop in the meantime. No No
594 / 1182
4.2.429 (RADIOLINK_FAILURE_THRES_AMR) (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS_AMR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RADIOLINK_FAILURE_THRES_AMR RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS_AMR
Counter threshold to detect a radio link failure on the uplink path for calls using an AMR codec. RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS_AMR > N_BSTXPWR_M Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 18
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: This parameter applies only to Evolium BTSs.Values higher than 128 are not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent (very far to the 3GPP values): It will significantly increase the delay for retransmission of a message. For instance, if a HANDOVER COMMAND is sent to a given MS, but not received, the MS will have to wait longer to get the repeated HO CMD, which may lead to call drop in the meantime.Moreover, it can increase congestion in the BSS, as the call duration is artificially increased. No No
595 / 1182
4.2.430 (RADIOLINK_RECOVERY_THRES) - (N_BSTXPWR_M)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value RADIOLINK_RECOVERY_THRES N_BSTXPWR_M
Counter threshold to trigger a radio link recovery. N_BSTXPWR_M < RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 0 Maximum 127 Default 13
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / PC parameters / Radio Link Supervision Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 13 13 13 13 15 13 13 13
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
596 / 1182
4.2.431 (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT) - (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (BSC)
Initial value of MS counter for radio link supervision. step size = 4 Samfr, coded from 0 to 15 (0 == 4 Samfr, 1 == 8 Samfr ... 15 == 64 Samfr Equal to RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 4 Maximum 64 Default 16
597 / 1182
4.2.432 (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT) - (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (MFS)
Initial value of MS counter for radio link supervision. step size = 4 Samfr, coded from 0 to 15 (0 == 4 Samfr, 1 == 8 Samfr ... 15 == 64 Samfr Equal to RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit Samfr Minimum 4 Maximum 64 Default 16
598 / 1182
4.2.433 (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_AMR) - (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_AMR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_AMR RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_AMR
Initial value of MS counter for radio link supervision, when an AMR codec is used. step size = 4 Samfr, coded from 0 to 15 (0 == 4 Samfr, 1 == 8 Samfr ... 15 == 64 Samfr Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 4 Maximum 64 Default 16
Coding rules
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: This parameter applies only to Evolium BTSs. No No
599 / 1182
4.2.434 (Reserved Slots Number for Basic CBCH) (Nb_of_reserved_slots_for_basic_CBCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Reserved Slots Number for Basic CBCH Nb_of_reserved_slots_for_basic_CBCH
This parameter indicates the number of slots reserved for high priority messages within the schedule period for basic CBCH. shall be set to "0" when SMSCB_FEATURE_SET="FS1" Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 40 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: PAG Edit Cell / Cell Information / SMSCB No No
600 / 1182
4.2.435 (Reserved Slots Number for Extended CBCH) (Nb_of_reserved_slots_for_extended_CBCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Reserved Slots Number for Extended CBCH Nb_of_reserved_slots_for_extended_CBCH
This parameter indicates the number of slots reserved for high priority messages within the schedule period for extended CBCH. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 40 Default 0
601 / 1182
4.2.436 (RESET_INDEFINITE) - (RESET_INDEFINITE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RESET_INDEFINITE RESET_INDEFINITE
This flag determines whether or not the RESET message shall be sent indefinitely (as long as it is not acknowledged). 0: RESET message is sent a maximum of NBR_RESET_REP times, 1: The Reset procedure is repeated until a RESET or RESET ACK message is received. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / Interworking / MSC interworking Default value depends on MSC type No No
602 / 1182
4.2.437 (RESP_REQ) - (RESP_REQ)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RESP_REQ RESP_REQ
This flag controls "Response request" OIE inclusion in HANDOVER REQUIRED. 0: IE not included, 1: IE included When the VGCS feature (EN_VGCS) is activated, it is recommended to include the Response Request in the HANDOVER REQUIRED message (RESP_REQ). Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / HO/Reselection / HO Control Default value depends on MSC typeFor external directed retries, the serving BSC does not know whether or not the external target cells (towards which the directed retry is triggered) are congested. Therefore, Alcatel recommend to set RESP_REQ to 1 if EN_EXT_DR is set to enabled in order to get a Handover Reject message from the MSC in case all target cells are congested and thus to attempt other procedures. No No
603 / 1182
4.2.438 (RF_RES_IND_PERIOD) - (T_INTRF_L3)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules RF_RES_IND_PERIOD T_INTRF_L3
Delay between two consecutive RF RESOURCE INDICATION. step size = 1sec T_INTRF_L3 > Max (T11, T_qho, T11_FORCED) & T_INTRF_L3 > INTAVE Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit sec Minimum 10 Maximum 180 Default 60
604 / 1182
4.2.439 (RMS_TEMPLATE) - (RMS_TEMPLATE_INDEX)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RMS_TEMPLATE RMS_TEMPLATE_INDEX
Template of values of RMS parameters to be applied to the concerned cell (concerns the parameters MEAS_STAT_C_Ix, MEAS_STAT_BFIx, MEAS_STAT_LEVx, MEAS_STAT_PATH_BALx, MEAS_STAT_Sx, EN_BALANCED_CI, VQ_AVERAGE, VQ_BAD_RXFER, VQ_FER_THRESHOLD, VQ_GOOD_RXFER, VQ_INTF_THRESHOLD, VQ_RXLEV, VQ_RXQUAL, VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFER). coded from 1 to 16 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 16 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: RRM Edit Cell / RMS & MAFA No No
605 / 1182
4.2.440 (ROT) - (ROT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition ROT ROT
Indicates to the MS whether or not it shall include "Time Difference" IE in HANDOVER COMPLETE. 0: "Mobile Time Difference" IE is NOT included in HANDOVER COMPLETE, 1: "Mobile Time Difference" IE is included in HANDOVER COMPLETE Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
606 / 1182
4.2.441 (RSL_RATE (BSC)) - (RSL_RATE (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value RSL_RATE (BSC) RSL_RATE (BSC)
Rate used on all RSL links towards a BTS. 0: 16 kbit/s, 1: 64 kbit/s Site (CAE) Flag BSC BTS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
607 / 1182
4.2.442 (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (BSC)
Minimum received level at the MS required for initial access to the cell. Coded on 6 bits, 0=-110 dBm, 63=-47 dBm, step size=1dBm. RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (MFS) = RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (BSC) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -100
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: SEL Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Selection No No
608 / 1182
4.2.443 (RXLEV_DL_IH) - (RXLEV_DL_IH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RXLEV_DL_IH RXLEV_DL_IH
Downlink level threshold for decision between intracell and intercell handover in case of bad downlink quality. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm. RXLEV_DL_IH > L_RXLEV_DL_H Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -65
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
609 / 1182
4.2.444 (RXLEV_DL_ZONE) - (RXLEV_DL_ZONE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules RXLEV_DL_ZONE RXLEV_DL_ZONE
Downlink level threshold for inner to outer zone handover. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm. If CELL_PARTITION_TYPE = "Concentric" AND FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM" or "DCS1800" or "EGSM" or "DCS 1900":RXLEV_DL_ZONE >= L_RXLEV_DL_H (This rule only applies to concentric and monoband cell.) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -71
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO & PC thresholds / Level Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A -71 dBm (39) -71 dBm (39) N/A N/A N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
610 / 1182
4.2.445 (RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO) - (RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO
Threshold on the downlink received level above which it is not necessary to trigger a handover on power budget (cause 12). Coded over 6 bits:0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -47
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
611 / 1182
4.2.446 (RXLEV_MIN_n) - (RXLEVmin(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value RXLEV_MIN_n RXLEVmin(n)
Minimum level received from cell n to allow reception of handover. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -96
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Selection (+ Edit External cell / circuit1/2) Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell -100 dBm (10) -100 dBm (10) -100 dBm (10) -100 dBm (10) -100 dBm (10) -100 dBm (10) -100 dBm (10) -102 dBm (8)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
612 / 1182
4.2.447 (RXLEV_UL_IH) - (RXLEV_UL_IH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RXLEV_UL_IH RXLEV_UL_IH
Uplink level threshold for decision between intracell and intercell handover in case of bad uplink quality. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm. RXLEV_UL_IH > L_RXLEV_UL_H Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -65
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
613 / 1182
4.2.448 (RXLEV_UL_ZONE) - (RXLEV_UL_ZONE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules RXLEV_UL_ZONE RXLEV_UL_ZONE
Uplink level threshold for inner to outer zone handover. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm. If CELL_PARTITION_TYPE = "Concentric" AND FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM" or "DCS1800" or "EGSM" or "DCS 1900":RXLEV_UL_ZONE >= L_RXLEV_UL_H (This rule only applies to concentric and monoband cell.) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -78
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO & PC thresholds / Level Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A -78 dBm (32) -78 dBm (32) N/A N/A N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
614 / 1182
4.2.449 (Schedule Period for Basic CBCH) (Schedule_period_for_basic_CBCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Schedule Period for Basic CBCH Schedule_period_for_basic_CBCH
Length of the DRX schedule period for the basic CBCH. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit CBper Minimum 0 Maximum 40 Default 32
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / SMSCB No No
615 / 1182
4.2.450 (Schedule period for Extended CBCH) (Schedule_period_for_extended_CBCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Schedule period for Extended CBCH Schedule_period_for_extended_CBCH
Length of the DRX schedule period for the extended CBCH. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit CBper Minimum 0 Maximum 40 Default 32
616 / 1182
4.2.451 (SDCCH_COUNTER) - (SDCCH_COUNTER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SDCCH_COUNTER SDCCH_COUNTER
Time during which SDCCH handovers are forbidden after completion of the Immediate Assignment procedure. step size=1 (2 x Samfr) SDCCH_COUNTER <= T_SDCCH_PC Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit 2 x Samfr Minimum 0 Maximum 31 Default 3
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO parameters / General HO Control "0" means that SDCCH handover is immediately allowed after completion of the Immediate Assignment procedure. No No
617 / 1182
4.2.452 (SDCCH_HO) - (HO_SDCCH_INHIBIT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value SDCCH_HO HO_SDCCH_INHIBIT
The flag inhibits/enables the execution of SDCCH handovers. 0: SDCCH HO enabled1: SDCCH HO disabled Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO parameters / General HO Control This parameter has no influence on Directed Retry Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell enable (0) enable (0) enable (0) enable (0) enable (0) enable (0) disabled (1) * disabled (1) *
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
618 / 1182
4.2.453 (Send_CM_Enquiry) - (BSS_SEND_CM_ENQUIRY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Send_CM_Enquiry BSS_SEND_CM_ENQUIRY
Controls the trigger of Classmark Enquiry procedure at call establishment time. 0: the classmark enquiry is never initiated by the BSC;1: on reception of a LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST message with ES IND flag set to 0, the BSC will always initiate a classmark enquiry;2: on reception of a LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST message with ES IND flag set to 0, the BSC will initiate the classmark enquiry if algorithm A5/1 is not available (information available in MS classmark 1 IE sent in the LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST). Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 0
Coding rules
619 / 1182
4.2.454 (Signalling Link Code) - (SLC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Signalling Link Code SLC
Signalling Link Code. Site (CAE) Reference BSC N7 ch Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 15 Default 0
OMC Changes: EML RNO Changes: BSS BSS parameters / A interface info Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
620 / 1182
4.2.455 (SMSCB_Features_Set) - (SMSCB_Features_set)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SMSCB_Features_Set SMSCB_Features_set
This parameter indicates which features are usable with the SMSCB product. 1: Features set 1, 2: Features set 2 Can be changed only when SMSCB_STATE = "inactive".If SMSCB_Features_set = FS1, then CBC_Window shall be equal to "1"- If SMSCB_Features_set = FS1, then SMSCB_Recovery shall be set to "No"- If SMSCB_Features_set = FS1, then for all the BSC cells Use_of_Extended_CBCH shall be set to "No"- If SMSCB_Features_set = FS1, then for all the BSC cells Nb_of_reserved_slots_for_basic_CBCH shall be set to "0" Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 2 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / Interworking / CBC interworking When migrating from FS1 to FS2,USE_OF_EXTENDED_CBCH shall be set to "Yes",CBC_WINDOW shall be set to 4. No No
621 / 1182
4.2.456 (SMSCB_Phase) - (SMSCB_Phase)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SMSCB_Phase SMSCB_Phase
This parameter indicates whether the feature operates in GSM Phase2 or Phase 2+ mode. 0: Phase 2, 1: Phase 2+ If SMSCB_FEATURES_SET="FS1", SMSCB_PHASE shall be set to "phase2"If SMSCB_FEATURES_SET="FS2", SMSCB_PHASE shall be set to "phase2+"SMSCB_Phase can be changed only when SMSCB_STATE="inactive" Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / Interworking / CBC interworking No No
622 / 1182
4.2.457 (SMSCB_Recovery) - (SMSCB_Recovery)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SMSCB_Recovery SMSCB_Recovery
This parameter indicates if the CBC accepts the recovery-indication in Restart-Indication message. 0: No, 1: Yes shall be set to "No" when SMSCB_FEATURE_SET="FS1"can be changed only when SMSCB_STATE="inactive" Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
623 / 1182
4.2.458 (SMSCB_State) - (SMSCB_State)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value SMSCB_State SMSCB_State
This flag indicates if the feature is activated or deactivated. 0: activated, 1: deactivated Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: Displayed(PRC&SC) RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / Interworking / CBC interworking No No
624 / 1182
4.2.459 (Strip_Octet_5_In_CM2) - (STRIP_O5_CM2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Strip_Octet_5_In_CM2 STRIP_O5_CM2
This flag controls the format of the "Classmark 2" IE sent to the MSC. 0: no modification on "Classmark2" IE, 1: octet 5 of "Classmark2" IE is stripped out EN_SEND_CM3 and STRIP_O5_CM2 shall not be both set to 1 at the same time. Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Mandatory rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / Interworking / MSC interworking Default value depends on MSC type.The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
625 / 1182
4.2.460 (SYNCHRONISED_HO) - (EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SYNCHRONISED_HO EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO
This flag enables/disables synchronous handovers between synchronized cells. 0: disabled, 1: enabled EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO shall be set to disabled when CELL_TYPE is equal to "Extended inner" or "Extended outer". Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
626 / 1182
4.2.461 (T(conn est)) - (T(conn est))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T(conn est) T(conn est)
SCCP timer supervising the reception of Connection Confirm message. step size = 0.5sec T(conn est) < T9105 Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 10 Maximum 127.5 Default 30
627 / 1182
4.2.462 (T(iar)) - (T(iar))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules T(iar) T(iar)
SCCP timer supervising the activity on SCCP connection. step size = 6sec Must be greater than T(ias) used by the MSCIt is recommended to configure T(iar) > (2 x T(ias) used by the MSC) + 1 min Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 402 Maximum 1530 Default 1260
628 / 1182
4.2.463 (T(ias)) - (T(ias))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules T(ias) T(ias)
SCCP timer supervising the sending of Inactivity Test message. step size = 6sec Must be less than T(iar) used by the MSCIt is recommended to configure T(ias) < (T(iar) used by the MSC - 1 min) / 2 Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 96 Maximum 450 Default 300
629 / 1182
4.2.464 (T(rel)) - (T(rel))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T(rel) T(rel)
SCCP timer supervising the reception of Release Complete message. step size = 0.5sec, coded from 16 to 255, 16 == 8 sec, 255 == 127.5 sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 8 Maximum 127.5 Default 15
Coding rules
630 / 1182
4.2.465 (T(sst)) - (T(sst))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T(sst) T(sst)
SCCP delay between sending of consecutive Subsystem Status Test messages. step size = 6sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 6 Maximum 1200 Default 30
631 / 1182
4.2.466 (T_BIND_CNF) - (T_BIND_CNF)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_BIND_CNF T_BIND_CNF
Maximum waiting time to get a response to a CBSE-BIND primitive. step size = 1 sec Can be changed only when SMSCB_State is disabled Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 10 Maximum 300 Default 30
632 / 1182
4.2.467 (T_BURST) - (T_BURST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_BURST T_BURST
Delay between consecutive bursts of BLOCK or UNBLOCK messages. step size =0.1 sec (31 x T_BURST) / B_NUM < T1_short Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 25.5 Default 2
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / Interworking / MSC interworking Default value depends on MSC type No No
633 / 1182
4.2.468 (T_HCP) - (T_HCP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_HCP T_HCP
Time during which PING_PONG_HCP is applied after handover. step size= 1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 240 Default 0
634 / 1182
4.2.469 (T_HO_REQD_LOST) - (T_HO_REQD_LOST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_HO_REQD_LOST T_HO_REQD_LOST
Supervision of the MSC response after sending of HANDOVER REQUIRED. step size = 1sec T_HO_REQD_LOST > T7 T_HO_REQD_LOST value shall be greater than the maximum time for external handover execution Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 6 Maximum 120 Default 30
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / HO/Reselection / HO Control Depends on MSC type No No
635 / 1182
4.2.470 (T_IA) - (T_IA)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_IA T_IA
Indicates the maximum time a CS IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT message remains in the AGCH queue. step size = 0.1sec T_IA<T3101 Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 5 Default 2.5
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: PAG Edit Cell / Cell Information / Timers No No
636 / 1182
4.2.471 (T_INHIBIT_CPT) - (T_INHIBIT_CPT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_INHIBIT_CPT T_INHIBIT_CPT
Time during which the HO Causes 14, 21, and 24 are inhibited. step size = 1 sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 240 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / HO Parameters / Hierarchical & Multiband HO Control T_INHIBIT_CPT = 0 inhibits the anti ping-pong function. No No
637 / 1182
4.2.472 (T_MS_CELL_REJ) - (T_MS_CELL_REJ)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_MS_CELL_REJ T_MS_CELL_REJ
Delay where the cells the MS failed to handover, cannot be selected as targets in subsequent handover attempts. step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 20 Default 5
638 / 1182
4.2.473 (T_PAG_CS) - (T_PAG_CS (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_PAG_CS T_PAG_CS (BSC)
This timer indicates the maximum time a CS PAGING message can remain in a Paging Group Queue. It includes the round-trip delay on A and A-bis or Gs/Gb and A-bis interface. step size = 0.1sec Equal to T_PAG_CS (MFS) T_PAG_CS<T3113 (MSC timer) Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 25.5 Default 3
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: PAG Edit Cell / Cell Information / Ctrl Channel No No
639 / 1182
4.2.474 (T_PAG_CS) - (T_PAG_CS (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_PAG_CS T_PAG_CS (MFS)
This timer indicates the maximum time a CS PAGING message can remain in a Paging Group Queue. It includes the round-trip delay on A and A-bis or Gs/Gb and A-bis interface. step size = 0.1sec Equal to T_PAG_CS (BSC) T_PAG_CS<T3113 (MSC timer) Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 25.5 Default 3
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: PAG Edit Cell / Cell Information / Ctrl Channel No No
640 / 1182
4.2.475 (T_QHO) - (T_qho)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_QHO T_qho
Maximum queuing time for Handover Requests. step size = 1sec T_INTRF_L3 > Max (T11, T_qho, T11_FORCED) Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 20 Default 3
641 / 1182
4.2.476 (T_SDCCH_PC) - (T_SDCCH_PC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_SDCCH_PC T_SDCCH_PC
Time during which power control on SDCCH is inhibited after completion of the Immediate Assignment procedure. step size = 1 (2 x Samfr) T_SDCCH_PC >= SDCCH_COUNTER Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit 2 x Samfr Minimum 0 Maximum 31 Default 5
642 / 1182
4.2.477 (T1) - (T1_short)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T1 T1_short
Supervision of the Blocking/Unblocking procedure. step size = 0.1sec T1_short > (31 x T_BURST) / B_NUM Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 10 Maximum 25.5 Default 16
643 / 1182
4.2.478 (T11) - (T11)

Maximum queuing time for Assignment Requests. step size = 1 s T_INTRF_L3 > Max (T11, T_qho, T11_FORCED) Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 19 Default 6
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / Procedures / General Timers and procedure Default value depends on MSC type No No
644 / 1182
4.2.479 (T11_FORCED) - (T11_FORCED)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T11_FORCED T11_FORCED
Maximum queuing time for Assignment Requests where queuing is not allowed by the MSC. step size = 0.1sec T_INTRF_L3 > Max (T11, T_qho, T11_FORCED) Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSS Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 19 Default 4
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / Procedures / General Timers and procedure Default value depends on MSC type No No
645 / 1182
4.2.480 (T13) - (T13)

Delay for acknowledgement of RESET received from MSC. step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 15
646 / 1182
4.2.481 (T17) - (T17)

Period of time where a new OVERLOAD that is received from the MSC, is not processed after reception of a processed OVERLOAD. step size: 0.1 sec T17 < T18_overload Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 30
647 / 1182
4.2.482 (T18) - (T18)

Delay between consecutive debarring actions after a BSS outage. Step size: 0.1 sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 50
648 / 1182
4.2.483 (T18_OVERLOAD) - (T18_Overload)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T18_OVERLOAD T18_Overload
Delay between the latest MSC OVERLOAD message or DTC internal overload detection and debarring action. Also delay between consecutive debarring actions for overload procedure and Telecom global reset procedure. step size: 0.1 sec T18_OVERLOAD > T17 Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 6553.5 Default 50
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No Barring No No
649 / 1182
4.2.484 (T19) - (T19)

Supervision of the Reset Circuit procedure. step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 25.5 Default 10
650 / 1182
4.2.485 (T20) - (T20)

Supervision of Circuit Group Blocking procedure. step size=0.1 sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 10 Maximum 25.5 Default 16
651 / 1182
4.2.486 (T200 (BSC)) - (T200 (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules T200 (BSC) T200 (BSC)
Supervision of acknowledgements. step size: 100ms; (1: 100ms, 2: 200ms, 3: 300ms, 4: 400ms, .. . , 10: 1000ms The recommended value for Abis via satellite is 1000 ms. Site (CAE) Timer BSC A-bis link Unit ms Minimum 300 Maximum 1000 Default 300
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No The value of T200 (BSC) is driven by the associated Abis connection type.It can be changed indirectly from the OMC (through the change of Abis connection type)The default value 300 ms corresponds to Abis terrestrial link. No No
652 / 1182
4.2.487 (T200_TF) - (T200_TF)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T200_TF T200_TF
Supervision of acknowledgements for FACCH (TCH FR associated) SAPI 0. Step size = 20 msec Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit ms Minimum 200 Maximum 5100 Default 200
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No Modification of the value of this parameter will trigger an automatic restart of all TREs of the cell, leading to a release of all ongoing calls.Values higher than 1000ms are not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent (very far to the 3GPP values):It will significantly increase the delay for retransmission of a message. For instance, if a HANDOVER COMMAND is sent to a given MS, but not received, the MS will have to wait longer to get the repeated HO CMD, which may lead to call drop in the meantime.Moreover, it can increase congestion in the BSS, as the call duration is artificially increased. No No
653 / 1182
4.2.488 (T200_TH) - (T200_TH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T200_TH T200_TH
Supervision of acknowledgements for FACCH (TCH HR associated) SAPI 0. step size = 20 msec. Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit ms Minimum 180 Maximum 5100 Default 180
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No Modification of the value of this parameter will trigger an automatic restart of all TREs of the cell, leading to a release of all ongoing calls.Values higher than 1000ms are not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent (very far to the 3GPP values):It will significantly increase the delay for retransmission of a message. For instance, if a HANDOVER COMMAND is sent to a given MS, but not received, the MS will have to wait longer to get the repeated HO CMD, which may lead to call drop in the meantime.Moreover, it can increase congestion in the BSS, as the call duration is artificially increased. No No
654 / 1182
4.2.489 (T3101) - (T3101)

Supervision of the Immediate Assignment procedure. step size = 0.1sec T3101 > 2s Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 25.5 Default 3
655 / 1182
4.2.490 (T3103) - (T3103)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules T3103 T3103
Supervision of the Internal Handover procedure. step size = 0.1sec T3103 > Ny1 x T3105_D. T3103 > Ny1 x T3105_F_FR. T3103 > Ny1 x T3105_F_HR.T3103 > T3106_D.T3103 > T3106_F Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 25.5 Default 16.5
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / HO/Reselection / HO Control No No
656 / 1182
4.2.491 (T3105D) - (T3105_D)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T3105D T3105_D
Delay between consecutive repetitions of PHYSICAL INFORMATION on SDCCH. T3105_D x Ny1 < T3103T3105_D x Ny1 < T9113 T3105_D x Ny1 > T3124T3105_D << T3124 (T3124 = 675 ms on SDCCH) Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit ms Minimum 200 Maximum 220 Default 200
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: SEL Edit Cell / Cell Information / Timers No No
657 / 1182
4.2.492 (T3105D_STOP) - (T3105_D_STOP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules T3105D_STOP T3105_D_STOP
Criterion to stop T3105_D timer. 0: stopped on reception of SABM frame, 1: stopped on reception of any correct L2 signalling frame Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
658 / 1182
4.2.493 (T3105F_FR) - (T3105_F_FR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T3105F_FR T3105_F_FR
Delay between consecutive repetitions of PHYSICAL INFORMATION on FACCH for FR channels. T3105_F_FR x Ny1 < T3103 T3105_F_FR x Ny1 < T9113 T3105_F_FR x Ny1 > T3124 T3105_F_FR << T3124 (T3124 = 320 ms on TCH) Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit ms Minimum 20 Maximum 250 Default 50
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: SEL Edit Cell / Cell Information / Timers No No
659 / 1182
4.2.494 (T3105F_HR) - (T3105_F_HR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T3105F_HR T3105_F_HR
Delay between consecutive repetitions of PHYSICAL INFORMATION on FACCH for HR channels. T3105_F_HR x Ny1 < T3103 T3105_F_HR x Ny1 < T9113 T3105_F_HR x Ny1 > T3124 T3105_F_HR << T3124 (T3124 = 320 ms on TCH) Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit ms Minimum 20 Maximum 250 Default 100
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: SEL Edit Cell / Cell Information / Timers No No
660 / 1182
4.2.495 (T3105F_STOP) - (T3105_F_STOP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules T3105F_STOP T3105_F_STOP
Criterion to stop T3105_F timer. 0: stopped on reception of SABM frame, 1: stopped on reception of any correct L2 signalling frame or of a correct traffic frame Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
661 / 1182
4.2.496 (T3106D) - (T3106_D)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T3106D T3106_D
This parameter is used for two different things:1) Supervision of the reception of valid frame from the MS on the target cell in case of SDCCH synchronous handover. 2) In parallel, the LSB, used in combinations with the LSB of T3106_F, allow to perform the fine BTS power tuning (per step of 0,1dB). coded on 16 bits: - The 16 bits are used to define T3106_D valueThe 3 LSB are also used, in combinations with the 2 LSB of T3106_F, to perform the fine BTS power tuning (per step of 0,1dB), following the table below:T3106_D LSB: T3106_F LSB: Power attenuation:000 00 0dB000 01 0.1dB000 10 0.2dB000 11 0.3dB001 00 0,4dB001 01 0.5dB001 10 0.6dB001 11 0.7dB010 00 0,8dB010 01 0.9dB010 10 1,0dB010 11 1,1dB011 00 1,2dB011 01 1,3dB011 10 1,4dB011 11 1,5dB1xx 00 1,6dB1xx 01 1,7dB1xx 10 1,8dB1xx 11 1,9dBNote: LSB = Less Significant Bits T3106_D < T3103T3106_D < T9113 Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit ms Minimum 1100 Maximum 1500 Default 1200
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: SEL Edit Cell / Cell Information / Timers The applied power attenuation can vary up to +/- 0,15db around the specified value.Note: on OMC screen, this tuning is also possible with the new parameter PWR_ADJUSTEMENT. No No
662 / 1182
4.2.497 (T3106D_STOP) - (T3106_D_STOP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules T3106D_STOP T3106_D_STOP
Criterion to stop T3106_D timer. 0: stopped on reception of SABM frame, 1: stopped on reception of any correct L2 signalling frame Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
663 / 1182
4.2.498 (T3106F) - (T3106_F)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T3106F T3106_F
This parameter is used for two different things:1) Supervision of the reception of valid frame from the MS on the target cell in case of TCH synchronous handover.2) In parallel, the LSB, used in combinations with the LSB of T3106_D, allow to perform the fine BTS power tuning (per step of 0,1dB). Coded on 16 bits:- The 16 bits are used to define T3106_F value- The 2 LSB are also used, in combinations with the 3 LSB of T3106_D, to perform the fine BTS power tuning (per step of 0,1dB), following the table below:T3106_D LSB: T3106_F LSB: Power attenuation:000 00 0dB000 01 0.1dB000 10 0.2dB000 11 0.3dB001 00 0,4dB001 01 0.5dB001 10 0.6dB001 11 0.7dB010 00 0,8dB010 01 0.9dB010 10 1,0dB010 11 1,1dB011 00 1,2dB011 01 1,3dB011 10 1,4dB011 11 1,5dB1xx 00 1,6dB1xx 01 1,7dB1xx 10 1,8dB1xx 11 1,9dBNote: LSB = Less Significant Bits T3106_F < T3103T3106_F < T9113 Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit ms Minimum 500 Maximum 1000 Default 1000
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: SEL Edit Cell / Cell Information / Timers The applied power attenuation can vary up to +/- 0,15db around the specified value.Note: on OMC screen, this tuning is also possible with the new parameter PWR_ADJUSTEMENT. No No
664 / 1182
4.2.499 (T3106F_STOP) - (T3106_F_STOP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules T3106F_STOP T3106_F_STOP
Criterion to stop T3106_F timer. 0: stopped on reception of SABM frame, 1: stopped on reception of any correct L2 signalling frame or of a correct traffic frame Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
665 / 1182
4.2.500 (T3107) - (T3107)

Supervision of the Assignment procedure. step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 25.5 Default 14
666 / 1182
4.2.501 (T3109) - (T3109)

Supervision of the Channel Release procedure. step size = 0.1sec T3109 > RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT + 1s Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 35 Default 12
667 / 1182
4.2.502 (T3111) - (T3111)

Delay of the RF Channel Release procedure. step size = 0.1sec T3111 > 2 x T200_D. T3111 > 2 x T200_TH. T3111 = T3110 (MS) Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 0.5
668 / 1182
4.2.503 (T3212) - (T3212 (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T3212 T3212 (BSC)
This timer indicates to the MS the delay between two consecutive Periodic Location Update procedures. 0: no periodic location update Equal to T3212 (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit 6 mn Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 30
669 / 1182
4.2.504 (T4) - (T4)

Supervision of RESET message sent to the MSC. step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 2 Maximum 6553.5 Default 3
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / Interworking / MSC interworking T4 shall be set greater than T2 (timer in MSC). No No
670 / 1182
4.2.505 (T7) - (T7)

Timer controlling the repetition of HANDOVER REQUIRED. step size = 0.1sec T7 < T_HO_REQD_LOST Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 20 Default 5
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / HO/Reselection / Handover Control Default value depends on MSC type No No
671 / 1182
4.2.506 (T8) - (T8)

Supervision of the External Handover procedure in the serving BSC. step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 25.5 Default 14
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / HO/Reselection / Handover Control No No
672 / 1182
4.2.507 (T9104) - (T9104)

Supervision of the call clearing procedure when triggered by the BSC. step size = 0.1sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 25.5 Default 2
673 / 1182
4.2.508 (T9105) - (T9105)

Supervision of the SCCP Connection procedure. step size = 0.1sec T9105 > T(conn est) T9105 > max T3210. T9105 > max T3220. T9105 > max T3230 Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 11 Maximum 6553,5 Default 31
674 / 1182
4.2.509 (T9112) - (T9112)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules T9112 T9112
Supervision of the channel modification in the MS. step size = 0.1sec T9112 >= 15s. T9112 <= T9114. T9112 is inferior to the MSC timer supervising the Modify procedure. Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 6553.5 Default 15
675 / 1182
4.2.510 (T9113) - (T9113)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules T9113 T9113
Supervision of the External Handover procedure in the target BSC. step size = 0.1sec T9113 > T3105_D x Ny1. T9113 > T3105_F x Ny1. T9113 > T3106_D. T9113 > T3106_F Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 25.5 Default 20
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / HO/Reselection / Handover Control No No
676 / 1182
4.2.511 (TA_STAT) - (TA_STAT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TA_STAT TA_STAT
Threshold on timing advance to define the cell limit used for Radio Measurements Statistics. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit bper Minimum 0 Maximum 63 Default 8
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / RMS & MAFA 1 bper corresponds to about 550m No No
677 / 1182
4.2.512 (TCH load threshold for Auto AC) - (N_threshold)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TCH load threshold for Auto AC N_threshold
Threshold on busy TCH timeslots percentage for automatic barring of access classes. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 100
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: RRM Edit Cell / Cell Information / RACH Ctrl No No
678 / 1182
4.2.513 (TEMPORARY_OFFSET) - (TEMPORARY_OFFSET)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value TEMPORARY_OFFSET TEMPORARY_OFFSET
Offset applied to C2 criterion for the duration of PENALTY_TIME. step size = 10dB. 0: 0dB, 1:10dB, 6: 60dB, 7: infinity Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum infinity Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: SEL Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Selection If the VGCS is licensed, the parameter is modifiable only via the provisioning context of the OMC. Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 0 dB (0) 0 dB (0) 0 dB (0) 0 dB (0) infinity (7) infinity (7) 0 dB (0) 0 dB (0)
Cell Type Dependent
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
679 / 1182
4.2.514 (TFO HR when loaded) - (FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TFO HR when loaded FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED
Flag to control the establishment of TFO in Half Rate, when the cell is loaded and the call is currently allocated with an Half Rate codec type (HR or AMR-NB HR). 0 : "TFO with Half Rate codec not forced", if for load reasons the call is established with an Half Rate codec, the BSC will propose to establish TFO with all the supported codec types, including the Full Rate ones (except the FR AMR-WB codec)1 : "TFO with Half Rate codec only", if for load reasons the call is established with an Half Rate codec, it will stay in Half Rate even in case of TFO mismatch situation (if TFO is not possible in Half Rate on remote side, TFO is not established).2 : "TFO with Half Rate codec preferred", if for load reasons the call is established with an Half Rate codec, the BSC will propose in a first step to establish TFO providing only the supported Half Rate codecs only. If TFO is not possible in Half Rate on remote side, the BSC will try to establish TFO with all the supported codec types, including the Full Rate ones (except the FR AMR-WB codec), provided that EN_TFO_MATCH=1. If FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED=2, EN_TFO_MATCH should be set to 1 Site (CAE) Enumerated BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 0
Coding rules
680 / 1182
4.2.515 (THR_CCCH_LOAD) - (THR_CCCH_LOAD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THR_CCCH_LOAD THR_CCCH_LOAD
Threshold triggering the sending of CCCH LOAD INDICATION message. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 100 Maximum 3000 Default 500
681 / 1182
4.2.516 (THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1) - (THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1 THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1
Lower load threshold for allocation policy definition in dual rate cell. step size = 10% THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1 <= THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 & THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1>=THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 When choosing the THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1 value, it is recommanded to check that the number of DR TCH in the cell is greater than (100 - THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1) /100*total number of TCH in the cell. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 100
Recommended rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / Dedicated Radio Resources 2/3 No
682 / 1182
4.2.517 (THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3) - (THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3
Lower load threshold for allocation policy of AMR-NB HR in a dual rate cell supporting AMR-NB HR. Step size = 10% THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 <= THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 & THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3<=THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1 When choosing the THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 value, it is recommended to check that the number of DR TCH in the cell is greater than (100 - THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3) /100*total number of TCH in the cell. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 100
Recommended rules
683 / 1182
4.2.518 (THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1) - (THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1
Higher load threshold for allocation policy definition in dual rate cell. Step size = 10% THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 >= THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1 & THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1>=THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 When choosing the THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 value, it is recommanded to check that the number of DR TCH in the cell is greater than (100 - THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1) /100*total number of TCH in the cell. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 100
Recommended rules
684 / 1182
4.2.519 (THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3) - (THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3
Higher load threshold for allocation policy of AMR-NB HR in a dual rate cell supporting AMR-NB HR. Step size = 10% THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 >= THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 & THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3<=THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 When choosing the THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 value, it is recommended to check that the number of DR TCH in the cell is greater than (100 - THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3) /100*total number of TCH in the cell. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 100
Recommended rules
685 / 1182
4.2.520 (THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH) - (THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH
Threshold for channel adaptation under high load. step size = 0.1 (0 coded as 0, 0.1 coded as 1 7 coded as 70) THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH >= THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
686 / 1182
4.2.521 (THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL) - (THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL
Threshold for channel adaptation under normal load. step size = 0.1 (0 coded as 0, 0.1 coded as 1 7 coded as 70) THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH >= THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
687 / 1182
4.2.522 (TRAFFIC_EV_PERIOD) - (TRAFFIC_EV_PERIOD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TRAFFIC_EV_PERIOD TRAFFIC_EV_PERIOD
Periodicity of traffic load update in resource allocation algorithms = N_TRAFFIC_LOAD x A_TRAFFIC_LOAD x TCH_INFO_PERIOD. Site (CAE) Timer OMC cell Unit sec Minimum 2 Maximum 3264 Default 120
OMC Changes: Displayed(PRC&SC) RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / Dedicated Radio Resources 1/3 The given default value corresponds to the value calculated by the OMC, based on the values of N_TRAFFIC_LOAD (which depends on the nb of TRX in the cell, not reflected by DLS default value), A_TRAFFIC_LOAD (which depends on the nb of TRX in the cell, not reflected by DLS default value), TCH_INFO_PERIOD. No No
688 / 1182
4.2.523 (TRX zone) - (ZONE_TYPE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TRX zone ZONE_TYPE
Determines which TRX(s) belong to the inner zone and which TRX(s) belong to the outer zone of a concentric cell. Coded as a 16 bits bitmap. Each bit specifies the zone the corresponding TRX (if declared) belongs to. 0: Outer zone, 1: Inner zone. Site (CAE) List of numbers BSC TRX Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 65535 Default 0
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Radio Channel Config. / TRX Configuration Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A # # N/A N/A N/A N/A
Cell Type Dependent
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
689 / 1182
4.2.524 (TSC) - (TSC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TSC TSC
Training Sequence Code for any (packet) channel except for BCCH, CCCH and CBCH coded over 3 bits Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Description Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes.Two training sequence codes are used in Alcatel BSS:*) TSC for BCCH, CCCH and CBCH: the BSS sets the TSC to the O&M parameter BCC. This behaviour is compliant to 3GPP TS 05.02 which states that for BCCH and CCCH, the TSC must be equal to the BCC. In Alcatel BSS, for CBCH, the TSC is also set to BCC.**) TSC for any other (packet) channel: the BSS sets the TSC to the O&M parameter TSC. No No
690 / 1182
4.2.525 (TX_INTEGER) - (Tx_integer (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TX_INTEGER Tx_integer (BSC)
Number of RACH timeslots that spread transmission of CHANNEL REQUEST. Possible values are:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 32, 50 respectively binary coded from 0000 to 1111 Equal to Tx_integer (MFS) When the GPRS is supported through Abis or Ater terrestrial links, it is recommended to set:TX_INTEGER = 32 if the CCCH is not combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF = 0TX_INTEGER = 12 if the CCCH is combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF = 1.When the GPRS is supported through Abis or Ater satellite links, it is recommended to set:TX_INTEGER = 32 whatever the configuration of the CCCH.The number of slots belonging to the MSs RACH between 2 successive Channel Request messages is a random value drawn randomly for each new retransmission with uniform distribution in the set (S, S+1, ...,S+T-1). With T = Tx_Integer and S depending on the CCCH configuration as shown below:1) for non combined CCCH:Tx_Integer = 3, 8, 14, 50 > S = 55 RACH frames (i.e. 253.8 ms)- Tx_Integer = 4, 9, 16 > S = 76 RACH frames (i.e. 349.6 ms)- Tx_Integer = 5, 10, 20 > S = 109 RACH frames (i.e. 501.4 ms)- Tx_Integer = 6, 11, 25 > S = 163 RACH frames (i.e. 749.8 ms)Tx_Integer = 7, 12, 32 > S = 217 RACH frames (i.e. 998.2 ms)2) for combined CCCH:- Tx_Integer = 3, 8, 14, 50 > S = 41 RACH frames (i.e. 357.5 ms)- Tx_Integer = 4, 9, 16 > S = 52 RACH frames (i.e. 453.4 ms)- Tx_Integer = 5, 10, 20 > S = 58 RACH frames (i.e. 505.7 ms)- Tx_Integer = 6, 11, 25 > S = 86 RACH frames (i.e. 749.9 ms)- Tx_Integer = 7, 12, 32 > S = 115 RACH frames (i.e. 1002.8 ms)Note: - In the non-combined CCCH configuration, there are 51 RACH frames per 51-multiframe- In the combined CCCH configuration, there are 27 RACH frames per 51-multiframe. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 3 Maximum 50 Default 32
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: PAG Edit Cell / Cell Information / RACH Ctrl
691 / 1182
External Comment
When EN_GPRS=1, it is recommended to set: TX_INTEGER = 32 if the CCCH is not combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF = 0TX_INTEGER = 12 if the CCCH is combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF = 1 No No
692 / 1182
4.2.526 (U_RXLEV_DL_MCHO) - (U_RXLEV_DL_MCHO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value U_RXLEV_DL_MCHO U_RXLEV_DL_MCHO
Downlink level threshold for Microcell to Macrocell handover. coded over 6 bits :0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -47
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO Parameters / Lower Layer HO Control Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A N/A N/A -91 dBm (19) N/A N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
693 / 1182
4.2.527 (U_RXLEV_DL_P) - (U_RXLEV_DL_P)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value U_RXLEV_DL_P U_RXLEV_DL_P
Upper downlink level threshold for power control. coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm U_RXLEV_DL_P > L_RXLEV_DL_P U_RXLEV_DL_P >= L_RXLEV_DL_P + 10 dB Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -75
694 / 1182
4.2.528 (U_RXLEV_UL_MCHO) - (U_RXLEV_UL_MCHO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value U_RXLEV_UL_MCHO U_RXLEV_UL_MCHO
Uplink level threshold for Microcell to Macrocell handover. coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -47
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO Parameters / Lower Layer HO Control Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A N/A N/A -98 dBm (12) N/A N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
695 / 1182
4.2.529 (U_RXLEV_UL_P) - (U_RXLEV_UL_P)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value U_RXLEV_UL_P U_RXLEV_UL_P
Upper uplink level threshold for power control. coded over 6 bits :0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm U_RXLEV_UL_P > L_RXLEV_UL_P U_RXLEV_UL_P >= L_RXLEV_UL_P + 10 dB Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -75
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
696 / 1182
4.2.530 (U_RXQUAL_DL_P) - (U_RXQUAL_DL_P)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value U_RXQUAL_DL_P U_RXQUAL_DL_P
Upper downlink quality threshold for power control. step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 70==7) U_RXQUAL_DL_P < L_RXQUAL_DL_P Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO & PC thresholds / Quality Highest value is the worst quality No No
697 / 1182
4.2.531 (U_RXQUAL_UL_P) - (U_RXQUAL_UL_P)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value U_RXQUAL_UL_P U_RXQUAL_UL_P
Upper uplink quality threshold for power control. step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 70==7) U_RXQUAL_UL_P < L_RXQUAL_UL_P Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO & PC thresholds / Quality Highest value is the worst quality No No
698 / 1182
4.2.532 (UPPER_TIMING_ADVANCE) - (U_TIME_ADVANCE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value UPPER_TIMING_ADVANCE U_TIME_ADVANCE
Timing Advance threshold for distance handover. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit bper Minimum 0 Maximum 63 Default 63
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO & PC thresholds / Distance One unit corresponds to a distance of about 550m Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 35 km (63) 35 km (63) 35 km (63) 35 km (63) 1 km (2) 35 km (63) 34.5 km (62) 35 km (63)
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
699 / 1182
4.2.533 (VQ_AVERAGE) - (VQ_AVERAGE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition VQ_AVERAGE VQ_AVERAGE
Average window size on measurements to obtain samples for Voice Quality statistics. step size = 1 Samfr Site (CAE) Number BSC BSC Unit Samfr Minimum 0 Maximum 128 Default 6
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: BSS Edit RMS Template / Template X/ Description Up to 16 instances of this parameter with different values can be defined. This allows to define "RMS tempates" (see parameter RMS_template). No No
700 / 1182
4.2.534 (VQ_BAD_RXFER) - (VQ_BAD_RXFER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition VQ_BAD_RXFER VQ_BAD_RXFER
Radio bad FER threshold to specify bad quality samples for Voice Quality statistics. coded 0 to 200, step size=0.1% (0= 0%, 1 = 0.1 %, , 200 = 20%) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 20 Default 3
701 / 1182
4.2.535 (VQ_FER_THRESHOLD) - (VQ_FER_THRESHOLD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition VQ_FER_THRESHOLD VQ_FER_THRESHOLD
Radio FER threshold to detect calls with bad speech quality for Voice Quality statistics. step size = 1% Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 30
702 / 1182
4.2.536 (VQ_GOOD_RXFER) - (VQ_GOOD_RXFER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition VQ_GOOD_RXFER VQ_GOOD_RXFER
Radio good FER threshold to specify bad quality samples for Voice Quality statistics. coded 0 to 200, step size=0.1% (0= 0%, 1 = 0.1 %, , 200 = 20%) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 20 Default 1
703 / 1182
4.2.537 (VQ_INTF_THRESHOLD) - (VQ_INTF_THRESHOLD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition VQ_INTF_THRESHOLD VQ_INTF_THRESHOLD
Radio interference threshold to detect noisy calls for Voice Quality statistics. step size = 1% Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 30
704 / 1182
4.2.538 (VQ_RXLEV) - (VQ_RXLEV)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition VQ_RXLEV VQ_RXLEV
Radio level threshold to specify bad quality samples for Voice Quality statistics. 0 = -110 dBm, 1 = -109 dBm, 62 = -48 dBm, 63 = -47 dBm, step = 1dBm Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -95
Coding rules
705 / 1182
4.2.539 (VQ_RXQUAL) - (VQ_RXQUAL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition VQ_RXQUAL VQ_RXQUAL
Radio quality threshold to specify bad quality samples for Voice Quality statistics. step size=0.1 (1==0.1 70==7) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4
706 / 1182
4.2.540 (VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFER) - (VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFER VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFER
Radio quality threshold to specify correlation between quality samples for Voice Quality statistics. step size=0.1 (1==0.1 70==7) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4
707 / 1182
4.2.541 (W_LEV_HO) - (W_LEV_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition W_LEV_HO W_LEV_HO
Weight applicable to level samples for handover when no DTX is applied. A_LEV_HO + W_LEV_HO < 32 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 1
708 / 1182
4.2.542 (W_LEV_MCHO) - (W_LEV_MCHO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition W_LEV_MCHO W_LEV_MCHO
Weight applicable to level samples for microcell handover when no DTX is applied. A_LEV_MCHO + W_LEV_MCHO < 16 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / HO Parameters / Lower Layer HO Control Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 N/A N/A N/A
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
709 / 1182
4.2.543 (W_LEV_PC) - (W_LEV_PC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition W_LEV_PC W_LEV_PC
Weight applicable to level samples for power control when no DTX is applied. A_LEV_PC + W_LEV_PC < 32 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 1
710 / 1182
4.2.544 (W_PBGT_HO) - (W_PBGT_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition W_PBGT_HO W_PBGT_HO
Weight applicable to level samples for power budget when no DTX is applied. A_PBGT_HO + W_PBGT_HO < 32 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 1
711 / 1182
4.2.545 (W_QUAL_CA) - (W_QUAL_CA)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value W_QUAL_CA W_QUAL_CA
Averaging weight applicable for full quality (Channel adaptation). Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / HO & PC thresholds / Averaging PC-HO Window Size No No
712 / 1182
4.2.546 (W_QUAL_HO) - (W_QUAL_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition W_QUAL_HO W_QUAL_HO
Weight applicable to quality samples for handover when no DTX is applied. A_QUAL_HO + W_QUAL_HO < 32 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 1
713 / 1182
4.2.547 (W_QUAL_PC) - (W_QUAL_PC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition W_QUAL_PC W_QUAL_PC
Weight applicable to quality samples for power control when no DTX is applied. A_QUAL_PC + W_QUAL_PC < 32 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 1
714 / 1182
4.2.548 (WHITE_BOOK_INTERWORKING) - (MTP3_WB_INTERWORKING)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition WHITE_BOOK_INTERWORKING MTP3_WB_INTERWORKING
This flag indicates if the BSC sends a Q.704 TRA message upon first reception of SLTA from the MSC. 0 : TRA not sent upon first SLTA reception, 1 : TRA sent upon first SLTA reception Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / Interworking / MSC interworking This flag is set to 1 for interworking with a "White Book" MSC. It is set to 0 for interworking with a "Blue Book" MSC. No No
715 / 1182
4.2.549 (WI_CR) - (WI_CR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition WI_CR WI_CR
Value of Wait Indication for Establishment cause = "Call Re-establishment". 0: 0s, 1: 1s, ..., 254: 254s, 255: no IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT message is sent. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 3
Coding rules
716 / 1182
4.2.550 (WI_EC) - (WI_EC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules WI_EC WI_EC
Value of Wait Indication for Establishment cause = "Emergency call". 0: 0s, 1: 1s, ..., 254: 254s, 255: no IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT message is sent. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 2
717 / 1182
4.2.551 (WI_OC) - (WI_OC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules WI_OC WI_OC
Value of Wait Indication for Establishment cause = "Originating call". 0: 0s, 1: 1s, ..., 254: 254s, 255: no IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT message is sent. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 5
718 / 1182
4.2.552 (WI_OP) - (WI_OP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition WI_OP WI_OP
Value of Wait Indication for Establishment cause = "Location updating" or "Other procedures which can be completed with an SDCCH". 0: 0s, 1: 1s, ..., 254: 254s, 255: no IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT message is sent. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 5
Coding rules
719 / 1182
4.2.553 (ZONE_HO_HYST_DL) - (ZONE_HO_HYST_DL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition ZONE_HO_HYST_DL ZONE_HO_HYST_DL
Hysteresis applied to RXLEV_DL_ZONE for outer to inner zone handover. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -40 Maximum 40 Default 6
720 / 1182
4.2.554 (ZONE_HO_HYST_UL) - (ZONE_HO_HYST_UL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition ZONE_HO_HYST_UL ZONE_HO_HYST_UL
Hysteresis applied to RXLEV_UL_ZONE for outer to inner zone handover. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -40 Maximum 40 Default 6
721 / 1182
4.3 System (CST)

4.3.1 (Interference band 5 upper limit) - (INTFBD5)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Interference band 5 upper limit INTFBD5
Upper limit of interference band 5. Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm System (CST) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -47
OMC Changes: displayed RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / Dedicated Radio Resources 1/3 No No
722 / 1182
4.3.2 (SMSCB_Mode) - (SMSCB_Mode)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SMSCB_Mode SMSCB_Mode
This parameter enables to select the mode of operation, either OMC-R or CBC. 0: OMC-R, 1: CBC System (CST) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
723 / 1182
724 / 1182
5 GPRS Telecom Parameters
725 / 1182
5.1 Network (CDE)

5.1.1 (Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data) (Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data
Threshold (percentage of used Ater nibbles, in a GPU) above which the Ater usage is optimized for "short data" MS transfers. If Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data is not set to 100% (100% meaning that there is no Ater usage optimization for "short data" MS transfers), then it is recommended to set it to 30%, except if the drawbacks of another value (as explained in the external comments) are deemed acceptable.For all the Ater_Usage_Threshold values being defined for the BSSs handled by the MFS, Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data <= Ater_Usage_Threshold 30%. Indeed, for consistency reasons, "short data" MS transfer optimizations should come prior to high Ater usage optimizations.If it is seen as an important goal to save Ater resources in the GPU, a value of Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data < 100% is coherent with a low value of the T_GCH_INACTIVITY and T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timers. Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 100
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Setting Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data to 100% means that there is no Ater usage optimization for "short data" MS transfers.If Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data is not set to 100%:- the higher the Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data value, the fewer ping time degradations and data transfer delays will be experienced,- the lower the Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data value, the more accurate the Ater consumption in the GPU will be (i.e. potential wastes of Ater resources will be minimized in the GPU).
726 / 1182
No No
727 / 1182
5.1.2 (BSSGP_T3) - (bssgp_T3)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BSSGP_T3 bssgp_T3
Timer used by MFS to wait for Suspend acknowledgement from SGSN. 1:0,1 ; 2: 0,2 ; ; 10: 1 ; ; 100: 10 Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 10 Default 0.6
728 / 1182
5.1.3 (BSSGP_T4) - (bssgp_T4)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BSSGP_T4 bssgp_T4
Timer used by MFS to wait for Resume acknowledgement from SGSN. 1:0,1 ; 2: 0,2 ; ; 10: 1 ; ; 100: 10 BSSGP_T4 < T_GPRS_Resume/ (Resume_retries+1)) Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 10 Default 0.6
729 / 1182
5.1.4 (EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING) (EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING
This flag enables / disables autonomous rerouting of DL LLC PDUs. 0 : disabled, 1 : enabled It is recommended not to activate simultaneously extended UL TBF feature (EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF) and the DL PDU rerouting feature (EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING) Network (CDE) Flag MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
730 / 1182
5.1.5 (EN_CBL) - (EN_CBL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_CBL EN_CBL
This flag enables / disables CBL feature (Leaky Bucket Synchronisation) 0 : disabled, 1 : enabled Network (CDE) Flag MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
731 / 1182
5.1.6 (FLOW_DIM_Safety_BVC) - (FLOW_DIM_Safety_BVC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition FLOW_DIM_Safety_BVC FLOW_DIM_Safety_BVC
Safety factor to size BVC_Bucket_Size parameter, for downlink flow control, on Gb interface. step size = 0.1 Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 100 Default 20
732 / 1182
5.1.7 (FLOW_DIM_Safety_MS) - (FLOW_DIM_Safety_MS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition FLOW_DIM_Safety_MS FLOW_DIM_Safety_MS
Safety factor to size default MS_Bucket_Size parameter, for downlink flow control, on Gb interface. step size = 0.1 FLOW_DIM_Safety_MS should be set to a value corresponding to the maximum multi-slot class of the MS present on the network Network (CDE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 5
733 / 1182
5.1.8 (INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_EGPRS) (INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_EGPRS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_EGPRS INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_EGPRS
Number of PDCHs on which MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL and MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL are targeted when establishing GCHs for an EGPRS TBF associated to a "short data" MS transfer. Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 8 Default 3
734 / 1182
5.1.9 (INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_GPRS) (INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_GPRS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_GPRS INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_GPRS
Number of PDCHs on which MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL and MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL are targeted when establishing GCHs for a GPRS TBF associated to a "short data" MS transfer. Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 8 Default 2
735 / 1182
5.1.10 (K_GSL (BSC)) - (K_GSL (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules K_GSL (BSC) K_GSL (BSC)
Maximum number of outstanding I frames on a GSL link. It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links:K_GSL = 7 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater terrestrial links in all BSC of the MFS.- K_GSL = 16 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links in at least one BSC of the MFS. Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 16 Default 7
736 / 1182
5.1.11 (K_GSL (MFS)) - (K_GSL (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules K_GSL (MFS) K_GSL (MFS)
Maximum number of outstanding I frames on a GSL link. It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links:K_GSL = 7 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater terrestrial links in all BSC of the MFS.- K_GSL = 16 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links in at least one BSC of the MFS. Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 32 Default 7
737 / 1182
5.1.12 (MAX_BLER) - (MAX_BLER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value MAX_BLER MAX_BLER
Maximum mean BLER value that a TBF can possibly reach step size = 0,05 Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 0.95 Default 0.35
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: The MAX_BLER value is used by RRM to evaluate the minimum number of GCHs necessary to support RT traffic on a TRX. No No
738 / 1182
5.1.13 (MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL) (MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL
Maximum Modulation and Coding Scheme used for the DL EGPRS TBFs associated to a "short data" MS transfer. 0: MCS-1; 1: MCS-2; 2: MCS-3; 3: MCS-4;4: MCS-5; 5: MCS-6;6: MCS-7; 7: MCS-8;8: MCS-9. For consistency reasons, MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL shall NOT be higher than any of the MAX_EGPRS_MCS values defined in the cells of the MFS.In order to avoid establishing too many GCHs during the "short data" MS transfer phases, it is recommended that MAX [MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL, MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL] <= MIN [TBF_DL_INIT_MCS, TBF_UL_INIT_MCS] in all the cells of the MFS. This rule also tends to reduce the TBF blocking rate in the MFS (by recommending low values for MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL/UL) and to simplify the MFS configuration. Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 9 Default 1
Coding rules
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Setting this parameter to MCS-2 might introduce some problems (because a MCS-2 block consumes exactly 1.00 GCH and might therefore block some of the MFS-BTS signalling messages to be sent in the M-EGCH link in DL). No No
739 / 1182
5.1.14 (MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL) (MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL
Maximum Modulation and Coding Scheme used for the UL EGPRS TBFs associated to a "short data" MS transfer. 0: MCS-1; 1: MCS-2; 2: MCS-3; 3: MCS-4;4: MCS-5; 5: MCS-6;6: MCS-7; 7: MCS-8;8: MCS-9. For consistency reasons, MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL shall NOT be higher than any of the MAX_EGPRS_MCS values defined in the cells of the MFS.In order to avoid establishing too many GCHs during the "short data" MS transfer phases, it is recommended that MAX [MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL, MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL] <= MIN [TBF_DL_INIT_MCS, TBF_UL_INIT_MCS] in all the cells of the MFS. This rule also tends to reduce the TBF blocking rate in the MFS (by recommending low values for MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL/UL) and to simplify the MFS configuration. Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 9 Default 2
Coding rules
740 / 1182
5.1.15 (MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL) (MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL
Maximum coding scheme used for the DL GPRS TBFs associated to a "short data" MS transfer. 0 : CS-1;1 : CS-2; 2 : CS-3; 3 : CS-4. For consistency reasons, MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL shall NOT be higher than any of the MAX_GPRS_CS values defined in the cells of the MFS.In order to avoid establishing too many GCHs during the "short data" MS transfer phases, it is recommended that MAX [MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL, MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL] <= MIN [TBF_DL_INIT_CS, TBF_UL_INIT_CS] in all the cells of the MFS. This rule also tends to reduce the TBF blocking rate in the MFS (by recommending low values for MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL/UL) and to simplify the MFS configuration. Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 4 Default 1
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Setting this parameter to CS-2 might introduce some problems (because a CS-2 block consumes exactly 1.00 GCH and might therefore block some of the MFS-BTS signalling messages to be sent in the M-EGCH link in DL). No No
741 / 1182
5.1.16 (MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL) (MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL
Maximum coding scheme used for the UL GPRS TBFs associated to a "short data" MS transfer. 0 : CS-1;1 : CS-2; 2 : CS-3; 3 : CS-4. For consistency reasons, MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL shall NOT be higher than any of the MAX_GPRS_CS values defined in the cells of the MFS.In order to avoid establishing too many GCHs during the "short data" MS transfer phases, it is recommended that MAX [MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL, MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL] <= MIN [TBF_DL_INIT_CS, TBF_UL_INIT_CS] in all the cells of the MFS. This rule also tends to reduce the TBF blocking rate in the MFS (by recommending low values for MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL/UL) and to simplify the MFS configuration. Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 4 Default 2
742 / 1182
5.1.17 (N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS) - (N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS
Number of bytes below which an MS transfer is considered to be "short data". step size = 1 byte N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS <= N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit byte Minimum 20 Maximum 10000 Default 150
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: An MS transfer is considered to be "short data" as long as less than N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS bytes have been transferred in both directions (since the TBF establishment(s)). Else, if more than N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS bytes have been transferred in at least one direction, the MS transfer is considered to be "long data". No No
743 / 1182
5.1.18 (N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC) (N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC
Number of bytes above which a transition from "short data" to "long data" MS transfer shall be periodically reattempted (only useful in the rare cases where such a transition previously failed). step size = 100 bytes N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS <= N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit byte Minimum 100 Maximum 100000 Default 10000
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: A transition from "short data" to "long data" MS transfer can only fail in the rare cases where there is a too high number of TBFs on the TRX / in some very specific reallocation failure scenarios.A low value of N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC should be avoided because it will tend to increase the CPU load of the MFS for a defence case which should be rare (if TRX and Abis/Ater transmission resources are properly dimensioned). No No
744 / 1182
5.1.19 (N391) - (N391)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N391 N391
Number of polling cycles before Frame Relay " full status enquiry" (see ITU Q.933 Annex A, A.7). Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 6
745 / 1182
5.1.20 (N392) - (N392)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value N392 N392
Error threshold (Frame Relay, see Q.933, Annex A). N392*T391 is the value of the link failure detection time Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 3
746 / 1182
5.1.21 (N393) - (N393)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value N393 N393
Monitored error counts (Frame Relay, see ITU Q.933 Annex A, A.7). Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 4
747 / 1182
5.1.22 (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC) (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC
In a G2 BSC, Xoff threshold (in terms of number of BSCGP messages queued in the "GSL output buffer") above which channel requests are no longer allowed to be sent on this GSL link.The interest of those Xon/Xoff thresholds is to avoid "GSL output buffer" overflow. NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC < NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 5 Maximum 105 Default 84
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: - Applicable only to TDM mode.- A high value will tend to decrease the efficiency of the BSC defence to avoid "GSL output buffer" overflow.A low value can lead to discard too many PS channel requests (QoS degradation). No No
748 / 1182
5.1.23 (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC) (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC
In a MX BSC, Xoff threshold (in terms of number of BSCGP messages queued in the "GSL output buffer") above which channel requests are no longer allowed to be sent on this GSL link.The interest of those Xon/Xoff thresholds is to avoid "GSL output buffer" overflow. NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC < NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 5 Maximum 105 Default 84
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: - Applicable only to TDM mode. - A high value will tend to decrease the efficiency of the BSC defence to avoid "GSL output buffer" overflow.- A low value can lead to discard too many PS channel requests (QoS degradation). No No
749 / 1182
5.1.24 (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC) (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC
In a G2 BSC, Xon hysteresis threshold (in terms of number of BSCGP messages queued in the "GSL output buffer") below which channel requests can again be sent on this GSL link.The interest of those Xon/Xoff thresholds is to avoid "GSL output buffer" overflow. NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC < NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 5 Maximum 105 Default 52
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Applicable only to TDM mode. No No
750 / 1182
5.1.25 (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC) (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC
In a MX BSC, Xon hysteresis threshold (in terms of number of BSCGP messages queued in the "GSL output buffer") below which channel requests can again be sent on this GSL link.The interest of those Xon/Xoff thresholds is to avoid "GSL output buffer" overflow. NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC < NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC Network (CDE) Number BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 5 Maximum 105 Default 52
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Applicable only to TDM mode. No No
751 / 1182
5.1.26 (NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN) - (NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN
For a PDCH, percentage of channel capacity (in terms of radio block scheduling) which is exclusively reserved to NRT TBFs. That capacity is not allowed to be allocated to a streaming TBF (RT PFC). step size = 1% Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 7
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: In each direction (DL or UL), the minimum number of NRT TBFs which are possible (in all cases) to be established on a PDCH is equal to ((NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN/100) * (T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING/20ms)) rounded down to the closest integer value. This minimum number of NRT TBFs is guaranteed even in case of RT PFC allocation on the PDCH. The higher the value of NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN, the higher the risks of rejecting RT PFC creation requests. The lower the value of NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN, the higher the risks of rejecting NRT TBF establishment requests (signalling or data traffic). No No
752 / 1182
5.1.27 (P0_LAYER2_MAPPING_MFS) - (P0_LAYER2_MAPPING_MFS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition P0_LAYER2_MAPPING_MFS P0_LAYER2_MAPPING_MFS
Defines the priority indicated in L2 protocol (e.g. ethernet), corresponding to the P0 internal priority (the highest). step size = 1 P0_LAYER2_MAPPING_MFS >= P1_LAYER2_MAPPING_MFS The operator shall ensure that it is equal to P0_LAYER2_MAPPING_BSC Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 6
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Each internal priority can be mapped to a L2 priority using the parameter Px_layer2_mapping and mapped to a L3 priority using the parameter Px_layer3_mapping. No No
753 / 1182

Defines the Diffserv DSCP value used on the IP network by MFS flows having the P0 internal BSS priority (P0 is the highest priority). Step size = 1.Only a subset of the possible values are defined in the standard: 00 for BE, 10,12,14 for AF1; 18,20,22 for AF2; 26, 28,30 for AF3; 34, 36, 38 for AF4 and 46 for EF. P0_LAYER3_MAPPING_MFS >= P1_LAYER3_MAPPING_MFS The operator shall ensure that it is equal to P0_LAYER3_MAPPING_BSC Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 63 Default 46
Coding rules
754 / 1182

Defines the priority indicated in L2 protocol (e.g. ethernet), corresponding to the P1 internal priority. Step size = 1 P0_LAYER2_MAPPING_MFS >= P1_LAYER2_MAPPING_MFS >= P2_LAYER2_MAPPING_MFS The operator shall ensure that it is equal to P1_LAYER2_MAPPING_BSC Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4
Recommended rules
755 / 1182

Defines the Diffserv DSCP value used on the IP network by MFS flows having the P1 internal BSS priority (P3 is the lowest priority). Step size = 1.Only a subset of the possible values are defined in the standard: 00 for BE, 10,12,14 for AF1; 18,20,22 for AF2; 26, 28,30 for AF3; 34, 36, 38 for AF4 and 46 for EF. P0_LAYER3_MAPPING_MFS >= P1_LAYER3_MAPPING_MFS >= P2_LAYER3_MAPPING_MFS The operator shall ensure that it is equal to P1_LAYER3_MAPPING_BSC Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 63 Default 34
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
756 / 1182

Defines the priority indicated in L2 protocol (e.g. ethernet), corresponding to the P2 internal priority. step size = 1 P1_LAYER2_MAPPING_MFS >= P2_LAYER2_MAPPING_MFS >= P3_LAYER2_MAPPING_MFS The operator shall ensure that it is equal to P2_LAYER2_MAPPING_BSC Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 3
Recommended rules
757 / 1182

Defines the Diffserv DSCP value used on the IP network by MFS flows having the P2 internal BSS priority (P3 is the lowest priority). Step size = 1.Only a subset of the possible values are defined in the standard: 00 for BE, 10,12,14 for AF1; 18,20,22 for AF2; 26, 28,30 for AF3; 34, 36, 38 for AF4 and 46 for EF. P1_LAYER3_MAPPING_MFS >= P2_LAYER3_MAPPING_MFS >= P3_LAYER3_MAPPING_MFS The operator shall ensure that it is equal to P2_LAYER3_MAPPING_BSC Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 63 Default 26
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
758 / 1182

Defines the priority indicated in L2 protocol (e.g. ethernet), corresponding to the P3 internal priority (the lowest). step size = 1. P2_LAYER2_MAPPING_BSC >= P3_LAYER2_MAPPING_BSC The operator shall ensure that it is equal to P3_LAYER2_MAPPING_BSC Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 1
759 / 1182

Defines the Diffserv DSCP value used on the IP network by MFS flows having the P3 internal BSS priority (P3 is the lowest priority). Step size = 1.Only a subset of the possible values are defined in the standard: 00 for BE, 10,12,14 for AF1; 18,20,22 for AF2; 26, 28,30 for AF3; 34, 36, 38 for AF4 and 46 for EF. P2_LAYER3_MAPPING_MFS >= P3_LAYER3_MAPPING_MFS The operator shall ensure that it is equal to P3_LAYER3_MAPPING_BSC Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 63 Default 0
Coding rules
760 / 1182
5.1.35 (PDU_LIFETIME_ORDER) - (PDU_LIFETIME_ORDER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PDU_LIFETIME_ORDER PDU_LIFETIME_ORDER
Authorize or inhibit DL LLC PDU ordering according to the remaining PDU lifetime. 0: ordering disabled, 1 : ordering enabled Should be set to "ordering disabled", when the MFS interfaces with an Ericsson SGSN or any SGSN modifying the PDU Lifetime value during data flows addressed to the same MS on the same LLC SAPI in a non-acceptable manner, otherwise should be set to "ordering enabled". Network (CDE) Flag MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No Customer BUL file No No
761 / 1182
5.1.36 (S_BECN) - (S_BECN)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition S_BECN S_BECN
Number of consecutive frames with BECN bit before congestion is stated. Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 8
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No Customer BUL files No No
762 / 1182
5.1.37 (SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR) (SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR
When computing the best candidate timeslot allocation for an NRT TBF, this factor enables to give a higher weight (PDCH capacity) to the already-established NRT TBFs having a higher scheduling priority (combination of THP and of Precedence) than the TBF to be established or reallocated.This factor will tend to avoid piling up several TBFs with different scheduling priorities on the same PDCHs, which would degrade the throughput of the low-priority TBFs. Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 2
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: The higher the value of T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING is, the higher the value of SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR shall be, in order to avoid degrading the throughput of the low-priority TBFs in a significant manner (if it is possible according to the available PDCHs in the cell). No No
763 / 1182
5.1.38 (T_ACK_WAIT) - (T_ACK_WAIT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_ACK_WAIT T_ACK_WAIT
Timer defining the maximum time to wait for an MS answer (i.e. Packet Control Ack or beginning of an UL TBF) to a network solicitation sent on PACCH/DL when the MS is in PTM, or on PPCH when the MS is in PIM and non-DRX mode, or on main DCCH when the MS is in dedicated mode. step size = 0.1 sec It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links:- T_ack_wait = 1200 ms if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in all the cells of the MFS.- T_ack_wait = 1700 ms if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in at least one cell of the MFS. Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 5 Default 1.2
764 / 1182
5.1.39 (T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH) - (T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH
Timer defining the maximum time to wait for a MS answer (i.e. Packet Control Ack) to a network sollicitation sent on PPCH when the MS is in PIM and DRX mode. step size = 0.1 sec ; 0 = 0; 1 = 0.1;... ;100 = 10 It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links:- T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH = 2.5 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in all the cells of the MFS,T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH = 3 s if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in at least one cell of the MFS. Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 10 Default 2.5
765 / 1182
5.1.40 (T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC) (T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC
Timer value controlling the time duration between successive resource reallocation attempts for candidate MSs (triggers T3 and T4).In a given cell, at each expiry of the T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC timer :- up to N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T4 T4 TBF reallocation attempts are performed,- up to N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T4 T4 reallocations are performed,- up to 2 x N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T3 T3 TBF reallocation attempts are performed- up to 2 x N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_SUCCESS_T3 T3 reallocations are performed. step size = 1 sec; value 1 means 1 sec; value 2 means 2 sec, and so on T_GCH_INACTIVITY > T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC in all the cells of the BSS.This constraints avoids as much as possible that some GCHs are released and reestablished again some moments later. This way, the T3 and T4 TBF reallocations can benefit from the GCHs which are currently unused, but still established. Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 20 Default 1
Coding rules
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No Customer BUL files This parameter, together with the parameters N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T3, N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_SUCCESS_T3 and N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T4, allows to :- to control the reactivity of the BSS with regards to T3 and T4 TBF reallocations,- and to control the extra CPU load generated by T3 and T4 TBF reallocation attempts (the lowest the value of T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC, the highest the generated CPU load).
766 / 1182
No No
767 / 1182
5.1.41 (T_GCH_release) - (Trelease)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules T_GCH_release Trelease
Supervision of GCH link release for 16k channel. step size = 100 ms Trelease > TdslTreq_pending > Trelease It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links:- Trelease = 500 ms if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in all the cells of the MFS,- Trelease = 1000 ms if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in at least one cell of the MFS. Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit ms Minimum 200 Maximum 1200 Default 500
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No HMI name changed to precise that this timer is valid for GCH channels. Former HMI name Trelease. No No
768 / 1182
5.1.42 (T_GPRS_Resume) - (T_GPRS_Resume)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_GPRS_Resume T_GPRS_Resume
Timer used by BSC, to wait for Resume acknowledgement from SGSN before releasing the CS channel. step size = 0.1 sec, coded from 2 to 50 T_GPRS_Resume < T3240 (10s) T_GPRS_Resume > (BSSGP_T4 * (Resume_retries+1))It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links:T_GPRS_RESUME = 1 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater terrestrial links in all the cells of the MFS,- T_GPRS_RESUME = 1.5 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links in at least one cell of the MFS. Network (CDE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0.2 Maximum 5 Default 1
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No T3240 is a MS timer see 3GPP TS 24.008 No No
769 / 1182
5.1.43 (T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING) (T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING
Maximum time between two scheduling of a given NRT TBF (either between two DL block requests for a NRT DL TBF, or between two UL blocks received for a given NRT UL TBF). step size = 20 ms Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 0.12 Maximum 0.3 Default 0.3
770 / 1182
5.1.44 (T_MS_CONTEXT_FLUSH_PERSISTENCE) (T_MS_CONTEXT_FLUSH_PERSISTENCE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_MS_CONTEXT_FLUSH_PERSISTENCE T_MS_CONTEXT_FLUSH_PERSISTENCE
This timer controls the duration during which a MS context is kept after receipt of a FLUSH-LL. step size = 100 ms Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit ms Minimum 0 Maximum 5000 Default 1000
771 / 1182
5.1.45 (T_REROUTING_REQUEST_GUARD) (T_REROUTING_REQUEST_GUARD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_REROUTING_REQUEST_GUARD T_REROUTING_REQUEST_GUARD
This timer controls the maximum time during which a GPU waits for the response to a rerouting request. step size = 50 ms Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit ms Minimum 50 Maximum 2000 Default 500
772 / 1182
5.1.46 (T_ul_2_ph_access) - (T_One_Block)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_ul_2_ph_access T_One_Block
- For Non Evolium BTS : Timer to postpone the release of one slave PDCH, when it does not support any (E)GPRS traffic, but a one uplink block has been allocated on it to a MS for a 2 phase access TBF establishment. - For Evolium BTS : Timer to postpone the release of the M-EGCH link of a TRX, when the TRX does not support any (E)GPRS traffic, but a one uplink block has been allocated to a MS for a 2 phase access TBF establishment on one of the RTSs of the TRX step size = 1 sec It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links:- T_one_block = 4 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in all the cells of the MFS,- T_one_block = 5 s if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in at least one cell of the MFS. Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 3 Maximum 10 Default 4
OMC Changes: MFS RNO Changes: No No No
773 / 1182
5.1.47 (T_ul_access_max) - (T_ul_access_max)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules T_ul_access_max T_ul_access_max
Timer to limit the duration of an UL TBF establishment. step size = 50 ms, 0 = 0 ms, 1 = 50 ms,... , 100 = 5000 ms The two following rules are recommended:i) The Time T_ul_access_max shall be longer than the duration of a radio allocation requested towards the BSC.ii) A too long value of T_ul_access_max may lead to reserve unnecessarily radio resources. It is recommended to set T_ul_access_max = T_repeat + 240 ms Round_Trip_Delay, where the T_Repeat is the maximum time between two successive packet channel requests, 240 ms is a given margin. The value of T_Repeat depends on the parameters S, TX_INT, and TX_INTEGER.It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending on whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links:- T_ul_access_max = 1400 ms if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater terrestrial links in all the cells of the MFS,- T_ul_access_max = 1900 ms if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links in at least one cell of the MFS. Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit ms Minimum 0 Maximum 5000 Default 1400
OMC Changes: MFS RNO Changes: No No No
774 / 1182
5.1.48 (T_WAIT_FLUSH) - (T_WAIT_FLUSH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_WAIT_FLUSH T_WAIT_FLUSH
Timer monitoring the receipt of a Flush message or a GPRS suspend message further to the release of the on-going TBF(s) Step size : 0.5 sec1 coded 1; 1,5 coded 2; 2 coded 3; 2,5 coded 4; .15,5 coded 30 and 16 coded 31 The timer T_WAIT_FLUSH shall be set to the maximum cell reselection duration plus the time for the MS to switch back to the old cell and send a Packet Cell Change Failure message. Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 16 Default 10
Coding rules
775 / 1182
5.1.49 (T1) - (bssgp_T1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T1 bssgp_T1
Guards the (un)blocking procedures. step size=1sec Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 30 Default 3
776 / 1182
5.1.50 (T2) - (bssgp_T2)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T2 bssgp_T2
Guards the reset procedure. step size=1sec Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 120 Default 3
777 / 1182
5.1.51 (T200_GSL (MFS)) - (T200_GSL (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules T200_GSL (MFS) T200_GSL (MFS)
Supervision of acknowledgements on the GSL link. T_GSL_Ack (MFS) > T200_GSL (MFS) * (1 + N200_GSL (MFS))It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links:T200_GSL(MFS) = 1 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater terrestrial links in all BSC of the MFS.- T200_GSL(MFS) = 2 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links in at least one BSC of the MFS. Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 2 Default 1
778 / 1182
5.1.52 (T391) - (T391)

Link integrity verification polling timer (Frame Relay, see ITU Q.933, Annex A, A.7). N392*T391 is the value of the link failure detection time Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 5 Maximum 30 Default 10
779 / 1182
5.1.53 (TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL) - (TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL
Multiplication factor used in the computation of the maximum number of DL TBFs allowed to be established on a TRX for a given number of GCHs on this TRX (i.e. in the M-EGCH link of this TRX). step size = 0.1 Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 5 Default 1
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: If there is a great amount of "short data" TBFs in the network (delayed DL or extended UL phases are longer than actual TBF traffic phases), the existing TBF limitations (in number of TBFs established on a TRX for a given number of GCHs on this TRX) may be too restrictive and lead to some TBF establishment failures. The TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters allow to increase this limit, so to be more flexible. Another justification for the TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters is that the limits for DL and UL TBF numbers may be different.The TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters are used in the formulae to compute Min_Nb_GCH_Best_Effort_XL (RRM-PRH). An increase of their value should be validated by load tests (in order to check, among others, that the DSP can support the induced extra CPU load). No No
780 / 1182
5.1.54 (TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL) - (TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL
Multiplication factor used in the computation of the maximum number of UL TBFs allowed to be established on a TRX for a given number of GCHs on this TRX (i.e. in the M-EGCH link of this TRX). step size = 0.1 Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 5 Default 1
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: If there is a great amount of "short data" TBFs in the network (delayed DL or extended UL phases are longer than actual TBF traffic phases), the existing TBF limitations (in number of TBFs established on a TRX for a given number of GCHs on this TRX) may be too restrictive and lead to some TBF establishment failures. The TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters allow to increase this limit, so to be more flexible. Another justification for the TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters is that the limits for DL and UL TBF numbers may be different.The TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters are used in the formulae to compute Min_Nb_GCH_Best_Effort_XL (RRM-PRH). An increase of their value should be validated by load tests (in order to check, among others, that the DSP can support the induced extra CPU load). No No
781 / 1182
5.1.55 (TnsBlock) - (Tns_block)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value TnsBlock Tns_block
Time-out to trigger the block/unblock procedure. Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 120 Default 3
782 / 1182
5.1.56 (TnsReset) - (Tns_reset)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value TnsReset Tns_reset
Time-out for reset procedure. Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 120 Default 3
783 / 1182
5.1.57 (TnsTest) - (Tns_test)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value TnsTest Tns_test
Overall time-out to test an NS-VC. Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 60 Default 15
784 / 1182
5.1.58 (Treq_pending) - (Treq_pending)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Treq_pending Treq_pending
Maximum time during which a GCH establishment or release request from PMU can be delayed in MEGCH layer. step size = 20 ms Treq_pending > Trelease+Tcorr Treq_pending > Testab+Tcorr Network (CDE) Timer MFS MFS Unit ms Minimum 1000 Maximum 5200 Default 2000
785 / 1182
5.2 Site (CAE)

5.2.1 (ACCESS_BURST_TYPE) - (ACCESS_BURST_TYPE)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition ACCESS_BURST_TYPE ACCESS_BURST_TYPE
Format of the access burst used by (E)GPRS MSs when sending a PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST, a PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGEMENT or a PTCCH/U message. 0 : 8 bits access bursts, 1 : 11 bits access bursts For Non-Evolium BTS (i.e. DRFU BTS), the OMC-R shall force the ACCESS_BURST_TYPE parameter to "8-bits access bursts".A couple of mate cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall have the same ACCESS_BURST_TYPE when they are PS capable. Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Cnct Ctrl 2/2 No No
786 / 1182
5.2.2 (Allowed priority classes) - (PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Allowed priority classes PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD (BSC)
This parameter indicates whether or not a MS of a certain priority class is allowed to do Packet access. Coded over 3 bits . 000: packet access not allowed in the cell; 011:packet access allowed for priority level 1; 100: packet access allowed for priority level 1 to 2; 101: packet access allowed for priority level 1 to 3; 110: packet access allowed for priority level 1 to 4 Equal to PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 6 Default 6
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: GPR Edit Cell / GPRS / Connection Control 2/2 No No
787 / 1182
5.2.3 (Allowed priority classes) - (PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Allowed priority classes PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD (MFS)
This parameter indicates whether or not a MS of a certain priority class is allowed to do a Packet access. Coded over 3 bits . 000: packet access is not allowed in the cell; 011:packet access is allowed for priority level 1; 100: packet access is allowed for priority level 1 to 2; 101: packet access is allowed for priority level 1 to 3; 110: packet access allowed for priority level 1 to 4 Equal to PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 6 Default 6
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: GPR Edit Cell / GPRS / Connection Control 2/2 Persistence level parameter for priority (i) is meaningless if the Radio Priority (i) is not allowed No No
788 / 1182
5.2.4 (ALPHA) - (ALPHA (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules ALPHA ALPHA (BSC)
Alpha power control parameter. Possible values are : 0.0 to 1.0 with step of 0.1respectively binary coded : 0000, 0001, 0010 1010 Equal to ALPHA (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: GPR Edit Cell / GPRS / Power Control No No
789 / 1182
5.2.5 (ALPHA) - (ALPHA (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules ALPHA ALPHA (MFS)
Alpha power control parameter. Possible values are : 0.0 to 1.0 with step of 0.1respectively binary coded : 0000, 0001, 0010 1010 Equal to ALPHA (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
790 / 1182
5.2.6 (Ater_Usage_Threshold) - (Ater_Usage_Threshold)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Ater_Usage_Threshold Ater_Usage_Threshold
Threshold (percentage of used Ater nibbles, in a GPU) above which the Ater usage is said "high". A low value of GCH_RED_Factor_High_Ater_Usage can be coherent with a high value of Ater_Usage_Threshold (it will avoid reaching the saturation point of 100% of the Ater resources used at the same moment in the GPU). Reciprocally, a high value of GCH_RED_Factor_High_Ater_Usage can be coherent with a low value of Ater_Usage_Threshold (it will limit the risks of wasting, i.e. of not using, Ater resources in the GPU).For all the Ater_Usage_Threshold values being defined for the BSSs handled by the MFS, Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data <= Ater_Usage_Threshold 30%. Indeed, for consistency reasons, "short data" MS transfer optimizations should come prior to high Ater usage optimizations. Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit % Minimum 1 Maximum 100 Default 70
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: When the Ater usage is "high", the GCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage is applied, whereas when the Ater usage is "normal" (i.e. percentage of used Ater nibbles is below the threshold), no GCH reduction factor is applied. No No
791 / 1182
5.2.7 (BEST_EFFORT_PRIORITY) - (BEST_EFFORT_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BEST_EFFORT_PRIORITY BEST_EFFORT_PRIORITY
Defines the relative priority used for the pre-defined Best Effort Packet Flow Context, and for all MS traffic without PFC Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 4 Maximum 15 Default 12
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Default value corresponds to the priority for interactive THP3.The minimum value (the highest priority) corresponds to one priority level below the streaming class. No No
792 / 1182
5.2.8 (BS_AG_BLKS_RES) - (BS_AG_BLKS_RES (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_AG_BLKS_RES BS_AG_BLKS_RES (MFS)
Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the access grant channel (AGCH), broadcast on the PBCCH for CS service establishment. coded on 3 bits (000 : 0, ...111 : 7) -BS_AG_BLKS_RES (MFS) = BS_AG_BLKS_RES (BSC) for a given cell-when CCCH_CONF=0 and CBCH is configured in the cell, BS_AG_BLKS_RES>0- when CCCH_CONF=2, max value of BS_AG_BLKS_RES is 7 and BS_AG_BLKS_RES must be > 0 if CBCH is configured in the cell.-When EN_VGCS is disabled :. if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >= 1-When EN_VGCS is enabled : . if BCCH_EXT = false, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >= NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS . if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES > NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: PAG Edit Cell / Cell Information / Ctrl Channel Maximum and Default values given for CCCH_CONF=0For CCCH_CONF=1, max=2, def=1 No No
793 / 1182
5.2.9 (BS_CV_MAX) - (BS_CV_MAX (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_CV_MAX BS_CV_MAX (BSC)
Number of remaining RLC data blocks sent (per assigned PDCH) by the MS, below which the Count Down procedure is entered.One third of the number of RLC data blocks per assigned PDCH before the MS checks if the resolution contention has failed. Coded on 4 bits (1==0001, 2 == 0010 .. 15 == 1111). Equal to BS_CV_MAX (MFS) BS_CV_MAX should be set to a value equal to the "minimum" round trip delay to optimise the uplink re-transmission of non-acknowledged blocks and minimise window-stalled situations.If BS_CV_MAX is set greater than round-trip-delay, uplink retransmissions of unacknowledged blocks may be delayed.It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links:- BS_CV_MAX = 9 if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in the serving cell,- BS_CV_MAX = 15 if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 15 Default 9
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: GPR Edit Cell / GPRS / RLC/MAC Used by the MS to start the countdown value process (release of UL TBF) or to consider acknowledgement messages as valid for a given RLC data block. Lower values avoid too many TBF releases and reestablishments. No No
794 / 1182
5.2.10 (BS_CV_MAX) - (BS_CV_MAX (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_CV_MAX BS_CV_MAX (MFS)
Number of remaining RLC data blocks sent (per assigned PDCH) by the MS, below which the Count Down procedure is entered.One third of the number of RLC data blocks per assigned PDCH before the MS checks if the resolution contention has failed. Coded on 4 bits (1==0001, 2 == 0010 .. 15 == 1111). Equal to BS_CV_MAX (BSC) BS_CV_MAX should be set to a value equal to the "minimum" round trip delay to optimise the uplink re-transmission of non-acknowledged blocks and minimise window-stalled situations.If BS_CV_MAX is set greater than round-trip-delay, uplink retransmissions of unacknowledged blocks may be delayed.It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links:- BS_CV_MAX = 9 if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in the serving cell,- BS_CV_MAX = 15 if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 15 Default 9
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: GPR Edit Cell / GPRS / RLC/MAC Used by the MS to start the countdown value process (release of UL TBF) or to consider acknowledgement messages as valid for a given RLC data block. Lower values avoid too many TBF releases and reestablishments. No No
795 / 1182
5.2.11 (BS_PA_MFRMS) - (BS_PA_MFRMS (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_PA_MFRMS BS_PA_MFRMS (MFS)
Number of 51 frame multiframes between consecutive occurrences of a Paging Group, broadcast on the PBCCH for the CS service establishment. coded on 3 bits (000 : 2, ... 111: 9) BS_PA_MFRMS (BSC) = BS_PA_MFRMS (MFS) for a given cell Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 2 Maximum 9 Default 5
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: PAG Edit Cell / Cell Information / Ctrl Channel The bigger this parameter is, the lesser the MS power consumption is. No No
796 / 1182
5.2.12 (BS_PAG_BLKS_RES) - (BS_PAG_BLKS_RES)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_PAG_BLKS_RES BS_PAG_BLKS_RES
Number of blocks allocated to the PAGCH or PDTCH or PACCH per 52 multiframe. coded on 4 bits (0001: 1, ..., 1010: 10)The codepoints 0000: 0, 1011: 11 and 1100: 12 are not supported by the ALCATEL BSS. BS_PAG_BLKS_RES < 12 BS_PBCCH_BLKS Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 2
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Master Channel 1/2 According to 3GPP TS 05.02, the number of paging blocks "available" on one PCCCH =(12 - BS_PAG_BLKS_RES - BS_PBCCH_BLKS) * 64. In order for the network to be able to page GPRS-attached Mobile Stations when PCCCH is present in the cell, there shall be at least one radio block where paging can occur. This requires (12 - BS_PAG_BLKS_RES - BS_PBCCH_BLKS) to be strictly greater than 0. No No
797 / 1182
5.2.13 (BS_PBCCH_BLKS) - (BS_PBCCH_BLKS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules BS_PBCCH_BLKS BS_PBCCH_BLKS
Number of blocks allocated to the PBCCH per 52 multiframe. coded on 2 bits : 00=Block B0 used for PBCCH, 01=Block B0, B6 used for PBCCH, 10=Block B0, B6, B3 used for PBCCH, 11=Block B0, B6, B3, B9 used for PBCCH BS_PBCCH_BLKS < 12 - BS_PAG_BLKS_RES Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 4 Default 4
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Master Channel 1/2 No No
798 / 1182
5.2.14 (BS_PRACH_BLKS_MIN) - (BS_PRACH_BLKS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_PRACH_BLKS_MIN BS_PRACH_BLKS
Number of blocks statically allocated to the PRACH per 52 multiframe on each MPDCH. coded on 4 bits (0001: 1, .., 1000: 8) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 8 Default 2
799 / 1182
5.2.15 (BS_TXPWR_MAX) - (BS_TXPWR_MAX (MFS))

When a cell is shared, the BS_TX_POWER_MAX and BS_TX_POWER_MAX_INNER powers must always be defined against the actual physical power of the main sector. If the actual power of the secondary sector is lower than the actual power of the main sector, the operator has to adjust the values of BS_TX_POWER_MAX and BS_TX_POWER_MAX_INNER to avoid requiring too high an output power than is actually available. Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition BS_TXPWR_MAX BS_TXPWR_MAX (MFS)
This parameter defines the power reduction relative to the maximum GMSK output power of the BTS. 0 0 0 0 = 0 dB, 0 0 0 1 = -2 dB, 0 0 1 0 = -4 dB, ..., 1 1 1 1 = -30 dB Equal to BS_TXPWR_MAX (BSC)BS_TXPWR_MAX >= BS_TXPWR_MIN Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dB Minimum -30 Maximum 0 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / PC parameters / General PC Control The BTS maximum allowed transmit power is defined relatively to the BTS maximum RF transmit power in GMSK (due to hardware limitation). No No
800 / 1182
5.2.16 (BVCI) - (PTP_BVCI)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value PTP BVCI value. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Modifiable Parameter Access External Comment Cell Type Dependent Nb of TRX Dependent Minimum 2 Maximum 65535 Default # BVCI PTP_BVCI
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No Cell Menu / Show GPRS Bvci No No
801 / 1182
5.2.17 (C31_HYST) - (C31_HYST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition C31_HYST C31_HYST
Determines whether an additional cell hysteresis shall be applied to the C31 criterion. The hysteresis is GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS (for NC0 mode). 0 : no, 1 : yes Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Master Channel 2/2 (+ Edit External Cell / Packet) No No
802 / 1182
5.2.18 (C32_QUAL) - (C32_QUAL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition C32_QUAL C32_QUAL
Flag indicating an exception rule for GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET in NC0 mode. 0=NO, 1=YES Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Master Channel 2/2 (+ Edit External Cell / Packet) No No
803 / 1182
5.2.19 (Capacity) - (ACCESS_RATE_BC (OMC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Capacity ACCESS_RATE_BC (OMC)
Physical access rate of the Frame Relay bearer channel. CIR <= NIR <= CIR x (1 + EBS/CBS) <= ACCESS_RATE_BC (OMC) Site (CAE) Number OMC BC Unit kbit/s Minimum 64 Maximum 1984 Default 64
804 / 1182
5.2.20 (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET) - (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (MFS)
Permanent offset to C2 criterion. step size = 2dB; coded on 6 bits (000000:0 dB, 111111 : 126 dB) CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (MFS) = CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 126 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Selection No No
805 / 1182
5.2.21 (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET) (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(MFS)
Permanent offset to C2 criterion. step size = 2dB; coded on 6 bits (000000:0 dB, 111111 : 126 dB) CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(MFS) = CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (n)(BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 126 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No Edit External Cell/ Packet2/2 No No
806 / 1182
5.2.22 (CI) - (CI (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Cell Identity. LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same timeEqual to CI (BSC) Site (CAE) Reference MFS cell Unit None Modifiable Parameter Access External Comment Minimum 0 Maximum 65535 Default 65535 CI CI (MFS)
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Description Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
807 / 1182
5.2.23 (CI) - (CI(n) (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules CI CI(n) (MFS)
Cell Identity of adjacent cell. Values 0..65535 correspond to the standard CI-value. LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same time.Equal to CI(n)(BSC) Site (CAE) Reference MFS adj Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 65535 Default 65535
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No Adjacencies Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
808 / 1182
5.2.24 (Commited Burst Size) - (CBS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Commited Burst Size CBS
Commited Burst Size. CIR=0 <=> CBS=0 => EBS > 0CIR <= NIR <= CIR x (1 + EBS/CBS) <= ACCESS_RATE_BC Site (CAE) Number MFS PVC Unit kbyte Minimum 0 Maximum 248 Default 0
OMC Changes: MFS RNO Changes: No Create NS-VC No No
809 / 1182
5.2.25 (Committed Information Rate) - (CIR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Committed Information Rate CIR
Committed Information Rate. CIR=0 when "direct access" is used, CIR=0 <=> CBS=0 => EBS > 0CIR <= NIR <= CIR x (1 + EBS/CBS) <= ACCESS_RATE_BC Site (CAE) Number MFS PVC Unit kbit/s Minimum 0 Maximum 1984 Default 0
810 / 1182
5.2.26 (CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT) - (CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT
"Forgetting time" in the long term averaging of channel quality measurements in the GPRS link Adaptation: measurements which are older than CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT are negligible in the average of channel quality measurements. step size = 20ms Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.02 Maximum 5 Default 2
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No Parameter change: any modification impacts the telecom PS service. The on-going PS traffic of the BSS is broken and no new traffic is accepted until the related GP/GPU(s) restarted. No No
811 / 1182
5.2.27 (CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST) - (CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST
"Forgetting time" in the short term averaging of channel quality measurements in the GPRS link adaptation: measurements which are older than CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST are negligible in the average of channel quality measurements. step size = 20ms Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.02 Maximum 5 Default 0.32
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No Parameter change: any modification impacts the telecom PS service. The on-going PS traffic of the BSS is broken and no new traffic is accepted until the related GP/GPU(s) restarted. No No
812 / 1182
5.2.28 (CS_BLER_DL_3_4) - (CS_BLER_DL_3_4)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_BLER_DL_3_4 CS_BLER_DL_3_4
CS3 BLER threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the downlink direction when the SIR measurements are not reported by the MS step size = 1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 5
813 / 1182
5.2.29 (CS_BLER_DL_4_3) - (CS_BLER_DL_4_3)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_BLER_DL_4_3 CS_BLER_DL_4_3
CS4 BLER threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS4 to CS3 in the downlink direction when the SIR measurements are not reported by the MS. step size = 1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 15
814 / 1182
5.2.30 (CS_HST_DL_LT) - (CS_HST_DL_LT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_HST_DL_LT CS_HST_DL_LT
Hysteresis value for AV_RXQUAL_LT thresholds used in the downlink radio link supervision to change the TBF coding scheme. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 6 Default 0.5
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / GPRS / CS3/CS4 2/2 No No
815 / 1182
5.2.31 (CS_HST_DL_ST) - (CS_HST_DL_ST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_HST_DL_ST CS_HST_DL_ST
Hysteresis value for AV_RXQUAL_ST thresholds used in the downlink radio link supervision to change the TBF coding scheme. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 6 Default 1.5
816 / 1182
5.2.32 (CS_HST_UL_LT) - (CS_HST_UL_LT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_HST_UL_LT CS_HST_UL_LT
Hysteresis value for AV_RXQUAL_LT thresholds used in the uplink radio link supervision to change the TBF coding scheme. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 6 Default 0.5
817 / 1182
5.2.33 (CS_HST_UL_ST) - (CS_HST_UL_ST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_HST_UL_ST CS_HST_UL_ST
Hysteresis value for AV_RXQUAL_ST thresholds used in the uplink radio link supervision to change the TBF coding scheme. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 6 Default 1.5
818 / 1182
5.2.34 (CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD) - (CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD
Maximum transfer inactivity time to reuse the previous (Modulation and) Coding Scheme. This applies in case of transfer resumption during inactive TBF phase (delayed downlink TBF mode / extended uplink TBF mode) and in case of uplink TBF establishment on PACCH while extended uplink TBF mode is not used (with some additional restrictions). step size = 20 ms Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit ms Minimum 0 Maximum 5000 Default 680
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Cnct Ctrl 1/2 This parameter applies to both GPRS and EGPRS TBFs. No No
819 / 1182
5.2.35 (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_ACK) - (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_ACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_ACK CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_ACK
RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the downlink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 6
820 / 1182
5.2.36 (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_NACK) - (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_NACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_NACK CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_NACK
RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the downlink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 3
821 / 1182
5.2.37 (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_ACK) - (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_ACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_ACK CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_ACK
RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the downlink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 5
822 / 1182
5.2.38 (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_NACK) (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_NACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_NACK CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_NACK
RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the downlink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 3
823 / 1182

RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS2 to CS3 in the downlink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4
824 / 1182

825 / 1182

RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS2 to CS3 in the downlink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 3.5
826 / 1182

827 / 1182

RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the downlink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0.5
828 / 1182

829 / 1182

RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the downlink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0.5
830 / 1182

831 / 1182
5.2.47 (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_ACK) - (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_ACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_ACK CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_ACK
RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the uplink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 6
832 / 1182
5.2.48 (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_NACK) - (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_NACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_NACK CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_NACK
RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the uplink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 3
833 / 1182
5.2.49 (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_ACK) - (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_ACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_ACK CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_ACK
RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the uplink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 5
834 / 1182
5.2.50 (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_NACK) (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_NACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_NACK CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_NACK
RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the uplink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 3
835 / 1182

Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS2 to CS3 in the uplink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 4
836 / 1182

Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS2 to CS3 in the uplink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 2
837 / 1182

Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS2 to CS3 in the uplink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 3.5
838 / 1182

Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS2 to CS3 in the uplink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 2
839 / 1182

Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the uplink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0.5
840 / 1182

Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the uplink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
841 / 1182

Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the uplink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0.5
842 / 1182

Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the uplink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
843 / 1182
5.2.59 (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_ACK) - (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_ACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_ACK CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_ACK
Signal to Interference Ratio threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the downlink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 15 Default 14
844 / 1182
5.2.60 (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_NACK) - (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_NACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_NACK CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_NACK
Signal to Interference Ratio threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the downlink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on a hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 15 Default 15
845 / 1182
5.2.61 (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_ACK) - (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_ACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_ACK CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_ACK
Signal to Interference Ratio threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the downlink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 15 Default 13
846 / 1182
5.2.62 (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_NACK) - (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_NACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_NACK CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_NACK
Signal to Interference Ratio threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the downlink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on a non-hopping TRX. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 15 Default 15
847 / 1182
5.2.63 (CS_SIR_HST_DL) - (CS_SIR_HST_DL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CS_SIR_HST_DL CS_SIR_HST_DL
Signal to Interference Ratio hysteresis used in the link adaptation algorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS4 to CS3 in the downlink direction. step size = 0.1 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 15 Default 1
848 / 1182
5.2.64 (Data Link Connection Identifier) - (DLCI)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Data Link Connection Identifier DLCI
Data Link Connection Identifier, corresponds to a PVC identifier, see Q.922 Annex A, Table 1. Site (CAE) Number MFS PVC Unit None Minimum 16 Maximum 991 Default None
849 / 1182
5.2.65 (DRX_TIMER_MAX) - (DRX_TIMER_MAX (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DRX_TIMER_MAX DRX_TIMER_MAX (BSC)
Maximum value allowed for the MS to request for non-DRX mode after packet transfer mode. Radio coding :Possible values : 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 respectively binary coded as 000, 001, , 111ONLY THE VALUES 0, 1, 2 AND 4 ARE POSSIBLE in ALCATEL BSS. Equal to DRX_TIMER_MAX (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 4 Default 2
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / GPRS No No
850 / 1182
5.2.66 (DRX_TIMER_MAX) - (DRX_TIMER_MAX (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition DRX_TIMER_MAX DRX_TIMER_MAX (MFS)
Maximum value allowed for the MS to request for non-DRX mode after packet transfer mode. Radio coding :Possible values : 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 respectively binary coded as 000, 001, , 111ONLY THE VALUES 0, 1, 2 AND 4 ARE POSSIBLE in ALCATEL BSS. Equal to DRX_TIMER_MAX (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 4 Default 2
Coding rules
851 / 1182
5.2.67 (EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK) - (EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK
Enables / disables the link adaptation in RLC acknowledged mode. 0: Disable; 1: Enable If EN_STREAMING = 1 then it is recommended to set EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK to "TRUE" in order to activate the link adaptation mechanism so that the (M)CS can reach a suitable level regarding the level of the configured Rmin_(E)GPRS. Otherwise, the streaming PFCs can be downgraded to the Default Best Effort ABQP because the negotiated GBR cannot be reached on the radio interface. Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: GPR Edit Cell / GPRS / Cnct Ctrl 1/2 This parameter applies to both GPRS and EGPRS TBFs. No No
852 / 1182
5.2.68 (EN_CS_ADAPTATION_NACK) - (EN_CS_ADAPTATION_NACK)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_CS_ADAPTATION_NACK EN_CS_ADAPTATION_NACK
Enables / disables the link adaptation in RLC unacknowledged 0: Disable; 1: Enable Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: GPR Edit Cell / GPRS / Cnct Ctrl 1/2 This parameter applies to both GPRS and EGPRS TBFs. No No
853 / 1182
5.2.69 (EN_DL_LLC_PDU_REROUTING) (EN_DL_LLC_PDU_REROUTING)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_DL_LLC_PDU_REROUTING EN_DL_LLC_PDU_REROUTING
This flag enables / disables rerouting of DL LLC PDUs. 0 : disabled, 1 : enabled Site (CAE) Flag MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No This parameter locks only the rerouting part of the feature. It has no effect on the securisation part. This parameter applies to both, intra-NSE and inter-NSE cell change. No No
854 / 1182
5.2.70 (EN_EGPRS) - (EN_EGPRS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules EN_EGPRS EN_EGPRS
Enables/Disables EGPRS traffic in the cell. 0: Disable, 1: Enable EN_EGPRS = enable only if MAX_PDCH > 0. If EN_EGPRS is set to enable, Alcatel recommend to set the parameter PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX to 0.In case of extended cell, Alcatel recommend to set the same value in both, inner and outer, cells. Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / General groups From system point of view, when EN_EGPRS = Enable, the highest MCS allowed on the TRX is defined by the current size of the M-EGCH link of the TRX and by the MAX_EGPRS_MCS value. No No
855 / 1182
5.2.71 (EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF) - (EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF
Flag to disable/enable the extended TBF mode feature on the uplink (without or with allowing the MS not to answer to a USF received while in Extended UL TBF mode). 0: Extended UL TBF mode (EUTM) is not used1: EUTM is used2: I-EUTM is used (improved EUTM mode) -It is recommended not to activate simultaneously extended UL TBF feature (EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF) and the DL PDU rerouting feature (EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING)- if EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is enabled and if RA capability update is supported by SGSN, then the parameter EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE must be enabled.The Extended UL TBF mode feature is completely effective only if the parameter EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE is set to enabled. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 0
Coding rules
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: I-EUTM (improved EUTM) allow MS in EUTM mode to not answer to a USF No No
856 / 1182
5.2.72 (EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS) (EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS
This flag indicates whether or not one Slave PDCH is available for (E)GPRS traffic in the cell (fast initial PS access feature).- In a Non Evolium BTS, that corresponds to an established PDCH being able to support incoming (E)GPRS traffic. - In an Evolium BTS, that corresponds to a PDCH being able to support incoming (E)GPRS traffic, that PDCH being located on an established TRX (i.e. the TRX owns an M-EGCH link) 0: disabled, 1: enabled MIN_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = enabled; MIN_PDCH >= NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = disabled. Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Radio Res. Ctrl Better performances for service access time will be obtained when this parameter is set to enabled, but one PDCH will always be established in the cell. A compromise has to be made by the operator between performance gain and the cost of radio and terrestrial resources. This compromise becomes of higher importance in case of a cell connected through a satellite link due to the higher GPRS access time with satellite links, but also the higher cost of transmission links. No No
857 / 1182
5.2.73 (EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED) (EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED
Flag to disable/enable the fast scheduling mode for the uplink TBFs. 0: disabled, 1: enabled Site (CAE) Flag MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: The parameter is significant only if EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is enabled.The fast scheduling policy is controlled by the T_EXTENDED_UL_TBF_FAST_POL parameter. No No
858 / 1182
5.2.74 (EN_FULL_IR_DL) - (EN_FULL_IR_DL_per_cell)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules EN_FULL_IR_DL EN_FULL_IR_DL_per_cell
Enables/Disables the resegmentation for the downlink TBF in the cell. 0: Disable the "full" IR, so : Incremental Redundancy with resegmentation allowed in DL, 1: Enable the "full" IR, so, Incremental Redundancy without resegmentation in DL To allow the best throughput in DL, it is strongly recommended to set this parameter to 0 i.e. to not forbid the resegmentation. Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
859 / 1182
5.2.75 (EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33) (EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33 EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33
Enables the support of (E)GPRS multislot class 30-33. 0 : disabled, 1 : enabled Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Support of DTM (E)GPRS multislot classes 31 to 33 is possible only if EN_DTM = 1 and EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33 = 1. Support of configurations requiring EDA is possible only if EN_EDA = 1 (and ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION = 1 in case of DTM). No No
860 / 1182
5.2.76 (EN_NACC) - (EN_NACC)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules EN_NACC EN_NACC
Enables the Network Assisted Cell Change feature. 0: disabled; 1:enabled Can be enabled only if round_trip_delay < 500 msecWhen cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then EN_NACC = 0 Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
861 / 1182
5.2.77 (EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR) - (EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR
Indicates whether or not outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered from the serving cell. 0: Outgoing GPRS redirections are not triggered1: Outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = Enable), it is up to the operator to ensure that at least one NC cell reselection cause is always triggered upon receipt of the first Packet Measurement Report message. For instance, NC cell reselection Cause PT1 can be always activated by setting NC_DL_RXLEV_THR to -47 dBm (Always). Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: ? ??? An outgoing GPRS redirection is a NC cell reselection which is triggered when the MS enters the packet transfer mode in the serving cell even if the radio link is good. The intention of GPRS redirections is to redirect the MS towards a target cell more appropriate to carry PS traffic (for instance a macro cell). No No
862 / 1182
5.2.78 (EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR(n)) (EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR(n) EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR(n)
Indicates whether or not outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered from the serving cell. 0: Disable Outgoing GPRS redirections are not triggered1: Enable Outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = Enable), it is up to the operator to ensure that at least one NC cell reselection cause is always triggered upon receipt of the first Packet Measurement Report message. For instance, NC cell reselection Cause PT1 can be always activated by setting NC_DL_RXLEV_THR to -47 dBm (Always). Site (CAE) Flag MFS adj Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: ? ??? An outgoing GPRS redirection is a NC cell reselection which is triggered when the MS enters the packet transfer mode in the serving cell even if the radio link is good. The intention of GPRS redirections is to redirect the MS towards a target cell more appropriate to carry PS traffic (for instance a macro cell). No No
863 / 1182
5.2.79 (EN_PFC_FEATURE) - (EN_PFC_FEATURE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_PFC_FEATURE EN_PFC_FEATURE
Enables/disables the support of the PFC negotiation feature. 1 => PFC feature is supported, 0 => PFC feature is not supported Site (CAE) Flag MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Any modification of the parameter leads the MFS to reset autonomously all the GPUs connected to this BSS. No No
864 / 1182
5.2.80 (EN_PSI_STATUS) - (EN_PSI_STATUS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_PSI_STATUS EN_PSI_STATUS
Enables the Packet SI Status feature in cells w/o PBCCH or the Packet PSI Status feature in cells with a PBCCH. 0: disabled; 1:enabled Can be enabled only if round_trip_delay < 500 msecWhen cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then EN_PSI_STATUS = 0 Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
865 / 1182
5.2.81 (EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE) - (EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE
Flag to enable/disable the Radio Acces Capability update on Gb 0: disabled, 1: enabled This parameter must be enabled if RA capability update is supported by SGSN and if it exists, at least, one cell where EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is enabled.The Extended UL TBF mode feature is completely effective only if the parameter EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE is set to enabled.If EN_STREAMING is set to 1 then EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE must also be set to 1 (enabled). Otherwise the BSS will not be able to handle streaming flow. If this rule is not respected then all PFC creation requests related to a streaming flow will be downgraded to the default best effort flow by the BSS. Site (CAE) Flag MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
866 / 1182
5.2.82 (EN_STREAMING) - (EN_STREAMING)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules EN_STREAMING EN_STREAMING
Enables/disables the support of the STREAMING flows. 1 => the cell supports the streaming flows in addition to the non real time flows (best effort, interactive, background) if EN_PFC_FEATURE = 1 and if the PFC feature negotiation with the SGSN is successful0 => the cell supports the non real time flows (best effort, interactive, background) if EN_PFC_FEATURE = 1 and if the PFC feature negotiation with the SGSN is successful - Can be enabled only if the BTS Generation = Evolium- If EN_STREAMING = 1 then MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD > 0When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then EN_STREAMING = 0 1) If this parameter is set to 1 then the parameter EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE must also be set to 1 (enabled). Otherwise the BSS will not be able to handle streaming flow. If this rule is not respected then all PFC creation requests related to a streaming flow will be downgraded to the default best effort flow by the BSS.2) the parameter EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK must also set to "TRUE" in order to activate the link adaptation mechanism so that the (M)CS can reach a suitable level regarding the level of the configured Rmin_(E)GPRS. Otherwise, the streaming PFCs can be downgraded to the Default Best Effort ABQP because the negotiated GBR cannot be reached on the radio interface. Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
867 / 1182
5.2.83 (Excess Burst Size) - (EBS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Excess Burst Size EBS
Excess Burst Size. CIR=0 <=> CBS=0 => EBS > 0CIR <= NIR <= CIR x (1 + EBS/CBS) <= ACCESS_RATE_BC EBS=FR_CAPACITY(expressed in kbit/s) / 8, if CIR=0 Site (CAE) Number MFS PVC Unit kbyte Minimum 0 Maximum 248 Default None
868 / 1182
5.2.84 (GAMMA_TNx) - (GAMMA_TNx)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules GAMMA_TNx GAMMA_TNx
Binary representation of the "gamma ch" for MS output power control. Coded on 5 bits, step size=2dB, with 00000 == 0 dB, 00001 == 2 dB, ... 11111 == 62 dB. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 62 Default 30
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Power Ctrl In the context of a concentric cell, the parameter applies to the outer zone. No No
869 / 1182
5.2.85 (Gb_Configuration_Type) - (Gb_Configuration_type)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Gb_Configuration_Type Gb_Configuration_type
Configuration type used with Gb over IP 0 : Static configuration 1: Dynamic configurationdefault value : 0 In a BSS in multi-GP/GPU configuration where Gb_Transport_Mode is IP, all the NSEs, having children IPendpoint(s), must have the same Gb_Configuration_Type. Site (CAE) Number MFS NSE Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Gb_Configuration type is significant only when Gb_Transport mode is IP.Parameter change: before any parameter modification, the operator has to delete the children SGSN IP endpoints. No No
870 / 1182
5.2.86 (Gb_Transport_Mode) - (Gb_Transport_Mode)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Gb_Transport_Mode Gb_Transport_Mode
Mode of the transport for Gb interface: FR or IP. 0: FR mode1: IP mode Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: When the NSE is not associated to a BSS, the Gb_Transport_Mode_perNSE defines the transport mode of the NSE.When the NSE is associated to a BSS, the transport mode of the BSS defines the transport mode of all NSEs of the BSS (the Gb_Transport_Mode - of the BSS - overrides the transport mode defined in the NSE instance). No No
871 / 1182
5.2.87 (Gb_Transport_Mode_per_NSE) - (Gb_Transport_Mode_per_NSE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Gb_Transport_Mode_per_NSE Gb_Transport_Mode_per_NSE
Mode of the transport for Gb interface (per NSE): FR or IP. 0: FR mode1: IP mode Site (CAE) Number MFS NSE Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: When the NSE is not associated to a BSS, the Gb_Transport_Mode_perNSE defines the transport mode of the NSE.When the NSE is associated to a BSS, the transport mode of the BSS defines the transport mode of all NSEs of the BSS (the Gb_Transport_Mode - of the BSS - overrides the transport mode defined in the NSE instance). No No
872 / 1182
5.2.88 (GCH_RED_FACTOR_HiAter) (GCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GCH_RED_FACTOR_HiAter GCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage
Reduction factor of the number of GCHs targeted per PDCH, when the Ater usage is "high". step size = 0.01 A low value of GCH_RED_Factor_High_Ater_Usage can be coherent with a high value of Ater_Usage_Threshold (it will avoid reaching the saturation point of 100% of the Ater resources used at the same moment in the GPU).Reciprocally, a high value of GCH_RED_Factor_High_Ater_Usage can be coherent with a low value of Ater_Usage_Threshold (it will limit the risks of wasting, i.e. of not using, Ater resources in the GPU). Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 1 Default 0.75
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: The GCH reduction factor applies to the new PDCHs which are used when the Ater usage is "high" (see the Ater_Usage_Threshold parameter). This parameter can be reduced in order to avoid Ater shortage situations. No No
873 / 1182
5.2.89 (GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS) (GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
Additional hysteresis which applies in Ready state for cells in same RA. step size = 2dB; coded on 3 bits. 000=0 dB, 001= 2 dB, 111=14 dB Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 14 Default 4
874 / 1182
5.2.90 (GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH
Maximum TX power level an MS may use when accessing the system. Coded on 5 bits from 0 to 31The coding depends on the BCCH frequency band:P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ..., 19: 5 dBm.GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39 dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm, 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dBm Minimum 5 Maximum 43 Default 43
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Master Channel 1/2 The default value depends on the BCCH frequency band:Default value for P-GSM/G1: 43 dBmDefault value for GSM850: 39 dBmDefault value for DCS1800: 30 dBmDefault value for DCS1900: 30 dBm No No
875 / 1182
5.2.91 (GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) (GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)
Maximum TX power level an MS may use when accessing the system. Coded on 5 bits from 0 to 31The coding depends on the BCCH frequency band:P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ..., 19: 5 dBm.GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39 dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm, 19: 5 dBm.DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm, 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm. Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit dBm Minimum 5 Maximum 43 Default 43
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: No Edit External Cell / Packet The default value depends on the BCCH frequency band:Default value for P-GSM/G1: 43 dBmDefault value for GSM850: 39 dBmDefault value for DCS1800: 30 dBmDefault value for DCS1900: 30 dBm No No
876 / 1182
5.2.92 (GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE) (GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE
Default value of the (E)GPRS multislot class assumed at TBF establishment when the actual MS (E)GPRS multislot class is unknown.- In an Evolium BTS : The default MS class is used as an input of the best candidate TBF allocation computation process when the MS class is not known on UL TBF establishment- In a Non Evolium BTS : The default MS class is used as an input of the best candidate TBF allocation computation process when the MS class is not known on UL TBF establishment.In the PDCH anticipation process on UL TBF establishment : the default MS class is used to determine how many PDCHs are established in advance to anticipate the concurrent DL TBF establishment. Only the following GPRS multislot class defined in 3GPP TS 05.02 annex B are allowed: 1: GPRS multislot class 1 (1+1 MS);2: GPRS multislot class 2 (2+1 MS);4: GPRS multislot class 4 (3+1 MS);8: GPRS multislot class 8 (4+1 MS).30: GPRS multislot class 30 (5+1 MS).
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
877 / 1182
Recommended rules
The recommendations to set this parameter are the following:1) Case where there are only Evolium BTSs in the BSS:1.1) In case the PS traffic is mainly signalling (e.g. there is a great proportion of RA Updates among the UL TBF establishment requests), GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE shall be set to 1 (optimization of the number of T2 TBF reallocations and of PPC / DSP CPU). 1.2) In case the PS traffic is mainly data (high proportion of UL TBF establishment requests for data traffic), GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE should be set to the most common multislot class which can be found among the mobile stations within the BSS (in order to limit the number of T2 TBF reallocations and of PPC / DSP CPU, triggered with the establishment of the concurrent DL TBF). In case of multislot class 30, this additionally requires that the multislot class 30-33 feature is widely activated in the BSS.2) Case where there are some DRFU BTSs in the BSS (together with some Evolium BTSs or not):2.1) In DRFU BTSs, the impacts of this parameter value on T2 TBF reallocations are the same as in Evolium BTSs, so 1.1) and 1.2) recommendations are applicable in order to avoid useless / to limit the number of T2 TBF reallocations .2.2) On the other hand, in DRFU BTSs, in case the PS traffic is mainly signalling (e.g. there is a great proportion of RA Updates among the UL TBF establishment requests) and in case of low number of Ater resources (risk of Ater congestion in some GPUs), it is recommended to set GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE to 1. Indeed, an Ater congestion may be encountered because some transmission resources (PDCHs) are established in advance by RRM based on the value of GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE (PDCH anticipation process). Once the traffic type is confirmed signalling, these resources (PDCHs) are released, but at T_GCH_Inactivity timer expiry. As a consequence, the transmission resources (PDCHs) can be established even if they are not used during several seconds, which can generate an Ater congestion in some GPUs. Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 30 Default 8
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / GPRS / General
878 / 1182
External Comment
The entered value is assumed by default at uplink TBF establishment when the actual MS multislot class is unknown (e.g. RACH one phase access on CCCH) . Otherwise, the multislot class received in the request for uplink TBF establishment is taken into account.In case the traffic is mainly signalling (majority of RA Updates), Ater congestion may be encountered because the transmission resources are allocated in advance, based on the value of GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE parameter. Indeed, once the traffic type is confirmed signalling, these resources are de-allocated, but only at T_PDCH_Inactivity timer expiry. As a consequence, in this case, the transmission resources are allocated even if they are not used during several seconds. Therefore it is advised to reduce the value of the default multislot class to 1. No No
879 / 1182
5.2.93 (GPRS_PENALTY_TIME) - (GPRS_PENALTY_TIME(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GPRS_PENALTY_TIME GPRS_PENALTY_TIME(n)
Time during which GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET is active in neighbour cells. step size = 10 sec, coded on 5 bits (00000 = 10 sec, 11111 = 320 sec) Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit sec Minimum 10 Maximum 320 Default 10
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Master Channel 2/2 (+ Edit External Cell / Packet) No No
880 / 1182
5.2.94 (GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET) (GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET(n)
Permanent offset for GPRS cell reselection in neighbour cells. coded on 5 bits (00000 = -52 dB, 11111 = 48 dB)00000= -52; 00001= -48; 00010= -44; 00011= -40; 00100= -36; 00101= -32; 00110= -28; 00111= -24; 01000= -20; 01001= -16; 01010= -12; 01011= -10; 01100= - 8; 01101= - 6; 01110= - 4; 01111= - 2; 10000= 0; 10001= 2; 10010= 4; 10011= 6; 10100= 8; 10101=10; 10110= 12; 10111= 16; 11000= 20; 11001= 24; 11010= 28; 11011= 32; 11100= 36; 11101= 40; 11110= 44; 11111= 48 Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit dB Minimum -52 Maximum 48 Default 0
881 / 1182
5.2.95 (GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
Minimum received level at the MS required for access to the system. step size = 1 dBm, coded on 6 bits (000000 = -110 dBm, 111111 = -47 dBm) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -100
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Master Channel 1/2 (+ Edit Cell / GPRS / Master Channel 2/2) No No
882 / 1182
5.2.96 (GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)
Minimum received level at the MS required for access to the system in neighbour cells. coded on 6 bits, 0=-110 dBm, 63=-47 dBm, step size=1dBm Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -100
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Adjacencies No No
883 / 1182
5.2.97 (GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET) (GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n)
Negative offset used for MS cell reselection process in neighbour cells. Possible values : 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, infinity respectively binary coded as 000, 001, , 111 Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum infinity Default 0
Coding rules
884 / 1182
5.2.98 (GPU_Gb_Base_IP) - (GPU_Gb_Base_IP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GPU_Gb_Base_IP GPU_Gb_Base_IP
Base address of the local IP address used to define the Gb_IP_Address of each GPU. coded on 32 bitscoded as follow in 4 groups of 8bits: 255.255.255.000The last group is set to 000 (base address) Site (CAE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4294967295 Default 0
Coding rules
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Base address used to define the GPU_Local_IP_Endpoint No No
885 / 1182
5.2.99 (GPU_Gb_Base_UDP) - (GPU_Gb_Base_UDP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value GPU_Gb_Base_UDP GPU_Gb_Base_UDP
UDP port number of the GPU board for Gb over IP interface. Site (CAE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 63488 Maximum 64512 Default 64512
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: used to define the UDP port of each GPU boards No No
886 / 1182
5.2.100 (GPU_Gb_IP_Address) - (GPU_Gb_IP_Address)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GPU_Gb_IP_Address GPU_Gb_IP_Address
Allows to display the IP address used by a GPU board in a NSE instance (used for Gb over IP) coded on 32 bitsOMC must display the value of each octet following the format: www.xxx.yyy.zzzdefault value : 0.0.0.0 Site (CAE) Number MFS GPU Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4294967295 Default 0
Coding rules
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Calculated by the MFS from the GPU_Gb_Base_IP value. No No
887 / 1182
5.2.101 (GPU_Gb_UDP_Port) - (GPU_Gb_UDP_Port)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition GPU_Gb_UDP_Port GPU_Gb_UDP_Port
UDP port number of the GPU board in the NSE instance (used for Gb over IP). Site (CAE) Number MFS GPU Unit None Minimum 63488 Maximum 64512 Default 64512
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: equal to GPU_Gb_base_UDP. No No
888 / 1182
5.2.102 (HCS_THR) - (GPRS_HCS_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules HCS_THR GPRS_HCS_THR
HCS signal strength. Coded on 5 bits. 00000=-110 dBm, 00001=-108 dBm, 11111=-48 dBm Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -48 Default -84
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Master Channel 2/2 No No
889 / 1182
5.2.103 (HCS_THR) - (GPRS_HCS_THR(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules HCS_THR GPRS_HCS_THR(n)
HCS signal strength. Coded on 5 bits. 00000=-110 dBm, 00001=-108 dBm, 11111=-48 dBm Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -48 Default -84
890 / 1182
5.2.104 (HIGH_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY) (HIGH_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition HIGH_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY HIGH_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY
Defines the relative priority used for Background Packet Flow Context, with precedence parameter set to high Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 4 Maximum 15 Default 15
891 / 1182
5.2.105 (HIGH_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY) (HIGH_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition HIGH_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY HIGH_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY
Defines the relative priority used for Interactive THP1 Packet Flow Context, with precedence parameter set to high Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 4 Maximum 15 Default 6
892 / 1182

893 / 1182

894 / 1182
5.2.108 (HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS) - (HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS
Load threshold used to determine a certain margin of radio timeslots reserved for CS traffic between two sending of the BSCGP RR Allocation Indication messages. The threshold is expressed in percentage of the radio timeslots available in the cell. Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 90
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: GPR Edit Cell / GPRS / General groups The margin of radio timeslots reserved for CS traffic can be computed as follows:(100 - HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS)/100*NB_TSwhere NB_TS is the number of radio timeslots available in the cell. No
Cell Type Dependent
895 / 1182
5.2.109 (IP_Address) - (SGSN_IP_Address)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules IP_Address SGSN_IP_Address
IP address of the SGSN IP endpoint used for Gb over IP coded on 32 bitsOMC must display the value of each octet following the format:www.xxx.yyy.zzzdefault value is 0.0.0.0 Each SGSN IP EndPoint (SGSN_IP_Address, SGSN_UDP_Port) must be unique per NSE Site (CAE) Number MFS SGSN-IPEndPoint Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4294967295 Default 0
Mandatory rules
896 / 1182
5.2.110 (IPGB_SUBNET_MASK_MFS) - (IPGB_SUBNET_MASK_MFS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition IPGB_SUBNET_MASK_MFS IPGB_SUBNET_MASK_MFS
Mask of the subnet where is allocated the range of MFS addresses used forGb telecom protocols coded on 32 bitscoded as follow in 4 groups of 8bits: 255.255.255.255default value : 0.0.0.0 Site (CAE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4294967295 Default 0
Coding rules
897 / 1182
5.2.111 (LAC) - (LAC (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules LAC LAC (MFS)
Location Area Code. LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same timeEqual to LAC (BSC)A couple of mate extended cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall have the same LAC Site (CAE) Reference MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 65535 Default 65535
External Comment
898 / 1182
5.2.112 (LAC) - (LAC(n)(MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules LAC LAC(n)(MFS)
Location Area Code. LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same time.Equal to LAC(n)(BSC) Site (CAE) Reference MFS adj Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 65535 Default 65535
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No Adjacencies Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
899 / 1182
5.2.113 (Level 1 down) - (PVC_Level1_down)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Level 1 down PVC_Level1_down
This parameter gives the low level of threshold for congestion. Site (CAE) Number MFS PVC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 40
OMC Changes: MFS RNO Changes: No MFSUSM / GB Configuration / Create NSVC No No
900 / 1182
5.2.114 (Level 1 Factor) - (PVC_Level1_Factor)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Level 1 Factor PVC_Level1_Factor
This parameter is used to calculate the amount of data used for buffering. step size = 0.01 amount of memory needed : PVC_Level1_factor * 10 * (CBS+EBS) for a PVC Site (CAE) Number MFS PVC Unit None Minimum 0.05 Maximum 12.75 Default 1
901 / 1182
5.2.115 (Level 1 up) - (PVC_Level1_up)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Level 1 up PVC_Level1_up
This parameter gives the high level of threshold for congestion. Site (CAE) Number MFS PVC Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 70
902 / 1182
5.2.116 (LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS) - (LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS
Number of load samples (calculated every TCH_INFO_PERIOD seconds) used to compute the maximum number of slave PDCHs that the BSC can allocate to the MFS. Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit None Minimum 3 Maximum 30 Default 3
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: GPR Edit Cell / GPRS / Radio Resource Control No No
903 / 1182
5.2.117 (LOW_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY) (LOW_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LOW_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY LOW_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY
Defines the relative priority used for Background Packet Flow Context, with precedence parameter set to low Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 4 Maximum 15 Default 15
904 / 1182
5.2.118 (LOW_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY) (LOW_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LOW_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY LOW_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY
Defines the relative priority used for Interactive THP1 Packet Flow Context, with precedence parameter set to low Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 4 Maximum 15 Default 6
905 / 1182

906 / 1182

907 / 1182
5.2.121 (MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH) - (MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH
Indicative value of the maximum number of DownLink (E)GPRS TBFs per Slave PDCH. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 10 Default 8
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No When allocating a DL GPRS TBF: MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH is the maximum number of GPRS + EGPRS TBFs allowed in DL on each Slave PDCH. When allocating a DL EGPRS TBF: MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH is the maximum number of EGPRS TBFs allowed in DL on each Slave PDCH (regardless of the current number of DL GPRS TBFs). No No
908 / 1182
5.2.122 (MAX_EGPRS_MCS) - (MAX_EGPRS_MCS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_EGPRS_MCS MAX_EGPRS_MCS
Maximum Modulation and Coding Scheme used for EGPRS traffic in the cell. 0: MCS-1; 1: MCS-2; 2: MCS-3; 3: MCS-4;4: MCS-5; 5: MCS-6;6: MCS-7; 7: MCS-8;8: MCS-9; MAX_EGPRS_MCS >= TBF_DL_INIT_MCSMAX_EGPRS_MCS >= TBF_UL_INIT_MCSWhen cell_type = "extended outer", then MAX_EGPRS_MCS <= MCS-4 R_AVERAGE_EGPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the useful bitrate corresponding to MAX_EGPRS_MCS (e.g. if MAX_EGPRS_MCS = MCS9 => R_AVERAGE_EGPRS shall not be higher than 59,2kbps).R_MIN_EGPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the useful bitrate corresponding to Max_EGPRS_MCS. If the above recommended rule is not fulfilled, then some RT PFCs can be accepted by the BSS whereas it will not be possible to handle their associated GBR. This may result in RT PFC downgrades to Best Effort.It is advised to set MAX_EGPRS_MCS to a value different from MCS-2 to cope with MEGCH control message granularity in an optimal way.For consistency reasons, MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL and MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL shall NOT be higher than any of the MAX_EGPRS_MCS values defined in the cells of the MFS. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 9 Default 9
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: ? Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Description No No
909 / 1182
5.2.123 (MAX_GPRS_CS) - (MAX_GPRS_CS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules MAX_GPRS_CS MAX_GPRS_CS
Maximum coding scheme used for GPRS traffic in the cell. 1 : CS-2; 2 : CS-3; 3 : CS-4 MAX_GPRS_CS >= TBF_DL_INIT_CSMAX_GPRS_CS >= TBF_UL_INIT_CSIf Max_PDCH = 0 then MAX_GPRS_CS = CS-2.The aim of this last rule is to prevent the BSC to trigger uselessly the algorithms of adjust ranking and transmission pool set up (lead time and outage) for CS3 and CS4, in case Max_PDCH = 0 (i.e. GPRS is not allowed) R_AVERAGE_GPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the useful bitrate corresponding to MAX_GPRS_CS (e.g. if MAX_GPRS_CS = CS2 => R_AVERAGE_GPRS shall not be higher than 12kbps)R_MIN_GPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the useful bitrate corresponding to Max_GPRS_CS. If the above recommended rule is not fulfilled, then some RT PFCs can be accepted by the BSS whereas it will not be possible to handle their associated GBR. This may result in RT PFC downgrades to Best Effort.For consistency reasons, MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL and MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL shall NOT be higher than any of the MAX_GPRS_CS values defined in the cells of the MFS. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 2 Maximum 4 Default 2
Recommended rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / General groups CS-3 and CS-4 are supported on Evolium BTS only. No No
910 / 1182
5.2.124 (MAX_PAGING_QUEUE) - (MAX_PAGING_QUEUE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value MAX_PAGING_QUEUE MAX_PAGING_QUEUE
Maximum number of CS+PS paging messages stored in GPU. Paging Rate = 100 paging/s AND Queueing Time = 5s Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 50 Maximum 1000 Default 500
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / GPRS / General No No
911 / 1182
5.2.125 (MAX_PDCH) - (MAX_PDCH (MFS))

Management of Enable_GPRS Flag (Cell Parameter)
This flag exists in the BSC and is managed by the OMC-R but it is not visible to the operator. It is derived by the OMC-R from the value of Max_PDCH. When the Enable_GPRS flag is set to true, it means that the BSC can accept MFS requests for a certain cell. In some circumstances, there can be some inconsistencies, but these might not have any impact: When the BSS is discovered by the OMC-R, the MFS parameters are set to their default value by the OMC-R. Max_PDCH is set to 0. (There may be inconsistency at system level, but no impact.) Later, if the operator installs GPRS, he has to download the radio configuration to the MFS. Through this operation, the flag Enable_GPRS is recomputed for the cells concerned by the PRC, and therefore downloaded to the BSC. All data is then in line for the cells concerned by the PRC. It can occur that some cells remain with Enable_GPRS set to true and Max_PDCH set to 0 but this does no harm at all (no impact on the traffic, and not visible by the operator). Any DLS restore must be followed by the following procedure to line-up the EN_GPRS of the cells handled by this BSC with the Max_PDCH of these cells currently stored in the OMC-R: 1. Copy the SC into the PRC 2. Activate this PRC Until the synchronization is achieved, the cell cannot be set into service for GPRS by the telecom application (there is no impact if the cell is already started for GPRS). Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_PDCH MAX_PDCH (MFS)
Creation of a BSC
DLS Restore When the Flag is Not In Lline With Max_PDCH
Maximum number of slave and master PDCHs that can be allocated to the MFS in the cell.
Coding rules
912 / 1182
Mandatory rules
Max_PDCH >= MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD;If MAX_PDCH > 0 then EN_GPRS = TRUE ; If MAX_PDCH = 0 then EN_GPRS = FALSE;If MAX_PDCH = 0 then EN_EGPRS = FALSE;If EN_VGCS= enabled, then "(MAX_VGCS_TS + MAX_PDCH) < Total number of TCHs of the cell"If Max_PDCH = 0 then MAX_GPRS_CS = CS-2.The aim of this rule is to prevent the BSC to trigger uselessly the algorithms of adjust ranking and transmission pool set up (lead time and outage) for CS3 and CS4, in case Max_PDCH = 0 (i.e. GPRS is not allowed)MAX_PDCH shall be set so that at least one slave PDCH can be allocated to the MFS to serve DL or UL TBFs. This means that MAX_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_GPRS = TRUE.When Max_PDCH > 0 and cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then MAX_PDCH shall be an even number.The following conditions are verified by the OMC-R in order to check the upper limit of MAX_PDCH:i) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) - 1 if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "1: CCCH combined"ii) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) - 2 if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "0: CCCH not combined"iii) MAX_PDCH <= NB_TS_MPDCH + 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRXiv) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK=0) - 3 if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = 2 In a micro cell, the operator may be interested to force the MS to reselect a macro cell by a correct setting of the cell reselection parameters broadcast on PBCCH (without using NC cell reselections, i.e. when EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR is set to 0 and NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to NC0 in the micro cell). In this case, the following configuration is recommended: NB_TS_MPDCH = 1, MAX_PDCH = 2, MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD = 1, MIN_PDCH = 1. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 127 Default 0
Recommended rules
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Radio Resource Control 127 is a theoretical value : 16 TRX * 8 PDCH - BCCH.To support LCS in a cell, it is mandatory to have Max_PDCH > 0 No No
913 / 1182
5.2.126 (MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD) - (MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD (MFS)
Maximum number of slave and master PDCHs that can be allocated to the MFS when the CS traffic is high. - MAX_PDCH >= MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOADMAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD >= MIN_PDCH- If EN_DTM = 1 then MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD > 1 Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 127 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Radio Resource Control 127 is a theoretical value: 16 TRX * 8 PDCH - BCCH. No No
914 / 1182
5.2.127 (MAX_PDCH_PER_TBF) - (MAX_PDCH_PER_TBF)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_PDCH_PER_TBF MAX_PDCH_PER_TBF
Maximum number of PDCHs allocated to a single (E)GPRS connection. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 5 Default 5
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: GPR Edit Cell / GPRS / Radio Resource Control No No
915 / 1182
5.2.128 (MAX_RETRANS) - (Max_retrans (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_RETRANS Max_retrans (MFS)
Maximum number of CHANNEL REQUEST retransmissions by the MS on the RACH, broadcast on the PBCCH for CS service establishment. Possible values are:1, 2 ,4 and 7 respectively binary coded:00, 01, 10 and 11 Max_retrans (BSC) = Max_retrans (MFS) for a given cell Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 7 Default 2
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: PAG Edit Cell / Cell Information / RACH Ctrl The bigger this parameter is, the lesser the MS power consumption is. No No
916 / 1182
5.2.129 (MAX_RETRANS_1) - (MAX_RETRANS_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_RETRANS_1 MAX_RETRANS_1
Maximum number of PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST retransmissions by the MS on the PRACH with priority level 1. Possible values are : 1, 2, 4, 7 respectively binary coded : 00, 01, 10, 11 Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 7 Default 2
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Master channel 1/2 No No
917 / 1182

Coding rules
918 / 1182

Coding rules
919 / 1182

Coding rules
920 / 1182
5.2.133 (MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH) - (MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH
Indicative value of maximum number of UpLink (E)GPRS TBFs per slave PDCH. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 6 Default 5
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No When allocating an UL GPRS TBF: MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH is the maximum number of GPRS + EGPRS TBFs allowed in UL on each Slave PDCH. When allocating an UL EGPRS TBF: MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH is the maximum number of EGPRS TBFs allowed in UL on each Slave PDCH (regardless of the current number of UL GPRS TBFs). No No
921 / 1182
5.2.134 (MIN_PDCH) - (MIN_PDCH (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MIN_PDCH MIN_PDCH (MFS)
Minimum number of master and slave PDCHs that are always allocated to the MFS. -MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD >= MIN_PDCH;-MIN_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = enabled;-MIN_PDCH >= NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = disabled.-When MIN_PDCH > 0 and cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then MIN_PDCH shall be an even number It is recommended to set this parameter to a value smaller than the maximum number of PDCHs that may be allocated in the cell, in order to avoid congestion on the MFS-BSC interface. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 127 Default 0
Recommended rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Radio Resource Control 127 is a theoretical value : 16 TRX * 8 PDCH - BCCH. No No
922 / 1182
5.2.135 (Mobile Country Code (MCC)) - (MCC (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Mobile Country Code (MCC) MCC (MFS)
Mobile Country Code of the own PLMN. 3 digits BCD The OMC-R shall ensure that the following rules are always fulfilled:MCC (BSC) = MCC (MFS).- The cells belonging to the same BSC shall have the same (MCC,MNC) couple.- The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells internal to the OMC-R shall be selected from the set of own PLMNs.- The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells external to the OMC-R can be selected from the set of own or foreign PLMNs. Site (CAE) Reference MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 999 Default 999
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No Customer BUL file The value depends on the configuration. The default value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
923 / 1182
5.2.136 (Mobile Network Code (MNC)) - (MNC (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Mobile Network Code (MNC) MNC (MFS)
Mobile Network Code of the own PLMN. 3 digits BCD The OMC-R shall ensure that the following rules are always fulfilled:MNC (BSC) = MNC (MFS).- The cells belonging to the same BSC shall have the same (MCC,MNC) couple.- The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells internal to the OMC-R shall be selected from the set of own PLMNs.- The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells external to the OMC-R can be selected from the set of own or foreign PLMNs. Site (CAE) Reference MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 999 Default 999
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No Customer BUL file The value depends on configuration. The default value indicated here is for implementation purposes.The operator is allowed to enter 2 or 3 digits MNC.MNC such as yz or Fyz correspond to a 2 digits MNC (y, z = 0..9). (F binary coded 1111)MNC such as xyz correspond to a 3 digits MNC (x = 0..9). No No
924 / 1182
5.2.137 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH (MFS)
Maximum transmission power an MS is allowed to use when accessing the cell until otherwise commanded, broadcast on PBCCH for CS service establishment. P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ..., 19: 5 dBm.GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39 dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm, 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dBm Minimum 5 Maximum 43 Default 43
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: HPC Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Selection The default value depends on the BCCH frequency band:Default value for P-GSM/G1: 43 dBmDefault value for GSM850: 39 dBmDefault value for DCS1800: 30 dBmDefault value for DCS1900: 30 dBm No No
925 / 1182
5.2.138 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)(MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)(MFS)
Maximum transmission power an MS is allowed to use when accessing the cell until otherwise commanded, broadcast on PBCCH for CS service establishment. P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ..., 19: 5 dBm.GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39 dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm, 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm. Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit dBm Minimum 5 Maximum 43 Default 43
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No Edit External Cell/ Packet2/2 The default value depends on the BCCH frequency band:Default value for P-GSM/G1: 43 dBmDefault value for GSM850: 39 dBmDefault value for DCS1800: 30 dBmDefault value for DCS1900: 30 dBm No No
926 / 1182
5.2.139 (N_AVG_I (BSC)) - (N_AVG_I (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N_AVG_I (BSC) N_AVG_I (BSC)
N_AVG_I (BSC) value is broadcast to the (E)GPRS MS in the SI13. The (E)GPRS MS uses it for filtering the interference signal level measurements that it shall perform during the packet transfer mode. These measurements are used by the (E)GPRS MS for output power control, but also reported to the network and used for performing downlink link adaptation. coded on 4 bits Equal to N_AVG_I (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 15 Default 6
927 / 1182
5.2.140 (N_AVG_I (MFS)) - (N_AVG_I (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N_AVG_I (MFS) N_AVG_I (MFS)
N_AVG_I (MFS) value is broadcast to the (E)GPRS MS in the PSI 13 and PSI1. The (E)GPRS MS uses it for filtering the interference signal level measurements that it shall perform during the packet transfer mode. These measurements are used by the (E)GPRS MS for output power control, but also reported to the network and used for performing downlink link adaptation. coded on 4 bits Equal to N_AVG_I (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 15 Default 6
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Master Ch. 1/2. No No
928 / 1182
5.2.141 (N3101_LIMIT) - (N3101_LIMIT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N3101_LIMIT N3101_LIMIT
In an UL TBF tranfer procedure, maximum of consecutive times (before releasing abnormally the UL TBF) when the network receives no valid UL RLC data block or nothing from the MS on its allocated PDCH.To note that the counter N3101 can be incremented more than one time per block period. Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 10 Maximum 64 Default 64
929 / 1182
5.2.142 (N3101_POLLING_THR) - (N3101_POLLING_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N3101_POLLING_THR N3101_POLLING_THR
Threshold on the counter N3101 above which the RLC layer shall start sending polling request to a MS for an UL TBF in EUTM mode when EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is set ot 2 (IEUTM enabled). step size = 1 This parameter should be equal to N3101_LIMIT / 4. Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 3 Maximum 16 Default 16
930 / 1182
5.2.143 (N3103_LIMIT) - (N3103_LIMIT)

In an UL TBF releasing procedure, maximum of consecutive times (before releasing abnormally the UL TBF) when the network does not receive a Packet Control Acknowledgement from the MS in response of its Packet UL ACK/NACK which specifies the end of the TBF. N3103_Limit: maximum number of retransmissions to release an UL TBFMax_Retrans_DL: maximum number of retransmissions to establish a DL TBFIn case of simultaneous UL TBF Release and DL TBF establishment with loss of the Packet Control Ack which acknowledges the final Packet UL Ack/Nack, the UL TBF has to be released, at least before the last attempt to establish the DL TBF, in order to avoid the emission of a Radio Status.Consequently the following rule has to be followed:(N3103_Limit + 1) x (RTD + 60) < Max_Retrans_DL x (RTD + 60)N3103_Limit + 1: total number of attempts to send the final Packet UL Ack/NackRTD: Round Trip Delay60 (msec): for the Packet UL Ack/Nack acknowledgement: RRBP + 3 is usedMax_Retrans_DL: total number of attempts minus one to send the Packet DL Assignment60 (msec): for the Packet DL Assignment acknowledgement: RRBP + 3 is usedN3103_Limit < (Max_Retrans_DL x (RTD + 60) / (RTD + 60)) - 1N3103_Limit < [Max_Retrans_DL] - 1Example:With Max_Retrans_DL = 3: N3103_Limit < 2 that is N3103_Limit = 1 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 16 Default 1
931 / 1182
5.2.144 (N3105_LIMIT) - (N3105_LIMIT)

For a DL GPRS TBF, if the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis terrestrial link and Ater terrestrial link, this parameter defines the maximum number of expected Packet Downlink ACK/NACK or Packet Control Acknowledgement messages consecutively lost on the radio interface, before triggering an abnormal release of the DL TBF. This parameter is used in conjunction with the MIN_RLF_TIME_DL delay to decide if the DL TBF shall be released. Site (CAE) Threshold MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 64 Default 20
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No If N3105_LIMIT < TBF_CS_DL then the loss of consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation but TBF release. N3105_Limit has to be set in order not to release a DL TBF in case of transient bad radio conditions. The polling frequency depends on GPRS_DL_Ack_Period, T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport, MS multislot class and on the number of TBFs per PDCH. No No
932 / 1182
5.2.145 (N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE) - (N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE
For a DL GPRS TBF, if the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis satellite link or Ater satellite link, this parameter defines the maximum number of expected Packet Downlink ACK/NACK or Packet Control Acknowledgement messages consecutively lost on the radio interface, before triggering an abnormal release of the DL TBF. This parameter is used in conjunction with the MIN_RLF_TIME_DL delay to decide if the DL TBF shall be released. Site (CAE) Threshold MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 64 Default 24
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No If N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE < TBF_CS_DL then the loss of consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation but TBF release. N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE has to be set in order not to release a DL TBF in case of transient bad radio conditions. The polling frequency depends on GPRS_DL_Ack_Period_Satellite, T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport, MS multislot class and on the number of TBFs per PDCH. No No
933 / 1182
5.2.146 (NB_TS_MPDCH) - (NB_TS_MPDCH (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NB_TS_MPDCH NB_TS_MPDCH (BSC)
Number of radio timeslots reserved for the primary and secondary master PDCHs defined in the cell. 1) MIN_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = enabled; MIN_PDCH >= NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = disabled.2) if the network_operation_mode (BSC) parameter is set to 2 (NMO II) then all cells of the BSS must have NB_TS_MPDCH = 03)The following conditions are verified by the OMC-R in order to check the upper limit of MAX_PDCH:i) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) - 1 if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "1: CCCH combined"ii) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) - 2 if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "0: CCCH not combined"iii) MAX_PDCH <= NB_TS_MPDCH + 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRX.4) When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then NB_TS_MPDCH = 0 Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Master Ch 1/2
934 / 1182
External Comment
The Master PDCH requires the establishment of a GCH (Abis and Ater) which does not carry traffic. In case of Abis or Ater through satellite link, the usage of the MPDCH must consider the following criteria:* higher cost of transmission resources through the satellite link;* limited throughput of the RSL in case of Abis through satellite to about 6 kbit/s (because of round trip delay effect on acknowledged protocol with limited LAP-D window size). In case of important CS signalling load, the RSL may not be able to transport the additional signalling load due toTBF establishments when no MPDCH is established.Hence the recommendation in the GPRS through satellite case is:* for a cell connected with Abis through satellite and with non negligible signalling load (CS+PS), MPDCH is recommended;* for a cell connected with Ater through satellite, MPDCH is not recommended. No No
935 / 1182
5.2.147 (NB_TS_MPDCH) - (NB_TS_MPDCH (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NB_TS_MPDCH NB_TS_MPDCH (MFS)
Number of radio timeslots reserved for the primary and secondary master PDCHs defined in the cell. 1) MIN_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = enabled;MIN_PDCH >= NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = disabled.2) if the network_operation_mode (MFS) parameter is set to 2 (NMO II) then all cells of the BSS must have NB_TS_MPDCH = 0.3)The following conditions are verified by the OMC-R in order to check the upper limit of MAX_PDCH:i) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) - 1 if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "1: CCCH combined"ii) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) - 2 if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "0: CCCH not combined"iii) MAX_PDCH <= NB_TS_MPDCH + 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRX.4) When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then NB_TS_MPDCH = 0 Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Master Ch 1/2
936 / 1182
External Comment
The Master PDCH requires the establishment of a GCH (Abis and Ater) which does not carry traffic. In case of Abis or Ater through satellite link, the usage of the MPDCH must consider the following criteria:* higher cost of transmission resources through the satellite link;* limited throughput of the RSL in case of Abis through satellite to about 6 kbit/s (because of round trip delay effect on acknowledged protocol with limited LAP-D window size). In case of important CS signalling load, the RSL may not be able to transport the additional signalling load due toTBF establishments when no MPDCH is established.Hence the recommendation in the GPRS through satellite case is:* for a cell connected with Abis through satellite and with non negligible signalling load (CS+PS), MPDCH is recommended;* for a cell connected with Ater through satellite, MPDCH is not recommended. No No
937 / 1182
5.2.148 (NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR) - (NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR
Threshold below which a NC cell reselection Cause PT2 can be triggered due to the detection of a better neighbour cell. 0: "-110 dBm (Never)", 1:" -109 dBm", ...,63: "-47 dBm (Always)" (step size = 1 dB) In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = Enable), it is recommended to deactivate NC cell reselection Cause PT2 (i.e. set NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR to -110 dBm (Never). The aim of this recommended rule is to limit the conditions triggering a GPRS redirection. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -47
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Resel. 1) The specific value of "-110 dBm (Never)" deactivates the NC cell reselections Cause PT2.2) The specific value of "-47 dBm (Always)" systematically allows the triggering of NC cell reselections Cause PT2 No No
938 / 1182
5.2.149 (NC_DL_RXLEV_THR) - (NC_DL_RXLEV_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NC_DL_RXLEV_THR NC_DL_RXLEV_THR
Threshold below which a NC cell reselection Cause PT1 is triggered due to a too bad RXLEV in the downlink direction (while the MS is in packet transfer mode). 0: "-110 dBm (Never)", 1:" -109 dBm", ...,63: "-47 dBm" (step size = 1 dB) In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = Enable), it is recommended to activate NC cell reselection Cause PT1 (i.e. set NC_DL_RXLEV_THR to -47 dBm (Always). Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -96
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Resel. The specific value of "-110 dBm (Never)" deactivates the NC cell reselection Cause PT1. No No
939 / 1182
5.2.150 (NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR) - (NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR
Threshold above which a NC cell reselection Cause PT3 is triggered due to a too bad RXQUAL in downlink direction (while the MS is in packet transfer mode). step size = 0.1. At the OMC-R, the following values are displayed: "0", "0.1", "0.2", , "6.9", "7 (Never)". In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = Enable), it is recommended to deactivate NC cell reselection Cause PT3 (i.e. set NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR to 7 (Never). The aim of this recommended rule is to limit the conditions triggering a GPRS redirection. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 7
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Resel. The specific value of "7 (Never)" deactivates the NC cell reselection Cause PT3. No No
940 / 1182
5.2.151 (NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET) - (NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET
NC ping-pong offset which is applied to the C2 or C32 criterion to disfavour the neighbour cells during T_NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET. step size = 1 dB Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 63 Default 5
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Resel. No No
941 / 1182
5.2.152 (NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T) - (NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T
Reporting period of NC measurements reported by the MS while in packet transfer mode. coded from 0 to 7 (0 0 0 : 0.48 sec , 0 0 1: 0.96 sec , 0 1 0 : 1.92 sec , 0 1 1: 3.84 sec, 1 0 0 : 7.68 sec , 1 0 1 : 15.36 sec , 1 1 0: 30.72 sec , 1 1 1: 61.44 sec) . Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit sec Minimum 0.48 Maximum 61.44 Default 0.96
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit cell / Gprs / Reselection No No
942 / 1182
5.2.153 (NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T(n)) (NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T(n) NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T(n)
Reporting period of NC measurements reported by the MS while in packet transfer mode. coded from 0 to 7 (0 0 0 : 0.48 sec , 0 0 1: 0.96 sec , 0 1 0 : 1.92 sec , 0 1 1: 3.84 sec, 1 0 0 : 7.68 sec , 1 0 1 : 15.36 sec , 1 1 0: 30.72 sec , 1 1 1: 61.44 sec) . Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit sec Minimum 0.48 Maximum 61.44 Default 0.96
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit External cell / Packet 2/2 No No
943 / 1182
5.2.154 (NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS) (NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(0,n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(0,n)
NC cell reselection offset used for triggering power budget causes. 0: -127 dB (Always), 1: -126 dB, , 254: 127 dB, 255: 128 dB (Never) (step size = 1 dB) Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit dB Minimum -127 Maximum 128 Default 128
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit adjacency / Adjacency parameters View / outgoing 1) The specific value of "128 dB (Never)" deactivates the NC cell reselection Cause PT2 towards the target cell n.2) The specific value of "-127 dB" (Always)" systematically triggers the NC cell reselection Cause PT2 towards the target cell n. No No
944 / 1182
5.2.155 (NC_RXLEV_FORGETTING_FACTOR) (NC_RXLEV_FORGETTING_FACTOR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NC_RXLEV_FORGETTING_FACTOR NC_RXLEV_FORGETTING_FACTOR
Forgetting factor of the filter used to average the NC measurements reported in the Packet Measurement Report messages. step size = 0.001 Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0.13
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Resel. This parameter applies to the serving cell and the neighbour cells. No No
945 / 1182
5.2.156 (NC_RXQUAL_AVG_PERIOD) - (NC_RXQUAL_AVG_PERIOD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NC_RXQUAL_AVG_PERIOD NC_RXQUAL_AVG_PERIOD
Period after which a weight of 0.9 s is applied to the current UL or DL RXQUAL samples in the averaging filter. step size = 20 ms Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit ms Minimum 20 Maximum 10000 Default 4000
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Resel. This parameter applies to the serving cell. No No
946 / 1182
5.2.157 (NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR) - (NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR
Threshold above which a NC cell reselection Cause PT4 is triggered due to a too bad RXQUAL in uplink direction (while the MS is in packet transfer mode). step size = 0.1. At the OMC-R, the following values are displayed: "0", "0.1", "0.2", , "6.9", "7 (Never)" In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = Enable), it is recommended to deactivate NC cell reselection Cause PT4 (i.e. set NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR to 7 (Never). The aim of this recommended rule is to limit the conditions triggering a GPRS redirection. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 7
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Resel. The specific value of "7 (Never)" deactivates the NC cell reselection Cause PT4. No No
947 / 1182
5.2.158 (NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE) - (NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE
NC2 deactivation mode. This parameter defines whether or not the Packet Measurement Order message with a Reset Command is sent at the end of a packet transfer. 0: "NC2 deactivation at the end of the packet transfer". A Packet Measurement Order message is sent to deactivate the NC2 mode at the end of the packet transfer.1: "NC2 deactivation at the expiry of the GMM Ready timer". No Packet Measurement Order message is sent to deactivate the NC2 mode. In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are not triggered systematically (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = Disable), the presence of the PBCCH is not mandatory. However, the following recommendations apply, depending on the presence of the PBCCH:If PBCCH is present, the NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE can be set to any value (at the end of the packet transfer mode or at the expiry of the GMM Ready timer) if the setting of the C32 parameters ensures that GPRS mobile stations do not camp in cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered.- If PBCCH is not present or PBCCH is present but C32 parameters are not correctly set, the NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE should be set to "at the expiry of the GMM Ready timer" to prevent the GPRS mobile stations from reselecting a cell where outgoing GPRS redirections are triggered systematically (at least while the MS is in packet idle mode and the GMM Ready timer is running). Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
948 / 1182
5.2.159 (NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER) (NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER
This parameter defines whether the MS or the BSS controls the cell reselections. 0: NC0 mode of operation for all MS. All MS controls their cell reselections an no MS reports packet measurements to the BSS.1: NC1 mode of operation for all MS. All MS controls their cell reselections but all the MS reports packet measurements to the BSS. (Not supported)2: NC2 mode of operation for R99 onwards MS. The BSS controls the cell reselections of R99 onwards MS when in packet transfer mode or of R99 onwards MS when in GMM Ready state (depending on the selected NC2 deactivation mode). While the NC2 mode is activated for the concerned MS, the MS reports packet measurements to the BSS.3: NC2 mode of operation for all MS. The BSS controls the cell reselections of all MS when in packet transfer mode or of all MS when in GMM Ready state (depending on the selected NC2 deactivation mode). While the NC2 mode is activated for the concerned MS, the MS reports packet measurements to the BSS.4: NC2 mode of operation for Rel.4 onwards MS. The BSS controls the cell reselections of Rel.4 onwards MS when in packet transfer mode or of Rel.4 onwards MS when in GMM Ready state (depending on the selected NC2 deactivation mode). While the NC2 mode is activated for the concerned MS, the MS reports packet measurements to the BSS. - The OMC-R only shows the values 0, 2, 3 and 4 to the operator.When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER = NC0 mode of operation for all MS Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4 Default 0
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No
949 / 1182
External Comment
If the NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "NC2 mode of operation for R99 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for all MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for Rel.4 onwards MS", then the 3G search is systematically deactivated when activating the NC2 mode (activation performed through the Packet Measurement Order [NC2] message). If EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION = "Enabled with 3G search activated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state, even if Network_Control_Order > 1", then the 3G search is activated even when activating the NC2 mode (the Packet Measurement Order [NC2] message will not be sent.) No No
950 / 1182
5.2.160 (NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER) (NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER(n)
This parameter defines whether the MS or the BSS controls the cell reselections. 0: NC0 mode of operation for all MS. All MS controls their cell reselections an no MS reports packet measurements to the BSS.1: NC1 mode of operation for all MS. All MS controls their cell reselections but all the MS reports packet measurements to the BSS. (Not supported)2: NC2 mode of operation for R99 onwards MS. The BSS controls the cell reselections of R99 onwards MS when in packet transfer mode or of R99 onwards MS when in GMM Ready state (depending on the selected NC2 deactivation mode). While the NC2 mode is activated for the concerned MS, the MS reports packet measurements to the BSS.3: NC2 mode of operation for all MS. The BSS controls the cell reselections of all MS when in packet transfer mode or of all MS when in GMM Ready state (depending on the selected NC2 deactivation mode). While the NC2 mode is activated for the concerned MS, the MS reports packet measurements to the BSS.4: NC2 mode of operation for Rel.4 onwards MS. The BSS controls the cell reselections of Rel.4 onwards MS when in packet transfer mode or of Rel.4 onwards MS when in GMM Ready state (depending on the selected NC2 deactivation mode). While the NC2 mode is activated for the concerned MS, the MS reports packet measurements to the BSS. - The OMC-R only shows the values 0, 2, 3 and 4 to the operator.When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", then NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER = NC0 mode of operation for all MS Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4 Default 0
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit External Cell / Packet 2/2
951 / 1182
External Comment
If the NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "NC2 mode of operation for R99 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for all MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for Rel.4 onwards MS", the 3G search is systematically deactivated when activating the NC2 mode (activation performed through the Packet Measurement Order [NC2] message). This 3G search deactivation is then performed independently of the value of the EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION parameter. No No
952 / 1182
5.2.161 (Network_mode_of_operation) - (network_operation_mode (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Network_mode_of_operation network_operation_mode (BSC)
This parameter defines the CS-PS co-ordination for paging. 3 possible values : 1, 2, 3; 1 == Network operation mode I ; 2 == Network operation mode II ; 3 == Network operation mode III. If the network_operation_mode (BSC) parameter is set to NMO II then all cells of the BSS must have NB_TS_MPDCH = 0 Equal to network_operation_mode (MFS). Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 2
Mandatory rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / GPRS Any change will trigger a data reset of the GPUs. Stop and restart of (E)GPRS traffic in all the cells of the BSS. NMO I requires a Gs interface. No No
953 / 1182
5.2.162 (Network_mode_of_operation) - (network_operation_mode (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Network_mode_of_operation network_operation_mode (MFS)
This parameter defines the CS-PS co-ordination for paging. 3 possible values : 1, 2, 3; 1 == Network operation mode I ; 2 == Network operation mode II ; 3 == Network operation mode III If the network_operation_mode (MFS) parameter is set to NMO II then all cells of the BSS must have NB_TS_MPDCH = 0. Equal to network_operation_mode (BSC). Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 3 Default 2
Mandatory rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / GPRS Any change will trigger a data reset of the GPUs. Stop and restart of (E)GPRS traffic in all the cells of the BSS. NMO I requires a Gs interface. No No
954 / 1182
5.2.163 (Normal Information Rate) - (NIR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Normal Information Rate NIR
Normal Information Rate. CIR <= NIR <= CIR x (1 + EBS/CBS) <= ACCESS_RATE_BC NIR=0 when direct access is used Site (CAE) Number MFS PVC Unit kbit/s Minimum 0 Maximum 1984 Default 0
OMC Changes: MFS RNO Changes: No MFSUSM / GB Configuration / NSVC Creation No No
955 / 1182
5.2.164 (NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY) (NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY
Defines the relative priority used for Background Packet Flow Context, with precedence parameter set to normal Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 4 Maximum 15 Default 15
956 / 1182
5.2.165 (NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY) (NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY
Defines the relative priority used for Interactive THP1 Packet Flow Context, with precedence parameter set to normal Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 4 Maximum 15 Default 6
957 / 1182

958 / 1182

959 / 1182
5.2.168 (NS Priority) - (NS_Priority)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value NS Priority NS_Priority
Priority of the NSVC, is used by the load sharing. 1: lowest priority, 255:highest priority Site (CAE) Number MFS NSVC Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Default 10
960 / 1182
5.2.169 (NSEI) - (NSEI)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value NSE Identifier. The NSEI shall be unique per MFS Site (CAE) Number MFS NSE Unit None Modifiable Parameter Access External Comment Cell Type Dependent Nb of TRX Dependent Minimum 1 Maximum 65535 Default None NSEI NSEI
OMC Changes: MFS RNO Changes: No MFSUSM / GB Configuration / NSE Creation No No
961 / 1182
5.2.170 (NstagnatingWindowDL_LIMIT) (N_stagnating_Window_DL_LIMIT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NstagnatingWindowDL_LIMIT N_stagnating_Window_DL_LIMIT
This parameter defines the maximum number of consecutive Packet Downlink ACK/NACK or EGPRS Packet Downlink ACK/NACK messages reporting the failure of progress of the RLC window during the active phase of a downlink TBF, before triggering an abnormal release of the DL TBF. This parameter is used in conjunction with the MIN_RLF_TIME_DL delay to decide if the DL TBF shall be released. Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 256 Default 32
962 / 1182
5.2.171 (NstagnatingWindowUL_LIMIT) (N_stagnating_Window_UL_LIMIT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition NstagnatingWindowUL_LIMIT N_stagnating_Window_UL_LIMIT
NstagnatingWindow limit above which a mono-slot uplink TBF alone on its PDCH shall be released: the counter is incremented each time a Packet UL Ack/Nack fails in making the RLC window progress. For a multi-slot TBF or a TBF which shares its PDCH, the limit is proportional to the allocated bandwidth at the TBF establishment. Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 256 Default 10
963 / 1182
5.2.172 (NSVC Identifier) - (NSVCI)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value NSVC identifier. Site (CAE) Number MFS NSVC Unit None Modifiable Parameter Access External Comment Cell Type Dependent Nb of TRX Dependent Minimum 1 Maximum 65535 Default None NSVC Identifier NSVCI
OMC Changes: set by create(MFS) RNO Changes: No MFSUSM / GB Configuration / NSVC Creation No No
964 / 1182
5.2.173 (PAN_DEC) - (PAN_DEC (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PAN_DEC PAN_DEC (BSC)
Value decremented from MS N3102 counter when PACKET UL ACK/NACK is not received before MS timer T3182. Binary coded on 3 bits Equal to PAN_DEC (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: GPR Edit Cell / GPRS / General groups No No
965 / 1182
5.2.174 (PAN_DEC) - (PAN_DEC (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PAN_DEC PAN_DEC (MFS)
Value decremented from MS N3102 counter when PACKET UL ACK/NACK is not received before MS timer T3182. Binary coded on 3 bits Equal to PAN_DEC (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
966 / 1182
5.2.175 (PAN_INC) - (PAN_INC (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PAN_INC PAN_INC (BSC)
Value incremented to MS N3102 counter when PACKET UL ACK/NACK is received by MS. Binary coded on 3 bits Equal to PAN_INC (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
967 / 1182
5.2.176 (PAN_INC) - (PAN_INC (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PAN_INC PAN_INC (MFS)
Value incremented to MS N3102 counter when PACKET UL ACK/NACK is received by MS. Binary coded on 3 bits Equal to PAN_INC (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
968 / 1182
5.2.177 (PAN_MAX) - (PAN_MAX (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PAN_MAX PAN_MAX (BSC)
Maximum value for counter N3102. cell reselection is done by MS when N3102 <= 0. Possible values : 4, 8, 12., 32 respectively binary coded 000, 001, , 111 Equal to PAN_MAX (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 4 Maximum 32 Default 32
Coding rules
969 / 1182
5.2.178 (PAN_MAX) - (PAN_MAX (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PAN_MAX PAN_MAX (MFS)
Maximum value for counter N3102. cell reselection is done by MS when N3102 <= 0. Possible values : 4, 8, 12,.., 32 respectively binary coded 000, 001,.. , 111 Equal to PAN_MAX (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 4 Maximum 32 Default 32
Coding rules
970 / 1182
5.2.179 (PC_MEAS_CHAN) - (PC_MEAS_CHAN (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PC_MEAS_CHAN PC_MEAS_CHAN (BSC)
This parameter determines on which channel the MS shall measure the received power level on the downlink for the purpose of the uplink power control. 0 : downlink measurements for power control shall be made on BCCH Equal to PC_MEAS_CHAN (MFS). PC_MEAS_CHAN should be forced to PDCH in multiband cells Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
971 / 1182
5.2.180 (PC_MEAS_CHAN) - (PC_MEAS_CHAN (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PC_MEAS_CHAN PC_MEAS_CHAN (MFS)
This parameter determines on which channel the MS shall measure the received power level on the downlink for the purpose of the uplink power control. 0 : downlink measurements for power control shall be made on BCCH, 1 : downlink measurements for power control shall be made on PDCH Equal to PC_MEAS_CHAN (BSC). PC_MEAS_CHAN should be forced to PDCH in multiband cells Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
Coding rules
972 / 1182
5.2.181 (PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1) (PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1 PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1
Upper limit of the 1st band, lower limit of the 2nd band for DL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1< PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 0.5
973 / 1182

Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for DL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1 < PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2< PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_3 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 1
974 / 1182

Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for DL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2 < PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_3 < PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_4 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 1.5
975 / 1182

Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for DL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_3 < PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_4 < PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_5 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 2
976 / 1182

Upper limit of the 5th band, lower limit of the 6th band for DL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_4 < PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_5 < PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_6 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 2.5
977 / 1182

978 / 1182

Upper limit of the 7th band, lower limit of the 8th band for DL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_6 < PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_7 < PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_8 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 3.5
979 / 1182

980 / 1182

Upper limit of the 9th band, lower limit of the 10th band for DL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_8 < PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_9 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 4.5
981 / 1182
5.2.190 (PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1) (PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1 PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1
Upper limit of the first band, lower limit of the second band for DL TBF duration distribution. step size = 0.5 sec PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1 < PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_2 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 16383.5 Default 0.5
982 / 1182

Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for DL TBF duration distribution step size = 0.5 sec PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1 < PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_2 < PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_3 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 16383.5 Default 1
983 / 1182

Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for DL TBF duration distribution step size = 0.5 sec PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_2 < PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_3 < PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_4 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 16383.5 Default 2
984 / 1182

Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for DL TBF duration distribution step size = 0.5 sec PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_3 < PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_4 < PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_5 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 16383.5 Default 3
985 / 1182

986 / 1182

987 / 1182

988 / 1182

989 / 1182

Upper limit of the 9th band, lower limit of the 10th band for DL TBF duration distribution step size = 0.5 sec PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_8 < PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_9 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 16383.5 Default 100
990 / 1182
5.2.199 (PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1) - (PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1 PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1
Upper limit of the 1st band, lower limit of the 2nd band for LLC volume carried by an DL TBF distribution step size = 1 byte PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_2 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit byte Minimum 1 Maximum 99999999 Default 500
991 / 1182

Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for LLC volume carried by an DL TBF distribution step size = 1 byte PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_2 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_3 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit byte Minimum 1 Maximum 99999999 Default 1000
992 / 1182

Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for LLC volume carried by an DL TBF distribution step size = 1 byte PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_2 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_3 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_4 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit byte Minimum 1 Maximum 99999999 Default 2000
993 / 1182

Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for LLC volume carried by an DL TBF distribution step size = 1 byte PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_3 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_4 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_5 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit byte Minimum 1 Maximum 99999999 Default 3000
994 / 1182

995 / 1182

996 / 1182

997 / 1182

998 / 1182

Upper limit of the 9th band, lower limit of the 10th band for LLC volume carried by an DL TBF distribution step size = 1 byte PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_8 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_9 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit byte Minimum 1 Maximum 99999999 Default 100000
999 / 1182
5.2.208 (PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1) (PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1 PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1
Upper limit of the 1st band, lower limit of the 2nd band for UL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1< PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 0.5
1000 / 1182

Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for UL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1 < PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2< PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_3 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 1
1001 / 1182

Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for UL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2 < PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_3 < PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_4 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 1.5
1002 / 1182

Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for UL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_3 < PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_4 < PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_5 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 2
1003 / 1182

Upper limit of the 5th band, lower limit of the 6th band for UL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_4 < PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_5 < PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_6 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 2.5
1004 / 1182

1005 / 1182

Upper limit of the 7th band, lower limit of the 8th band for UL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_6 < PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_7 < PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_8 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 3.5
1006 / 1182

1007 / 1182

Upper limit of the 9th band, lower limit of the 10th band for UL PDCH unit allocation distribution step size = 0.1 PDCH PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_8 < PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_9 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0.1 Maximum 4.9 Default 4.5
1008 / 1182
5.2.217 (PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1) (PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1 PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1
Upper limit of the first band, lower limit of the second band for UL TBF duration distribution. step size = 0.5 sec PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1 < PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_2 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 16383.5 Default 0.5
1009 / 1182

Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for UL TBF duration distribution step size = 0.5 sec PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1 < PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_2 < PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_3 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 16383.5 Default 1
1010 / 1182

Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for UL TBF duration distribution step size = 0.5 sec PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_2 < PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_3 < PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_4 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 16383.5 Default 2
1011 / 1182

Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for UL TBF duration distribution step size = 0.5 sec PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_3 < PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_4 < PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_5 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 16383.5 Default 3
1012 / 1182

1013 / 1182

1014 / 1182

1015 / 1182

1016 / 1182

Upper limit of the 9th band, lower limit of the 10th band for UL TBF duration distribution step size = 0.5 sec PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_8 < PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_9 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 16383.5 Default 100
1017 / 1182
5.2.226 (PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1) - (PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1 PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1
Upper limit of the 1st band, lower limit of the 2nd band for LLC volume carried by an UL TBF distribution step size = 1 byte PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_2 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit byte Minimum 1 Maximum 99999999 Default 500
1018 / 1182

Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for LLC volume carried by an UL TBF distribution step size = 1 byte PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_2 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_3 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit byte Minimum 1 Maximum 99999999 Default 1000
1019 / 1182

Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for LLC volume carried by an UL TBF distribution step size = 1 byte PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_2 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_3 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_4 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit byte Minimum 1 Maximum 99999999 Default 2000
1020 / 1182

Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for LLC volume carried by an UL TBF distribution step size = 1 byte PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_3 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_4 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_5 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit byte Minimum 1 Maximum 99999999 Default 3000
1021 / 1182

1022 / 1182

1023 / 1182

1024 / 1182

1025 / 1182

Upper limit of the 9th band, lower limit of the 10th band for LLC volume carried by an UL TBF distribution step size = 1 byte PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_8 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_9 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit byte Minimum 1 Maximum 99999999 Default 100000
1026 / 1182
5.2.235 (Peer_NSE_Data_Weight) - (Peer_NSE_Data_Weight)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Peer_NSE_Data_Weight Peer_NSE_Data_Weight
GboverIP: Indicates the data weight assigned to the peer NSE. step size = 1 Site (CAE) Number MFS SGSN-IPEndPoint Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 10
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Declared by the operator in case of static configuration.Initialized after the CONFIG procedure in case of dynamic configuration.If Peer_NSE_Data_Weight=0, the IP endpoint will not be selected as a data by the load sharing function. No No
1027 / 1182
5.2.236 (Peer_NSE_Signalling_Weight) - (Peer_NSE_Signalling_Weight)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Peer_NSE_Signalling_Weight Peer_NSE_Signalling_Weight
GboverIP: Indicates the signalling weight assigned to the peer NSE. step size = 1 Site (CAE) Number MFS SGSN-IPEndPoint Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 10
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Declared by the operator in case of static configuration.Initialized after the CONFIG procedure in case of dynamic configuration.If Peer_NSE_Signalling_Weight=0, the IP endpoint will not be selected as a signalling endpoint. No No
1028 / 1182
5.2.237 (PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_1) - (PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_1)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_1 PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_1
This parameter indicates the values of the access persistence level for radio priority 1. Values : 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16 coded on 4 bits0 0 0 0 : persistence level 0, 0 0 0 1: persistence level 1, 0 0 1 0:persistence level 2, 0 0 1 1: persistence level 3, 0 1.0.0 : persistence level 4. . . . 1 1 1 0 : persistence level 14, 1 1 1 1: persistence level 16 Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 16 Default 0
Coding rules
1029 / 1182

Coding rules
1030 / 1182

Coding rules
1031 / 1182

Coding rules
1032 / 1182
5.2.241 (PFC_T6) - (PFC_T6)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value PFC_T6 PFC_T6
Timer guarding the Download-BSS-PFC procedure step size = 0.1 sec Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 10 Default 0.5
1033 / 1182
5.2.242 (PFC_T8) - (PFC_T8)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value PFC_T8 PFC_T8
Timer guarding the Modify-BSS-PFC procedure step size = 0.1 sec Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 10 Default 0.5
1034 / 1182
5.2.243 (Port_Number) - (SGSN_UDP_Port)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Port_Number SGSN_UDP_Port
UDP port number of the SGSN IP endpoint used for Gb over IP. Each SGSN IP EndPoint (SGSN_IP_Address, SGSN_UDP_Port) must be unique per NSE. Site (CAE) Number MFS SGSN-IPEndPoint Unit None Minimum 1024 Maximum 65535 Default 49152
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Following IANA.org: "Registered Ports" are in the range 1024-49151 and "Dynamic and/or Private Ports" are those from 49152 through 65535 (ALU BSS ports are taken in the private range, however SGSN ports taken in the registered ports are accepted by the ALU BSS). No No
1035 / 1182
5.2.244 (PRACH_BUSY_THRES) - (PRACH_BUSY_THRES)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules PRACH_BUSY_THRES PRACH_BUSY_THRES
Received level above which a PRACH block is deemed busy. This parameter is encoded with a step size of 4 dB as follows:0: -110 dBm1: -106 dBm2: -102 dBm3: -98 dBm4: -94 dBm5: -90 dBm6: -86 dBm7: -82 dBm8: -78 dBm9: -74 dBm10: -70 dBm11: -66 dBm12: -62 dBm13: -58 dBm14: -54 dBm15: -50 dBm Site (CAE) Threshold MFS cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -50 Default -106
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / RLC/MAC Parameter used in dynamic allocation of secondary MasterPDCH algorithm. No No
1036 / 1182
5.2.245 (PRIORITY_CLASS) - (GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value PRIORITY_CLASS GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS
HCS priority of the cell, used in NC0. Coded on 3 bits. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Master Channel 2/2 No No
1037 / 1182
5.2.246 (PRIORITY_CLASS) - (GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value PRIORITY_CLASS GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(n)
HCS priority of the adjacent cell, used in NC0. Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Master Channel 2/2 (+ Edit External Cell / Packet) No No
1038 / 1182
5.2.247 (PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX) - (PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX
Indicates whether or not the PS requests shall be preferentially served with PDCH(s) of the BCCH TRX 0: No preference. The TRX ranking algorithm handles the BCCH TRX as a non-BCCH TRX.1: PS requests preferentially served on BCCH TRX. The TRX ranking algorithm ensures that the BCCH TRX has the highest preference to carry PS traffic (provided that the BCCH TRX can carry PS traffic, i.e. TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on that TRX).2 : PS requests served on BCCH TRX with lowest priority. The TRX ranking algorithm ensures that the BCCH TRX has the lowest preference to carry PS traffic (provided that the BCCH TRX can carry PS traffic, i.e. TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on that TRX). If EGPRS is activated in a non-hopping or a non-hopping / radio-hopping cell, Alcatel recommend to set this parameter to 0 in order to reduce the likelihood of having to reduce the GMSK output power (see external comment).If EGPRS is activated in a base-band hopping cell, setting this parameter to 0 does not reduce the likelihood of having to reduce the GMSK output power since PS capable TRXs will hop on the BCCH carrier. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 0
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / General groups
1039 / 1182
External Comment
When set to 1 or 2, this parameter is only relevant if the BCCH TRX supports PS traffic (i.e. if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on the BCCH TRX).If EGPRS is activated in a non-hopping or a non-hopping / radio-hopping cell, if the BCCH TRX can carry PS traffic and if the BCCH TRX is associated to a TRE hardware allowing the usage of 8-PSK, the operator shall ensure that the difference in the mean output powers between GSMK and 8-PSK signals is less than 2 dB in order to be compliant with 3GPP TS 45.005 and 3GPP TS 45.008 requirements (or 4 dB if an SDCCH timeslot is defined on timeslot number 7 of the BCCH TRX).If EGPRS is activated in a base-band hopping cell, the operator shall ensure that the difference in the mean output powers between GMSK and 8-PSK signals is less than 2 dB in order to be compliant with 3GPP TS 45.005 and 3GPP TS 45.008 requirements (or 4 dB if timeslot number 7 is not part of the PDCH groups). No No
1040 / 1182
5.2.248 (QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN) - (QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN
Additional capacity (in terms of radio bandwidth and in terms of transmission resources) which is reserved for a streaming TBF (RT PFC) to correctly fulfill its AGBR contract and to possibly convey other multiplexed NRT PFC(s) of the same TBF. The part of this margin that is not used by the streaming TBF may be used by other TBF(s). step size = 10% Setting QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN to 0% is not recommended (the GBR of some RT PFCs may turn out to be impossible to guarantee in this case). Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 20
1041 / 1182
5.2.249 (R_AVERAGE_EGPRS) - (R_AVERAGE_EGPRS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules R_AVERAGE_EGPRS R_AVERAGE_EGPRS
Average bitrate per PDCH for Edge capable terminals in this cell RMIN_EGPRS <= R_AVERAGE_EGPRS R_AVERAGE_EGPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the useful bitrate corresponding to MAX_EGPRS_MCS (e.g. if MAX_EGPRS_MCS = MCS9 => R_AVERAGE_EGPRS shall not be higher than 59,2kbps). Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit bit/s Minimum 0 Maximum 59200 Default 30000
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: This parameter represents the average bit rate that is targeted, per PDCH, in the cell with respect to the cell radio planning. It is recommended not to set this bit rate higher than the average measured bit rate in the cell.The default value corresponds to MCS-6.The max value corresponds to MCS-9. No No
1042 / 1182
5.2.250 (R_AVERAGE_GPRS) - (R_AVERAGE_GPRS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules R_AVERAGE_GPRS R_AVERAGE_GPRS
Average bitrate per PDCH for non-Edge capable terminals in this cell RMIN_GPRS <= R_AVERAGE_GPRS R_AVERAGE_GPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the useful bitrate corresponding to MAX_GPRS_CS (e.g. if MAX_GPRS_CS = CS2 => R_AVERAGE_GPRS shall not be higher than 12kbps). Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit bit/s Minimum 0 Maximum 20000 Default 12000
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: This parameter represents the average bit rate that is targeted, per PDCH, in the cell with respect to the cell radio planning. It is recommended not to set this bit rate higher than the average measured bit rate in the cell.The default value corresponds to CS-2.The max value corresponds to CS-4. No No
1043 / 1182
5.2.251 (RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS) - (RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
This parameter indicates in both STANDBY and READY state the additional hysteresis which applies when selecting a cell in a new Routing Area. step size = 2 dB, Coded on 3 bits. 000=0 dB, 001=2 dB, ...111=14 dB Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 14 Default 8
1044 / 1182
5.2.252 (RACH/PRACH_TA_FILTER) - (RACH_TA_FILTER (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RACH/PRACH_TA_FILTER RACH_TA_FILTER (MFS)
Timing Advance threshold for CHANNEL REQUIRED and PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST filtering. 64: no filtering Equal to RACH_TA_FILTER (BSC) Disable the filtering for extended cells. Site (CAE) Threshold MFS cell Unit bper Minimum 0 Maximum 64 Default 64
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: PAG Edit Cell / Cell Information / Ctrl Channel One unit corresponds to a distance of about 550m. CHANNEL REQUIRED or PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST messages with Timing Advance greater or equal to RACH_TA_FILTER are discarded. No No
1045 / 1182
5.2.253 (RMIN_EGPRS) - (RMIN_EGPRS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RMIN_EGPRS RMIN_EGPRS
Minimal bitrate per PDCH for Edge capable terminals in this cell (at 95 % or 90% confidence level or less %, depending on tolerable risk) RMIN_EGPRS <= R_AVERAGE_EGPRS If EN_STREAMING = 1 and EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK = False then the following condition must be respected: RMIN_EGPRS <= useful bitrate corresponding to min (TBF_UL_INIT_MCS, TBF_DL_INIT_MCS). Otherwise the streaming PFC can be downgraded to the Defaut Best Effort ABQP.R_MIN_EGPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the useful bitrate corresponding to Max_EGPRS_MCS. If the above recommended rule is not fulfilled, then some RT PFCs can be accepted by the BSS whereas it will not be possible to handle their associated GBR. This may result in RT PFC downgrades to Best Effort. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit bit/s Minimum 0 Maximum 59200 Default 20800
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: This parameter is used to provide a guaranted Bit rate of streaming PFC for Edge capable MS, in the worst case radio condition. It should be set appropriately with respect to the cell radio planning.The default value corresponds to a bitrate between MCS-4 and MCS-5.The max value corresponds to MCS-9. No No
1046 / 1182
5.2.254 (RMIN_GPRS) - (RMIN_GPRS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RMIN_GPRS RMIN_GPRS
Minimal bitrate per PDCH for non-Edge capable terminals in this cell cell (at 95 % or 90% confidence level or less, depending on tolerable risk) RMIN_GPRS <= R_AVERAGE_GPRS If EN_STREAMING = 1 and EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK = False then the following condition must be respected: RMIN_GPRS <= useful bitrate corresponding to min (TBF_UL_INIT_CS, TBF_DL_INIT_CS). Otherwise the streaming PFC can be downgraded to the Defaut Best Effort ABQP.R_MIN_GPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the useful bitrate corresponding to Max_GPRS_CS. If the above recommended rule is not fulfilled, then some RT PFCs can be accepted by the BSS whereas it will not be possible to handle their associated GBR. This may result in RT PFC downgrades to Best Effort. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit bit/s Minimum 0 Maximum 20000 Default 8000
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: This parameter is used to provide a guaranted Bit rate of streaming PFC for Non Edge capable MS, in the worst case radio condition. It should be set appropriately with respect to the cell radio planning.The default value corresponds to CS-1.The max value corresponds to CS-4. No No
1047 / 1182
5.2.255 (Round trip delay MFS-MS) - (round_trip_delay)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Round trip delay MFS-MS round_trip_delay
Round trip delay between the MFS and a MS. step size=10 ms T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay < 5 sec Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit ms Minimum 80 Maximum 940 Default 160
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: GPR Edit Cell / GPRS / Connection Control 2/2 The round-trip delay is used by the RRM, RLC and MAC layers. The OMC-R and the MFS also use this parameter to determine whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links as follows:- If round_trip_delay < 500 ms, the OMC-R and the MFS consider that GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links,- If round_trip_delay >= 500 ms, the OMC-R and the MFS consider that GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links.When the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links in the serving cell, it is recommended to set the round_trip_delay parameter to [Delay due to satellite (540 ms) + Delay due to MFS-MS link (160 ms)] = 700 ms. No No
1048 / 1182
5.2.256 (Routing Area Code for GPRS) - (RA_CODE (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Routing Area Code for GPRS RA_CODE (BSC)
Routing Area Code for GPRS. The initial special value -1 means that the RA code has still not been set by the operator. - Equal to RA_CODE (MFS)- A couple of mate extended cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall have the same RA_CODE when they are PS capable Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum -1 Maximum 255 Default 0
Mandatory rules
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: GPR Edit Cell / GPRS / General groups The value depends on configuration. The default value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
1049 / 1182
5.2.257 (Routing Area Code for GPRS) - (RA_CODE (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Routing Area Code for GPRS RA_CODE (MFS)
Routing Area Code. 0...255 (significant value: 3GPP TS 04.60)other values: external or unknown cell - Equal to RA_CODE (BSC)- A couple of mate extended cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall have the same RA_CODE when they are PS capable Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum -1 Maximum 255 Default 0
Mandatory rules
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: GPR Edit Cell / GPRS / General groups The value depends on configuration. The default value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
1050 / 1182
5.2.258 (Routing Area Code for GPRS) - (RA_CODE(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Routing Area Code for GPRS RA_CODE(n)
Routing Area Code of neighbour cells. 0...255 (significant value: 3GPP TS 04.60);other values: external or unknown cell.The special value of "-1" means that the RA code has still not been valued by the network provider or that the MFS shall set the SAME_RA_AS_SERVING_CELL field to 0. If i) the target and serving cells belong to different PLMNs and ii) the RAC and LAC of the target cell are equal to the RAC and LAC of the serving cell, and iii) there is a PBCCH established in the serving cell, and iv) a cell reselection adjacency link is defined between the serving cell and the target cell, then it is recommended to set the RA_CODE to -1. Otherwise, the MFS considers that the serving cell and the target cell belong to the same routing area when setting the SAME_RA_AS_SERVING_CELL field in the 04.60 PACKET SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE 3/3bis messages. Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit None Minimum -1 Maximum 255 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / Adjacencies The special value of -1 means that the RA code has still not been valued by the operator or that the routing area of the serving cell is different from the routing area of the target cell. No No
1051 / 1182
5.2.259 (Routing Area Colour for GPRS) - (RA_COLOUR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Routing Area Colour for GPRS RA_COLOUR
Routing Area Colour for GPRS. Coded over 3 bits. the initial special value -1 means that the RA codecolour has not yet been valued by the network provider. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: GPR Edit Cell / GPRS / General groups Default value depends on the configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
1052 / 1182
5.2.260 (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (MFS)
Minimum received level at the MS required for initial access to the cell. Coded on 6 bits, 0=-110 dBm, 63=-47 dBm, step size=1dBm. RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (MFS) = RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -100
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No ? No No
1053 / 1182
5.2.261 (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(MFS)
Minimum received level at the MS required for initial access to the cell. Coded on 6 bits, 0=-110 dBm, 63=-47 dBm, step size=1dBm. RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(MFS) = RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS adj Unit dBm Minimum -110 Maximum -47 Default -100
OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No Edit External Cell/ Packet2/2 No No
1054 / 1182
5.2.262 (S) - (S)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition S S
Number of slots between 2 successive PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST. Possible values are : 12, 15, 20, 30, 41, 55, 76, 109, 163, 217 respectively binary coded : 0000, 0001, 0010,... ,1001 When the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater terrestrial links, it is recommended to set S so that the time between two successive Packet Channel Request messages is longer than 900 ms.When the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links, it is recommended to set S so that the time between two successive Packet Channel Request messages is longer than 1400 ms.The number of slots belonging to the MSs PRACH between 2 successive Packet Channel Request messages is a random value drawn randomly for each new retransmission with uniform distribution in the set (S, S+1, ...,S+T-1) with T = Tx_INT. The time in seconds between two Packet Channel Request messages is determined as a function of S, TX_INT and of the BS_PRACH_BLKS parameter. BS_PRACH_BLKS defines the number of blocks statically allocated to the PRACH per 52 multiframe on each PCCCH. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 12 Maximum 217 Default 30
Coding rules
1055 / 1182
5.2.263 (SGSNR) - (SGSNR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SGSNR SGSNR
Year corresponding to the version of ETSI/3GPP recommendations used to implement SGSN software. 0 = SGSN is release 98 or older; 1 = SGSN is release 99 onwards Site (CAE) Flag MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / Internetworking SGSN Internetworking Any modification of the parameter leads the MFS to reset autonomously all the GPUs connected to this BSS. No No
1056 / 1182
5.2.264 (SMS_PRIORITY) - (SMS_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value SMS_PRIORITY SMS_PRIORITY
Defines the relative priority used for the pre-defined "SMS" PFC. Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 4 Maximum 15 Default 15
1057 / 1182
5.2.265 (T stop frame relay emission) - (T_STOP_FR_EMISSION)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T stop frame relay emission T_STOP_FR_EMISSION
Timer used to trigger restart of emission on a PVC (Frame Relay). step size = 1 ms Not changeable after MFS system initialization. Site (CAE) Timer MFS PVC Unit ms Minimum 10 Maximum 5000 Default 100
1058 / 1182
5.2.266 (T_AVG_T) - (T_AVG_T (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_AVG_T T_AVG_T (BSC)
Signal strength filter period for power control in packet transfer mode. binary coded on 5 bits Equal to T_AVG_T (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 25 Default 12
1059 / 1182
5.2.267 (T_AVG_T) - (T_AVG_T (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_AVG_T T_AVG_T (MFS)
Signal strength filter period for power control in packet transfer mode. binary coded on 5 bits Equal to T_AVG_T (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 25 Default 12
1060 / 1182
5.2.268 (T_AVG_W) - (T_AVG_W (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_AVG_W T_AVG_W (BSC)
Signal strength filter period for power control in packet idle mode. binary coded on 5 bits Equal to T_AVG_W (MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 25 Default 20
1061 / 1182
5.2.269 (T_AVG_W) - (T_AVG_W (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_AVG_W T_AVG_W (MFS)
Signal strength filter period for power control in packet idle mode. binary coded on 5 bits Equal to T_AVG_W (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 25 Default 20
1062 / 1182
5.2.270 (T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN) - (T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN
This timer defines the duration of the delay introduced by the BSS to send the final Packet UL Ack/Nack message when releasing an UL TBF. step size : 100 ms ; 0 = 0 msec, 1 = 100 msec, 2 = 200 msec, etc Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit ms Minimum 0 Maximum 2000 Default 400
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No The feature "delayed emission of the final Packet UL Ack/Nack" can be inhibited by setting the value 0 to the parameter T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN. When the feature is enabled, the timer duration should be long enough to let the server send its response to the uplink PDUs received from the MS, while remaining short enough in order not to jeopardise the sending of further uplink PDUs by the MS. No No
1063 / 1182
5.2.271 (T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport) - (T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport
Time period to request for a Packet Downlink Ack/Nack with measurements. step size = 20 ms Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit ms Minimum 60 Maximum 3000 Default 400
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / RLC/MAC No No
1064 / 1182
5.2.272 (T_FLOW_CTRL_CELL) - (T_flow_ctrl_cell)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_FLOW_CTRL_CELL T_flow_ctrl_cell
Periodicity of emission of NM- FLOW-CONTROL-BVC message to SGSN. step size=1sec, 0 means infinite timer Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 10 Default 0
1065 / 1182
5.2.273 (T_FLOW_CTRL_MS) - (T_flow_ctrl_ms)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_FLOW_CTRL_MS T_flow_ctrl_ms
Periodicity of emission of NM- FLOW-CONTROL-MS message towards the SGSN for GPRS and EGPRS Mobile Stations. step size=1sec, 0 means infinite timer Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 250 Default 10
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / GPRS 1) if T_Flow_Ctrl_MS is set to "0", then the MS flow control mechanism is inhibited;2) if T_Flow_Ctrl_MS has a non-null value, then "C< T_flow_ctrl_ms < Th". The parameters C and Th are defined in the 3GPP TS 08.18. No No
1066 / 1182
5.2.274 (T_GCH_CORR) - (Tcorr)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules T_GCH_CORR Tcorr
Timer to supervise clock drift correction loop for 16k channel. step size=100ms Tcorr > Trelease+240ms and Tcorr > Testab+240mswhere 240 ms represents the maximum delay in MAC layer between the notification for a DBN correction and the application of this DBN correction.It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links:- Tcorr = 0.8 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in the serving cell,- Tcorr = 1.4 s if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell. Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit sec Minimum 0.5 Maximum 2 Default 0.8
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / General groups HMI name changed to precise that this timer is valid for GCH channels. Former HMI name Tcorr. No No
1067 / 1182
5.2.275 (T_GCH_ESTAB) - (Testab)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules T_GCH_ESTAB Testab
Supervision of loss of GCH link establishment for 16k channels. step size= 100 ms Treq_pending > Testab It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links:- Testab = 0.4 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in the serving cell,- Testab = 1 s if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell. Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 2 Default 0.4
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / General groups HMI name changed to precise that this timer is valid for GCH channels. Former HMI name Testab. No No
1068 / 1182
5.2.276 (T_GCH_INACTIVITY) - (T_GCH_INACTIVITY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_GCH_INACTIVITY T_GCH_INACTIVITY
- For Non Evolium BTS : Timer to postpone the release of one slave PDCH, when it does not support any (E)GPRS traffic.- For Evolium BTS : Timer to postpone the release of the "unused" GCHs of the M-EGCH link of a TRX (the condition for some GCHs of the M-EGCH link of a TRX to become "unused" is that some TBFs established on that TRX were released). step size = 1sec T_GCH_INACTIVITY > T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC in all the cells of the BSS.This constraints avoids as much as possible that some GCHs are released and reestablished again some moments later. This way, the T3 and T4 TBF reallocations can benefit from the GCHs which are currently unused, but still established.If it is seen as an important goal to save Ater resources in the GPU, a value of Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data < 100% is coherent with a low value of the T_GCH_INACTIVITY and T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timers. Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 100 Default 3
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: The setting of the T_GCH_INACTIVITY timer comes to make a trade-off between the GCH resource usage and the Telecom performance:- The higher is the T_GCH_INACTIVITY timer, the higher is the GCH resource usage on the Ater interface.- The higher is the T_GCH_INACTIVITY timer, the lower is the average duration of TBF establishments on (P)CCCH, especially if the GPRS traffic is carried through satellite. No No
1069 / 1182
5.2.277 (T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST) - (T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST
- Evolium BTS : Timer to postpone the release of the last N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS GCHs established in a cell, when the last TBF has been released in the cell. There is no more (E)GPRS traffic in the cell, but keeping some GCHs established will be useful in case of (E)GPRS traffic resumption in the cell (e.g. WAP, WEB).- Non Evolium BTS : Timer to postpone the release of the last established slave PDCH of a cell, when it does not support GPRS traffic anymore. There is no more GPRS traffic in the cell, but keeping a PDCH established will be useful in case of GPRS traffic resumption in the cell. step size = 1 sec If it is seen as an important goal to save Ater resources in the GPU, a value of Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data < 100% is coherent with a low value of the T_GCH_INACTIVITY and T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timers. Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 200 Default 20
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: That timer is relevant only if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS is disabled.The setting of the T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timer comes to make a trade-off between the GCH resource usage and the Telecom performance:- The higher is the T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timer, the higher is the GCH resource usage on the Ater interface.The higher is the T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timer, the lower is the average duration of TBF establishments on (P)CCCH, especially if the GPRS traffic is carried through satellite links.This parameter may also be used to ensure that the BSS reserves at least one GCH resource in the serving cell while the MS is engaged in a Web browsing session.
1070 / 1182
No No
1071 / 1182
5.2.278 (T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL) - (T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL
Maximum duration of the extended uplink TBF phase step size = 100 ms T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay < 5 sec It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links:- between 1 sec and 2 sec if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links,- between 1.5 sec and 2.5 sec if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links. Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit ms Minimum 100 Maximum 4000 Default 2000
1072 / 1182
5.2.279 (T_MAX_STREAMING_BUFFERING) (T_MAX_STREAMING_BUFFERING)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_MAX_STREAMING_BUFFERING T_MAX_STREAMING_BUFFERING
Time which multiplied by the GBR defines a buffer level above which we may consider the BSS failed to provide the GBR step size = 1 sec Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 8 Maximum 100 Default 30
1073 / 1182
5.2.280 (T_NC_PING_PONG) - (T_NC_PING_PONG)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value T_NC_PING_PONG T_NC_PING_PONG
Time during which the ping-pong offset is applied. step size = 100 ms Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit ms Minimum 0 Maximum 20000 Default 5000
1074 / 1182
5.2.281 (T_NC_REJ_CELL) - (T_NC_REJ_CELL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_NC_REJ_CELL T_NC_REJ_CELL
Time during which a NC cell reselection is inhibited towards that cell due to a previous NC cell reselection failure on that cell. step size = 100 ms Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit ms Minimum 0 Maximum 20000 Default 5000
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Resel. 1/2 No No
1075 / 1182
5.2.282 (T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME) (T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME
Maximum expected response time of a network server as seen from the MFS. step size: 100 ms Site (CAE) Timer MFS BSS Unit ms Minimum 100 Maximum 5000 Default 1600
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / GPRS / General 1) The response time corresponds to T1 T2 where T2 corresponds to the time at which a command is sent to the SGSN and T1 the time at which the response is received on the MFS side. This command / response is e.g. the LLC PDU containing an FTP GET and the first LLC PDU starting the file transfer. It can also be the LLC PDU containing an HTTP GET and the first LLC PDU starting the page download.2) The value of this timer defines the duration of the Delayed DL TBF Release procedure. In case the servers to which the GGSN serving the MFS is connected are not located at the same place, then the maximum server response time should be entered. However, note that the higher this timer is, the longer TBF releases will be delayed and therefore the more resources are used up. No No
1076 / 1182
5.2.283 (T_PAG_PS) - (T_PAG_PS (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_PAG_PS T_PAG_PS (BSC)
This timer indicates the maximum time a PS PAGING message can remain in a Paging Group Queue. It includes the round-trip delay on Gb and A-bis interface. step size = 0.1sec Equal to T_PAG_PS (MFS) T_PAG_PS < T3313 (SGSN timer) Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 25.5 Default 3
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: PAG Edit Cell / GPRS / RLC/MAC No No
1077 / 1182
5.2.284 (T_PAG_PS) - (T_PAG_PS (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_PAG_PS T_PAG_PS (MFS)
This timer indicates the maximum time a PS PAGING message can remain in a Paging Group Queue. It includes the round-trip delay on Gb and A-bis interface. step size = 0.1sec Equal to T_PAG_PS (BSC) T_PAG_PS < T3313 (SGSN timer) Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 25.5 Default 3
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: PAG Edit Cell / GPRS / RLC/MAC No No
1078 / 1182
5.2.285 (T_PSI_PACCH) - (T_PSI_PACCH)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules T_PSI_PACCH T_PSI_PACCH
Scheduling period of PSI1, PSI13 or PSI14 on PACCH. step size =1sec, 00000 == Deactivated PSI scheduling on PACCH, 00001 == 1s, 11110 == T_PSI_PACCH = 30 sec Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 30 Default 14
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: GPR Edit BSS / GPRS / General No No
1079 / 1182
5.2.286 (T_RESEL) - (T_RESEL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_RESEL T_RESEL
Timer whose expiry allows a MS, which has performed an abnormal release with cell reselection, to reselect the previous cell. coded on 3 bits, 000= 5 sec, 001= 10 sec, 010 = 15 sec, 011 = 20 sec, 100= 30 sec, 101 = 60 sec, 110 = 120 sec, 111 = 300 sec Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit sec Minimum 5 Maximum 300 Default 5
Coding rules
1080 / 1182
5.2.287 (T_ul_assign_PCCCH) - (T_ul_assign_pccch)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_ul_assign_PCCCH T_ul_assign_pccch
The duration between the reception of the (EGPRS) Packet Channel Request message and one uplink radio block allocated to the MS. step size = 0.1 sec It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links:- T_ul_asssign_pccch = 0.4 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in the serving cell,- T_ul_assign_pccch = 0.7 s if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell. Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit sec Minimum 0.1 Maximum 0.7 Default 0.4
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Connection Control 2/2 No No
1081 / 1182
5.2.288 (T_UL_RLS_EUTM) - (T_UL_RLS_EUTM)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_UL_RLS_EUTM T_UL_RLS_EUTM
Waiting time between two successive polling request sent to a MS for an UL TBF in EUTM mode when EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is set ot 2 (IEUTM enabled). step size = 20ms Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit ms Minimum 100 Maximum 300 Default 100
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: RLS = Radio Link Supervision No No
1082 / 1182
5.2.289 (T3168) - (T3168 (BSC))

This timer defines the maximum time the MS waits for a packet UL assignment, after sending a Packet Resource Request (case of two-phase UL TBF establishment) or after including a Channel Request Description Information Element in a Packet Downlink Ack/Nack (case of UL TBF establishment on a concurrent DL TBF). Broadcast in SI13 within the GPRS Cell Options IE. Coded on 3 bits as follows:001: 1000 ms010: 1500 ms011: 2000 ms100: 2500 ms101: 3000 ms110: 3500 ms111: 4000 ms. Equal to T3168 (MFS) It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links:T3168 = 1 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater terrestrial links in the serving cell,- T3168 = 1.5 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links in the serving cell. Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 4 Default 1
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: GPR Edit Cell / GPRS / Connection Control 2/2 The setting of T3168 should leave sufficient time to the MFS for granting PDCHs for serving the UL TBF request, plus also cover the round trip time and the possible queuing delay within the MFS before the Packet Uplink Assignment can be sent to the Mobile Station. Therefore a value of 500 ms is not allowed in this release of the Alcatel BSS. No No
1083 / 1182
5.2.290 (T3168) - (T3168 (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T3168 T3168 (MFS)
This timer defines the maximum time the MS waits for a packet UL assignment, after sending a Packet Resource Request (case of two-phase UL TBF establishment) or after including a Channel Request Description Information Element in a Packet Downlink Ack/Nack (case of UL TBF establishment on a concurrent DL TBF). Broadcast in PSI1 within the GPRS Cell Options IE. Coded on 3 bits as follows:001: 1000 ms010: 1500 ms011: 2000 ms100: 2500 ms101: 3000 ms110: 3500 ms111: 4000 ms. Equal to T3168 (BSC) It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links:T3168 = 1 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater terrestrial links,T3168 = 1.5 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links. Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit sec Minimum 1 Maximum 4 Default 1
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: GPR Edit Cell / GPRS / Connection Control 2/2 The setting of T3168 should leave sufficient time to the MFS for granting PDCHs for serving the UL TBF request, plus also cover the round trip time and the possible queuing delay within the MFS before the Packet Uplink Assignment can be sent to the Mobile Station. Therefore a value of 500 ms is not allowed in this release of the Alcatel BSS. No No
1084 / 1182
5.2.291 (T3192) - (T3192 (BSC))

Wait for release of the downlink TBF on MS side after reception of the final block by the MS. Coded on 3 bits as follows: 0 0 0: 500 msec0 0 1: 1000 msec0 1 0: 1500 msec1 1 1: 200 msec Equal to T3192 (MFS)T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay < 5 sec T3192>MS-BSS roundtrip delay + RRBP maximum duration (60 ms)It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links:==> Case GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in the serving cell:i) T3192 = 1000 ms if the non-DRX mode is not activated and the delayed DL TBF release mode is not activated in the cell (i.e. if DRX_TIMER_MAX = 0 and EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 0)ii) T3192 = 500 ms if the non-DRX mode is activated or the delayed DL TBF release mode is activated in the cell (i.e. if DRX_TIMER_MAX > 0 or EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 1)iii) however, if T3192 is finally set to 200 msec, then :- some abnormal DL TBF release may occur during the delayed phase, and - the MS may not receive the NC2 deactivation order from the BSS, which may lead the MS to send useless PMR before leaving its ready state.==> Case GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell:i) T3192 = 1500 ms if the non-DRX mode is not activated and the delayed DL TBF release mode is not activated in the cell (i.e. if DRX_TIMER_MAX = 0 and EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 0)ii) T3192 = 1000 ms if the non-DRX mode is activated or the delayed DL TBF release mode is activated in the cell (i.e. if DRX_TIMER_MAX > 0 or EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 1) Site (CAE) Timer BSC cell Unit ms Minimum 200 Maximum 1500 Default 500
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: GPR Edit Cell / GPRS / Connection Control 2/2
1085 / 1182
External Comment
The following values ofT3192 defined in the 3GPP TS 04.60 are not supported in this release of the Alcatel BSS:0 1 1: 0 msec1 0 0: 80 msec1 0 1: 120 msec1 1 0: 160 msec No No
1086 / 1182
5.2.292 (T3192) - (T3192 (MFS))

Wait for release of the downlink TBF on MS side after reception of the final block by the MS. Coded on 3 bits as follows: 0 0 0: 500 msec0 0 1: 1000 msec0 1 0: 1500 msec1 1 1: 200 msec Equal to T3192 (BSC)T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay < 5 sec T3192>MS-BSS roundtrip delay + RRBP maximum duration (60 ms)It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending whether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links:==> Case GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links in the serving cell:i) T3192 = 1000 ms if the non-DRX mode is not activated and the delayed DL TBF release mode is not activated in the cell (i.e. if DRX_TIMER_MAX = 0 and EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 0)ii) T3192 = 500 ms if the non-DRX mode is activated or the delayed DL TBF release mode is activated in the cell (i.e. if DRX_TIMER_MAX > 0 or EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 1)iii) however, if T3192 is finally set to 200 msec, then :- some abnormal DL TBF release may occur during the delayed phase, and - the MS may not receive the NC2 deactivation order from the BSS, which may lead the MS to send useless PMR before leaving its ready state.==> Case GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell:i) T3192 = 1500 ms if the non-DRX mode is not activated and the delayed DL TBF release mode is not activated in the cell (i.e. if DRX_TIMER_MAX = 0 and EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 0)ii) T3192 = 1000 ms if the non-DRX mode is activated or the delayed DL TBF release mode is activated in the cell (i.e. if DRX_TIMER_MAX > 0 or EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 1) Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit ms Minimum 200 Maximum 1500 Default 500
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: GPR Edit Cell / GPRS / Connection Control 2/2
1087 / 1182
External Comment
The following values ofT3192 defined in the 3GPP TS 04.60 are not supported in this release of the Alcatel BSS:0 1 1: 0 msec1 0 0: 80 msec1 0 1: 120 msec1 1 0: 160 msec No No
1088 / 1182
5.2.293 (T3212) - (T3212 (MFS))

This timer indicates to the MS the delay between two consecutive Periodic Location Update procedures. 0: no periodic location update, coded on 8 bits Equal to T3212 (BSC) Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit 6 mn Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 30
1089 / 1182
5.2.294 (TBF_CS_DL) - (TBF_CS_DL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TBF_CS_DL TBF_CS_DL
Threshold defining the number of consecutive PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK not received above which the Coding Scheme of a DL acknowledged or unacknowledged DL TBF is changed to CS-1. step size = 1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 15 Default 8
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / GPRS / CS3/CS4 2/2 If the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis terrestrial link and Ater terrestrial link, in case where N3105_LIMIT < TBF_CS_DL then the loss of consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation but TBF release.If the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis satellitel link or Ater satellite link, in case where N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE < TBF_CS_DL then the loss of consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation but TBF release. No No
1090 / 1182
5.2.295 (TBF_CS_UL) - (TBF_CS_UL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TBF_CS_UL TBF_CS_UL
Threshold defining the maximum number of consecutive times the network receives an invalid UL RLC data block or nothing from the MS having a monoslot GPRS TBF before changing the coding scheme to CS1. For a multislot GPRS TBF, TBF_CS_UL_limit := TBF_CS_UL x n_allocated step size = 1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 64 Default 32
1091 / 1182
5.2.296 (TBF_CS3_BLER_PERIOD) - (TBF_CS3_BLER_PERIOD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TBF_CS3_BLER_PERIOD TBF_CS3_BLER_PERIOD
Defines the window size required to estimate the CS3 BLER. The window size is expressed as a number of DL RLC data blocks. step size = 1 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 512 Default 32
1092 / 1182
5.2.297 (TBF_CS4_BLER_PERIOD) - (TBF_CS4_BLER_PERIOD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TBF_CS4_BLER_PERIOD TBF_CS4_BLER_PERIOD
Defines the window size required to estimate the CS4 BLER. The window size is expressed as a number of DL RLC data blocks. step size = 1 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 512 Default 32
1093 / 1182
5.2.298 (TBF_DL_INIT_CS) - (TBF_DL_INIT_CS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TBF_DL_INIT_CS TBF_DL_INIT_CS
Value of the downlink coding scheme when the link adaptation algorithm is disabled or initial value (i.e. at TBF start or in case of TBF resumption with CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD expiry) of the downlink coding scheme when the link adaptation algorithm is enabled. 0 : CS1, 1 : CS2, 2 : CS3, 3 : CS4 TBF_DL_INIT_CS <= MAX_GPRS_CS In order to avoid establishing too many GCHs during the "short data" MS transfer phases, it is recommended that MAX [MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL, MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL] <= MIN [TBF_DL_INIT_CS, TBF_UL_INIT_CS] in all the cells of the MFS. This rule also tends to reduce the TBF blocking rate in the MFS (by recommending low values for MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL/UL) and to simplify the MFS configuration. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 4 Default 2
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / RLC/MAC No No
1094 / 1182
5.2.299 (TBF_MCS_DL) - (TBF_MCS_DL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TBF_MCS_DL TBF_MCS_DL
Threshold defining the number of consecutive EGPRS PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK not received above which the MCS of a DL acknowledged or unacknowledged DL TBF is changed to MCS-1. step size = 1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 15 Default 12
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / GPRS / E-GPRS If the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis terrestrial link and Ater terrestrial link, in case where EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT < TBF_MCS_DL then the loss of consecutive EGPRS Packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation but TBF release.If the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis satellitel link or Ater satellite link, in case where EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE < TBF_MCS_DL then the loss of consecutive EGPRS Packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation but TBF release. No No
1095 / 1182
5.2.300 (TBF_MCS_UL) - (TBF_MCS_UL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TBF_MCS_UL TBF_MCS_UL
Threshold defining the maximum number of consecutive times the network receives an invalid UL RLC data block or nothing from the MS having a monoslot EGPRS TBF before changing the coding scheme to MCS1. For a multislot EGPRS TBF, TBF_MCS_UL_limit := TBF_MCS_UL x n_allocated_timeslots. step size = 1 Site (CAE) Threshold MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 192 Default 32
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit BSC / GPRS / E-GPRS No No
1096 / 1182
5.2.301 (TBF_UL_INIT_CS) - (TBF_UL_INIT_CS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TBF_UL_INIT_CS TBF_UL_INIT_CS
Value of the uplink coding scheme when the link adaptation algorithm is disabled or initial value (i.e. at TBF start or in case of TBF resumption with CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD expiry) of the uplink coding scheme when the link adaptation algorithm is enabled. 0 : CS1, 1 : CS2, 2 : CS3, 3 : CS4 TBF_UL_INIT_CS <= MAX_GPRS_CS In order to avoid establishing too many GCHs during the "short data" MS transfer phases, it is recommended that MAX [MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL, MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL] <= MIN [TBF_DL_INIT_CS, TBF_UL_INIT_CS] in all the cells of the MFS. This rule also tends to reduce the TBF blocking rate in the MFS (by recommending low values for MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL/UL) and to simplify the MFS configuration. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 4 Default 2
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / RLC/MAC Exception cases apply for uplink TBF establishment on PACCH when link adaptation is enabled. No No
1097 / 1182
5.2.302 (THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING) - (THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING
Threshold above which the load of the serving cell is considered in a high load situation in the NC2 cell ranking process Step size of 10%0 : 0%; 1: 10%; . 10 : 100% Site (CAE) Threshold MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 0
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: This parameter is only relevant if the parameter NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "2: NC2 mode of operation for R99 onwards MS" or "3: NC2 mode of operation for all MS".The serving cell is considered in a low load situation when THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING = 0 %. The value of 0 % deactivates the load evaluation in the serving cell.The load situation of external cells is unknown in the serving cell. The BSS then computes the NC2 load of those cells as follows:- If the threshold THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING is set to a value lower than 100 %, then the cell is considered in a low load situation.- If the threshold THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING is set to 100 %, then the cell is considered in an high load situation No No
1098 / 1182
5.2.303 (TOM8_PRIORITY) - (TOM8_PRIORITY)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TOM8_PRIORITY TOM8_PRIORITY
Defines the relative priority used for the pre-defined TOM8 Packet Flow Context Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 4 Maximum 15 Default 15
1099 / 1182
5.2.304 (TX_EFFICIENCY_ACK_THR) - (TX_EFFICIENCY_ACK_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TX_EFFICIENCY_ACK_THR TX_EFFICIENCY_ACK_THR
Threshold below which the TBF is released because of a bad transmission efficiency in acknowledged mode. step size = 1% Site (CAE) Threshold MFS cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 10
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / Reselection 2/2 No No
1100 / 1182
5.2.305 (TX_EFFICIENCY_NACK_THR) - (TX_EFFICIENCY_NACK_THR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TX_EFFICIENCY_NACK_THR TX_EFFICIENCY_NACK_THR
Threshold below which the TBF is released because of a bad transmission efficiency in unacknowledged mode. step size = 1% Site (CAE) Threshold MFS cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 15
1101 / 1182
5.2.306 (TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD) - (TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD
Number of received RLC data blocks for GPRS TBF after which TX_EFFICIENCY is computed. step size = 1 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 500 Default 200
1102 / 1182
5.2.307 (TX_INT) - (TX_INT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TX_INT TX_INT
Number of PRACH timeslots to spread transmission of PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST. Possible values are : 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 32, 50, coded from 0000 to 1111 It is recommended to set TX_INT so that the corresponding spreading time is about 240 ms. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 2 Maximum 50 Default 8
Coding rules
1103 / 1182
5.2.308 (TX_INTEGER) - (Tx_integer (MFS))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TX_INTEGER Tx_integer (MFS)
Number of RACH timeslots that spread transmission of CHANNEL REQUEST. Possible values are:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 32, 50 respectively binary coded from 0000 to 1111 Equal to Tx_Integer (BSC) When the GPRS is supported through Abis or Ater terrestrial links, it is recommended to set:TX_INTEGER = 32 if the CCCH is not combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF = 0TX_INTEGER = 12 if the CCCH is combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF = 1.When the GPRS is supported through Abis or Ater satellite links, it is recommended to set:TX_INTEGER = 32 whatever the configuration of the CCCH.The number of slots belonging to the MSs RACH between 2 successive Channel Request messages is a random value drawn randomly for each new retransmission with uniform distribution in the set (S, S+1, ...,S+T-1). With T = Tx_Integer and S depending on the CCCH configuration as shown below:1) for non combined CCCH:Tx_Integer = 3, 8, 14, 50 > S = 55 RACH frames (i.e. 253.8 ms)- Tx_Integer = 4, 9, 16 > S = 76 RACH frames (i.e. 349.6 ms)- Tx_Integer = 5, 10, 20 > S = 109 RACH frames (i.e. 501.4 ms)- Tx_Integer = 6, 11, 25 > S = 163 RACH frames (i.e. 749.8 ms)Tx_Integer = 7, 12, 32 > S = 217 RACH frames (i.e. 998.2 ms)2) for combined CCCH:- Tx_Integer = 3, 8, 14, 50 > S = 41 RACH frames (i.e. 357.5 ms)- Tx_Integer = 4, 9, 16 > S = 52 RACH frames (i.e. 453.4 ms)- Tx_Integer = 5, 10, 20 > S = 58 RACH frames (i.e. 505.7 ms)- Tx_Integer = 6, 11, 25 > S = 86 RACH frames (i.e. 749.9 ms)- Tx_Integer = 7, 12, 32 > S = 115 RACH frames (i.e. 1002.8 ms)Note: - In the non-combined CCCH configuration, there are 51 RACH frames per 51-multiframe- In the combined CCCH configuration, there are 27 RACH frames per 51-multiframe. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 3 Maximum 50 Default 32
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: PAG Edit Cell / Cell Information / RACH Ctrl
1104 / 1182
External Comment
When EN_GPRS=1, it is recommended to set: TX_INTEGER = 32 if the CCCH is not combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF = 0TX_INTEGER = 12 if the CCCH is combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF = 1 No No
1105 / 1182
5.2.309 (Wait Indication for Packet Access Reject) - (WI_PR)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Wait Indication for Packet Access Reject WI_PR
Wait indication used in IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT or PACKET ACCESS REJECT, when not in PMU CPU overload situation. WI_PR <= WI_PR_CPU_OVERLOAD. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 3
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: GPR Edit Cell / GPRS / Connection Control 2/2 No No
1106 / 1182
5.2.310 (Wait Indication for Packet Access Reject when CPU overload) - (WI_PR_CPU_OVERLOAD)
Parameter Name HMI Name Wait Indication for Packet Access Reject when CPU overload WI_PR_CPU_OVERLOAD
Logical Name Definition
Wait indication used in IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT or PACKET ACCESS REJECT, when in PMU CPU overload situation. WI_PR <= WI_PR_CPU_OVERLOAD. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Default 10
1107 / 1182
5.2.311 (Weight_P10) - (Weight_P10)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value Weight_P10 Weight_P10
Weight to be used for a TBF/PFC of priority 10 step size = 1 weight_Px >= weight_Py if x<y Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 15 Default 6
1108 / 1182

1109 / 1182

1110 / 1182

1111 / 1182

1112 / 1182

1113 / 1182

1114 / 1182

1115 / 1182

1116 / 1182

1117 / 1182

1118 / 1182

1119 / 1182
1120 / 1182
6 E-GPRS Telecom Parameters
1121 / 1182
6.1 Network (CDE)

6.1.1 (EN_DL_RETRANS_BTS) - (EN_DL_RETRANS_BTS)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_DL_RETRANS_BTS EN_DL_RETRANS_BTS
This flag enables / disables downlink retransmission in the BTS. 0 : disabled, 1 : enabled Network (CDE) Flag MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: DL retransmission in the BTS will be disabled by the MFS in the cells mapped to non Evolium BTSs or in cells having an Abis or an Ater satellite link (whatever the TRE type G3 or G4). In a cell with terrestrial Abis and Ater links, this feature is disabled for G3 TREs only. No No
1122 / 1182
6.1.2 (MIN_THROUGHPUT_GAIN) - (MIN_THROUGHPUT_GAIN)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MIN_THROUGHPUT_GAIN MIN_THROUGHPUT_GAIN
Minimum throughput gain required to be provided to the MS when performing a T2 or T3 TBF reallocation. step size = 0,1 Network (CDE) Threshold MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 0,1 Maximum 5 Default 0,3
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Increasing the value of this parameter above 0,3 might block some reallocations for mobiles having a high multislot class (multislot class >= 30). No No
1123 / 1182
6.1.3 (N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS) - (N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS
Two definitions are possible : - If EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = "enabled" : number of GCHs required to be established due to the "Fast Initial PS Access" feature, - If EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = "disabled" : number of GCHs to keep established when there is no more (E)GPRS traffic in a cell (while the T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timer is running). Those GCHs will be useful in case of (E)GPRS traffic resumption in the cell. Network (CDE) Number MFS MFS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 5 Default 1
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: This parameter is significant only for Evolium BTSs No No
1124 / 1182
6.2 Site (CAE)

6.2.1 (ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION) (ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION
Allows EDA operations for mobile stations in DTM mode. 0: the usage of EDA for mobile stations in DTM mode is not allowed,1: the usage of EDA for mobile stations in DTM mode is allowed. Site (CAE) Flag MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: This flag is relevant only if DTM and EDA are both activated. No No
1125 / 1182
6.2.2 (BEP_PERIOD) - (BEP_PERIOD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules BEP_PERIOD BEP_PERIOD
Filter constant for EGPRS channel quality measurements. coded on 4 bits as follows:0: 11: 22: 33: 44: 55: 76: 107: 128: 159: 2010: 2511: Reserved for future use12: Reserved for future use13: Reserved for future use14: Reserved for future use15: Reserved for future use Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 25 Default 10
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: ? Edit Cell / Cell Information / Cell Description The BEP_PERIOD parameter defines the forgetting factor used in the MEAN_BEP and CV_BEP averaging at the MS side.In case of cell without frequency hopping and without "fast" mobiles (i.e. not motorway or TGV coverage), it is advised to set a higher value (e.g. 25) in order to avoid spurious MCS changes causing higher BLER and throughput loss. No No
1126 / 1182
6.2.3 (E_TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD) - (E_TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition E_TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD E_TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD
Number of received radio blocks for an EGPRS TBF after which E_TX_EFFICIENCY is computed. step size = 1 Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 500 Default 200
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: ? Edit BSC / GPRS / E-GPRS No No
1127 / 1182
6.2.4 (EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL) - (EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL
Activation level of Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA). 0: EDA activated for all mobile stations (supporting the feature),1: EDA activated for R99-onwards mobile stations (supporting the feature),2: EDA activated for Rel-4-onwards mobile stations (supporting the feature). Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 2 Default 0
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: -This parameter is relevant only if EDA is activated (EN_EDA parameter).-The activation level may provide an artificial mean to limit the inter-operability risks due to mobile stations with uncorrect EDA implementation (EDA is a R97 feature but has been completely clarified in Rel-6). R99 is detected through the Revision Level Indicator. A mobile station is considered Rel-4onwards compliant if it indicates the field "GERAN Feature Package 1" in its MS Radio Access Capability. No No
1128 / 1182
6.2.5 (EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT) - (EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT
For a DL EGPRS TBF, if the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis terrestrial link and Ater terrestrial link, this parameter defines the maximum number of expected Packet Downlink ACK/NACK or Packet Control Acknowledgement messages consecutively lost on the radio interface, before triggering an abnormal release of the DL TBF. This parameter is used in conjunction with the MIN_RLF_TIME_DL delay to decide if the DL TBF shall be released. Site (CAE) Threshold MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 32 Default 20
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No If EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT < TBF_MCS_DL then the loss of consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation but TBF release. EGPRS_N3105_Limit has to be set in order not to release a DL TBF in case of transient bad radio conditions.The polling frequency depends on Ack_factor, T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport, MS multislot class and on the number of TBFs per PDCH. No No
1129 / 1182
6.2.6 (EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE) (EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE
For a DL EGPRS TBF, if the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis satellite link or Ater satellite link, this parameter defines the maximum number of expected Packet Downlink ACK/NACK or Packet Control Acknowledgement messages consecutively lost on the radio interface, before triggering an abnormal release of the DL TBF. This parameter is used in conjunction with the MIN_RLF_TIME_DL delay to decide if the DL TBF shall be released. Site (CAE) Threshold MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 32 Default 24
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No If EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE < TBF_MCS_DL then the loss of consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation but TBF release. EGPRS_N3105_Limit_Satellite has to be set in order not to release a DL TBF in case of transient bad radio conditions.The polling frequency depends on Ack_factor, T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport, MS multislot class and on the number of TBFs per PDCH. No No
1130 / 1182
6.2.7 (EN_EDA) - (EN_EDA)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules EN_EDA EN_EDA
Enables Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA). 0: EDA not activated,1: EDA activated EN_EDA = 0 in case of not Evolium BTSEN_EDA = 0 in case of extended cell Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: When EDA is activated, its activation domain is given by the EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL and ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION parameters. No No
1131 / 1182
6.2.8 (EN_IR_UL) - (EN_IR_UL_per_cell)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_IR_UL EN_IR_UL_per_cell
Enables/Disables Incremental redundancy for the uplink TBF in the BSS. 0: Disable, 1: Enable Can be enabled only if BTS Generation = G4 Among the features Incremental Redundancy in uplink (EN_IR_UL) and RLC resegmentation in uplink (EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL), Alcatel recommends to enable first the Incremental Redundancy in Uplink. The activation of both at the same time may reduce the gain of the Incremental Redundancy Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: The Incremental Redundancy for the uplink TBF feature is supported only on G4 BTSs. No No
1132 / 1182
6.2.9 (EN_MCS1_in_CRP) - (EN_MCS1_in_CRP)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_MCS1_in_CRP EN_MCS1_in_CRP
Enables the forced usage of MCS-1 for uplink EGPRS TBF in contention resolution phase at one-phase access to make this phase more robust. 0: the BSS does not force uplink EGPRS TBF to use MCS-1 during the contention resolution phase at one-phase access.1: the BSS forces uplink EGPRS TBF to use MCS-1 during the contention resolution phase at one-phase access. Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
Coding rules
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: The forced usage of MCS-1 for uplink EGPRS TBF in contention resolution phase at one-phase access corresponds to the behaviour in B9. No No
1133 / 1182
6.2.10 (EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL) (EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL_per_cell)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL_per_cell
Enables/Disables the resegmentation for the uplink TBF in the cell, in case of RLC in acknowledged mode. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Among the features Incremental Redundancy in uplink (EN_IR_UL) and RLC resegmentation in uplink (EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL), Alcatel recommends to enable first the Incremental Redundancy in Uplink. The activation of both at the same time may reduce the gain of the Incremental Redundancy Site (CAE) Flag MFS cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
1134 / 1182
6.2.11 (N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU) - (N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU
Number of free 64k Ater TSs that are kept "in reserve" in order to be able to serve some prioritary requests in cells managed by the GPU. The prioritary requests are the GCH establishment requests launched when the first TBF has to be established in a cell (useful to guarantee that MM traffic will be supported in any cell at any time).Note : In case of non-Evolium BTS, those are PDCHs that will be established instead of GCHs.In case N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU = 0, then no Ater margin is managed.In case N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU > 0, RRM will ensure that N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU 64k Ater TSs are always free (i.e. not used by a GCH in the GPU). From then on, only prioritary requests will be allowed to establish some GCHs (Evolium BTS) / PDCHs (non-Evolium BTS) with those Ater resources. Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 10 Default 2
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: - Increasing the value of N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU will make the average number of unused Ater nibbles in the GPU increase. That corresponds to a loss of Ater resources on the field, as the on-going TBF traffic will never "benefit from the margin of Ater resources". But, on the other hand, the likelihood of not serving a prioritary request in the GPU will be become very low.- Decreasing the value of N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU (to a non null value) will make it possible that prioritary requests cannot be served in case several such requests have to be served in a short period of time (i.e. before having had the time to "fill the Ater margin" up again), especially if the requests have to be served on several different DSPs (one 64k Ater TS will be consumed by each DSP).- Setting N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU to 0 will make it possible the cases where prioritary requests cannot be served at all.
1135 / 1182
No No
1136 / 1182
6.2.12 (N_UL_BIAS_FOR_EDA) - (N_UL_BIAS_FOR_EDA)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition N_UL_BIAS_FOR_EDA N_UL_BIAS_FOR_EDA
Minimum number of significantly consecutive uplink biases observed during a transfer to allow a mobile station to use Extended Dynamic Allocation. Site (CAE) Number MFS BSS Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 64 Default 1
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: This parameter can allow using EDA only in case of big UL transfers No No
1137 / 1182
6.2.13 (T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport) - (T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport
Time period to request for an EGPRS Packet Downlink Ack/Nack with measurements. step size = 20 ms Site (CAE) Timer MFS cell Unit ms Minimum 60 Maximum 3000 Default 200
OMC Changes: None RNO Changes: No ??? No No
1138 / 1182
6.2.14 (TBF_DL_INIT_MCS) - (TBF_DL_INIT_MCS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TBF_DL_INIT_MCS TBF_DL_INIT_MCS
Value of the downlink modulation and coding scheme when the link adaptation algorithm is disabled or initial value (i.e. at TBF start or in case of TBF resumption with CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD expiry) of the downlink modulation and coding scheme when the link adaptation algorithm is enabled. 0 : MCS-1 1 : MCS-2 2 : MCS-3 3 : MCS-4 4 : MCS-5 5 : MCS-6 6 : MCS-7 7 : MCS-8 8 : MCS-9 TBF_DL_INIT_MCS <= MAX_EGPRS_MCS In order to avoid establishing too many GCHs during the "short data" MS transfer phases, it is recommended that MAX [MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL, MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL] <= MIN [TBF_DL_INIT_MCS, TBF_UL_INIT_MCS] in all the cells of the MFS. This rule also tends to reduce the TBF blocking rate in the MFS (by recommending low values for MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL/UL) and to simplify the MFS configuration. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 9 Default 3
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / RLC/MAC The parameter is significant only if EN_EGPRS is enabled No No
1139 / 1182
6.2.15 (TBF_UL_INIT_MCS) - (TBF_UL_INIT_MCS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TBF_UL_INIT_MCS TBF_UL_INIT_MCS
Value of the uplink modulation and coding scheme when the link adaptation algorithm is disabled or initial value (i.e. at TBF start or in case of TBF resumption with CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD expiry) of the uplink modulation and coding scheme when the link adaptation algorithm is enabled. 0 : MCS-1 1 : MCS-2 2 : MCS-3 3 : MCS-44 : MCS-55 : MCS-66 : MCS-77 : MCS-88 : MCS-9 TBF_UL_INIT_MCS <= MAX_EGPRS_MCS In order to avoid establishing too many GCHs during the "short data" MS transfer phases, it is recommended that MAX [MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL, MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL] <= MIN [TBF_DL_INIT_MCS, TBF_UL_INIT_MCS] in all the cells of the MFS. This rule also tends to reduce the TBF blocking rate in the MFS (by recommending low values for MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL/UL) and to simplify the MFS configuration. Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 9 Default 3
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: No Edit Cell / GPRS / RLC/MAC The parameter is significant only if EN_EGPRS is enabled. Exception cases apply for uplink TBF establishment on PACCH when link adaptation is enabled. No No
1140 / 1182
7 DTM Telecom Parameters
1141 / 1182
7.1 Site (CAE)

7.1.1 (EN_DTM) - (EN_DTM)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules EN_DTM EN_DTM
Enables/disables the support of dual transfer mode 0: disabled, 1: enabled EN_DTM may be set to 1 only if :-The cell is mapped on an Evolium BTS-CELL_RANGE = 0-MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD > 1 To get full benefit of DTM feature, a Gs interface shall be present, and Network_Operation_Mode shall be set to 1 (NMO 1). However, DTM is still possible with NMO2 or NMO3. Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Recommended rules
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: ((E)GPRS is mandatory for DTM operation, and at least 2 PDCHs are required in the PS zone for allocation of DTM resources to (at least) one DTM call, therefore, MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD shall at least be equal to 2. No No
1142 / 1182
7.1.2 (MAX_LAPDM) - (MAX_LAPDM)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition MAX_LAPDM MAX_LAPDM
Maximum number of LAPDm frames on which a layer 3 can be segmented into and be sent on the main DCCH. Coded on 3 bits:000 : 5001 : 6.111 : 12 Site (CAE) Number BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 5 Maximum 12 Default 7
1143 / 1182
1144 / 1182
8 2G-3G Telecom Parameters
1145 / 1182
8.1 Network (CDE)

8.1.1 (CGI_3G_REQUIRED) - (CGI_3G_REQD)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules CGI_3G_REQUIRED CGI_3G_REQD
Controls format of 3G cell identifications sent to the MSC. 0: CGI not used, 1: CGI used Alcatel recommend to set the CGI_3G_REQD parameter to 1 provided that the MSC supports the CGI format. The CGI_3G_REQD parameter shall be set to 1 if the operator wants to allow inter-PLMN 2G to 2G handovers. If this parameter needs to be changed, it is recommended to change it during a migration phase to avoid any additional Telecom outage. Network (CDE) Flag BSC BSC Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 1
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Depends on MSC Type. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
1146 / 1182
8.2 Site (CAE)

8.2.1 (A_ECNO_HO) - (A_ECNO_HO)
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value A_ECNO_HO A_ECNO_HO
Window size for Ec/No level averages for 2G to 3G handover Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit Samfr Minimum 1 Maximum 31 Default 8
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Single Umbrella Concentric Concentric Umbrella Microcell Minicell Extended inner cell Extended outer cell 8 8 8 8 4 8 8 8
Nb of TRX Dependent
No
1147 / 1182
8.2.2 (Cell Capacity Class) - (CELL_CAPACITY_CLASS)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Cell Capacity Class CELL_CAPACITY_CLASS
Capacity class of the cell, measured on a linear scale, ranging from 1 to 100. binary value on 8 bits the Cell Capacity Class shall follow the recommended rule: "In order to fulfill the 3GPP requirement of having a linear scale in the capacity class, ranging from 1 to 100:Cell Capacity Class is a linear function of the Cell capacity: value 1 shall indicate the minimum capacity class, and 100 shall indicate the maximum capacity class. Capacity class should be measured on a linear scale.The default value of Cell Capacity Class should depend on the number of available TCHs in the cell and since there may be up to 126 TCH channels in one GSM cell:Cell_Capacity_Class = int{[(99/125) x (NTCH - 1)] + 1}where NTCH is the number of all TCH channels in the Cell." Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit % Minimum 1 Maximum 100 Default 100
1148 / 1182
8.2.3 (CI_3G(n)) - (CI_3G(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition CI_3G(n) CI_3G(n)
This parameter indicates the Cell Identifier of a 3G cell as defined in 3GPP TS 25.401 Binary value on 16 bitsThe value of "-1" indicates that no cell identifier is provided by the operator (the default value, indicated here, is for implementation purposes). MCC_3G(n), MNC_3G(n), RNC_ID(n) and CI_3G(n) shall together uniquely identify a 3G cellCI_3G(n) is a mandatory parameter (must be different from "-1") Site (CAE) Number BSC 3G cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 65535 Default -1
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: The default value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
1149 / 1182
8.2.4 (EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HO) (EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HO EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HO
Allows handovers towards 3G cells for a given MS when I.E. Service Handover is missing and the load in the serving cell is high (see THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQ 0 : disable, 1 : enable Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
1150 / 1182
8.2.5 (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION) (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION
Enables/Disables the GSM to UTRAN FDD cell reselections and defines the 3G search activation mode for MS in GMM Ready state. 0: Disabled1: Enabled with 3G search activated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state,2: Enabled with 3G search deactivated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state.3: Enabled with 3G search activated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state, even if Network_Control_Order > 1 EN_2G_3G_CELL_RESELECTION and EN_2G_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION shall not be <>0 at the same time.1) for Non Evolium serving cell : The cell neighborhood for reselection is controlled by EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION value and FDD_ARFCN_LIST content.- if the neighborhood of the serving cell for reselection is 2G only, then there can be up to 32 different BCCH 2G frequencies for the set of all the target cells.- if the neighborhood of the serving cell for reselection is mixed 2G/3G, and if all 2G frequencies can be encoded in the SI2 or SI2bis message, and if the SI2ter message is used to encode only 3G frequencies, then there shall be no more than 31 different BCCH 2G frequencies for the set of all the target cells.2) For Evolium serving cell : The cell neighborhood for reselection is controlled by EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION value and FDD_ARFCN_LIST content.- if the neighborhood of the serving cell for reselection is 2G only, or mixed 2G/3G, then there can be up to 32 different The support of extended BCCH (parameter BCCH_EXT) is HIGHLY recommended in cells having adjacent cells in several frequency bands and at least 18 adjacent frequencies within the same band.Value 3 should be used only in case of good 3G FDD coverage. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 3 Default 0
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
OMC Changes: RNO Changes:
1151 / 1182
External Comment
If the NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "NC2 mode of operation for R99 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for all MS", then the 3G search is systematically deactivated when activating the NC2 mode through the Packet Measurement Order [NC2] message. If EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION = "Enabled with 3G search activated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state, even if Network_Control_Order > 1", then the 3G search is activated even when activating the NC2 mode (the Packet Measurement Order [NC2] message will not be sent.) No No
1152 / 1182
8.2.6 (EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION) (EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION
Enables/Disables the GSM to UTRAN TD-SCDMA cell reselections and defines the 3G search activation mode for MS in GMM Ready state. 0: Disabled1: Enabled with 3G search activated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state,2: Enabled with 3G search deactivated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state.3: Enabled with 3G search activated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state, even if Network_Control_Order > 1 In front of non-Evolium cells, the parameter value shall be forced to 0.EN_2G_3G_CELL_RESELECTION and EN_2G_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION shall not be <>0 at the same time. The support of extended BCCH (parameter BCCH_EXT) is HIGHLY recommended in cells Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 3 Default 0
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
Recommended rules
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: If EN_2G_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION < 3, and If the NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "NC2 mode of operation for R99 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for Rel4 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for all MS", the 3G search is systematically deactivated when activating the NC2 mode through the Packet Measurement Order [NC2] message. This 3G search deactivation is then performed independently of the value of the EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION parameter. No No
1153 / 1182
8.2.7 (EN_3G_DIVERSITY(n)) - (EN_3G_DIVERSITY(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_3G_DIVERSITY(n) EN_3G_DIVERSITY(n)
This parameter indicates if diversity is applied for the cell 1 bit: 0 diversity is not applied, 1 diversity is applied Site (CAE) Flag BSC 3G cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
1154 / 1182
8.2.8 (EN_3G_HO) - (EN_3G_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules EN_3G_HO EN_3G_HO
This flag enables/disables the 2G-3G handover 0: disabled, 1: enabled 1) For Non Evolium serving cell:The cell neighborhood for handover is controlled by EN_3G_HO and FDD_ARFCN values.- since the neighborhood of the serving cell for handover is 2G only, then there can be up to 32 different Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: 2G-3G Handover will be disabled by the BSS in cells mapped to non Evolium BTSs No No
1155 / 1182
8.2.9 (EN_COMPRESSED_INTER_RAT_INFO) (EN_COMPRESSED_INTER_RAT_INFO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value EN_COMPRESSED_INTER_RAT_INFO EN_COMPRESSED_INTER_RAT_INFO
Allows sending by the MS of Compressed Inter-RAT HO information 0 : disable, 1 : enable Site (CAE) Flag BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Shall be set to 1 only if all RNCs neighbour to this BSS support the feature. No No
1156 / 1182
8.2.10 (EN_CPICH_2G_3G_RESELECTION) (EN_CPICH_2G_3G_RESELECTION)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition EN_CPICH_2G_3G_RESELECTION EN_CPICH_2G_3G_RESELECTION
Defines the CPICH measurements used in the 2G to 3G cell reselection 0: Only 1 CPICH measurement is used1: CPICH Ec/No and RSCP measurements must be used This parameter can be set on 1 only if EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_ RESELECTION <>0 Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
1157 / 1182
8.2.11 (EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION) - (EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION
Enables a fast 3G cell reselection at 2G CS call release. 0:fast 3G cell reselection at 2G CS call release is not used1:fast 3G cell reselection at 2G CS call release is used This parameter can be set to 1 only if EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_ RESELECTION <>0.EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION shall not be set to 1 when EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_ RESELECTION is <>0. Site (CAE) Flag BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 1 Default 0
Mandatory rules
1158 / 1182
8.2.12 (FDD_ARFCN) - (FDD_ARFCN(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition FDD_ARFCN FDD_ARFCN(n)
Downlink FDD UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency Numbers (UARFCN) The value of "-1" indicates that no UARFCNis provided by the operator (the default value, indicated here, is for implementation purposes). For a given 2G cell, the maximum number of different FDD_ARFCN(n) among all 2G to 3G adjacencies for handover is 3 FDD_ARFCN(n) is a mandatory parameter (must be different from "-1")Only the following downlink UARFCN ranges are standardized: I) 10562-10838 and II) 9662-9938 and III) 1162-1513 and IV) 1537-1738 andV) 4357-4458 andVI) 4387-4413 andVII) 2237- 2563 andVIII) 2937-3088 andIX) 9237-9387 Site (CAE) Number BSC 3G cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 16383 Default -1
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: The default value indicated here is for implementation purposes.The FDD UTRAN frequencies are coded as the UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency Numbers (UARFCN) on the Air interface. No No
1159 / 1182
8.2.13 (FDD_ARFCN_LIST) - (FDD_ARFCN_LIST(BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition FDD_ARFCN_LIST FDD_ARFCN_LIST(BSC)
List of neighbour Downlink FDD UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency Numbers (UARFCN) The value of "-1" indicates that no UARFCN is provided. The defined frequencies (i.e. not set to -1) in the set shall be different. Only the following downlink UARFCN ranges are standardized: I) 10562-10838 and II) 9662-9938 and III) 1162-1513 and IV) 1537-1738 andV) 4357-4458 andVI) 4387-4413 andVII) 2237- 2563 andVIII) 2937-3088 andIX) 9237-9387 Site (CAE) List of numbers BSC BSS Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 16383 Default -1
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: BSS Edit BSC / UMTS The FDD UTRAN frequencies are coded as the UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency Numbers (UARFCN) on the Air interface.The FDD UARFCN of the 3G neighbour cells are broadcast on BCCH and on PBCCH if there is a PBCCH allocated in the serving cell. No No
1160 / 1182
8.2.14 (FDD_GPRS_Qoffset) - (FDD_GPRS_Qoffset)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition FDD_GPRS_Qoffset FDD_GPRS_Qoffset
Offset added to the received level average of the serving cell and of the neighbour GSM cells for UTRAN FDD cell re-selection in GPRS Coded value (binary): Value (dB): Text displayed at the OMC0: -32: Always select a 3G cell if possible1: -28: -28 dB2: -24: -24 dB3: -20: -20 dB4: -16: -16 dB5: -12: -12 dB6: -8: -8 dB7: -4: -4 dB8: 0: 0 dB9: 4: 4 dB10: 8: 8 dB11: 12: 12 dB12: 16: 16 dB13: 20: 20 dB14: 24: 24 dB15: 28: 28 dB Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dB Minimum -32 Maximum 28 Default -32
Coding rules
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: This parameter is broadcast on PBCCH if there is a PBCCH allocated in the serving cell. No No
1161 / 1182
8.2.15 (FDD_MULTIRAT_REPORTING) - (FDD_MULTIRAT_REPORTING)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition FDD_MULTIRAT_REPORTING FDD_MULTIRAT_REPORTING
Number of the strongest 3G cells to be reported by the MS in the measurement report message Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 3 Default 2
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: This parameter is broadcast on BCCH and on PBCCH if there is a PBCCH allocated in the serving cell.This parameter is meaningful only if EN_3G_HO is set to enabled. If disabled, this parameter is considered as equal to zero (the MS shall report only 2G cells).This parameter is also broadcast on SACCH. No No
1162 / 1182
8.2.16 (FDD_Qmin) - (FDD_Qmin(BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules FDD_Qmin FDD_Qmin(BSC)
Minimum threshold for Ec/Io for UTRAN FDD cell re-selection. 0 = -20 dB1 = -6 dB2 = -18 dB3 = -8dB4 = -16dB5 = -10dB6 = -14dB7 = -12dB Equal to FDD_Qmin(MFS) Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -20 Maximum -6 Default -12
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: SEL Edit cell / UMTS This parameter is broadcast on BCCH and on PBCCH if there is a PBCCH allocated in the serving cell. No No
1163 / 1182
8.2.17 (FDD_Qmin_Offset) - (FDD_Qmin_Offset)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules FDD_Qmin_Offset FDD_Qmin_Offset
Applies an offset to FDD_Qmin value coded on 3 bits:0 = 0 dB, 1 = 2 dB, 2 = 4 dB, 3 = 6 dB, 4 = 8 dB, 5 = 10 dB, 6 = 12 dB, 7 = 14 dB. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum 0 Maximum 14 Default 0
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Available only if EN_CPICH_2G_3G_Reselection = 1 No No
1164 / 1182
8.2.18 (FDD_Qoffset) - (FDD_Qoffset (BSC))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition FDD_Qoffset FDD_Qoffset (BSC)
Offset added to the received level average of the serving cell and of the neighbour GSM cells for UTRAN FDD cell re-selection. Coded value (binary): Value (dB): Text displayed at the OMC0: -32: Always select a 3G cell if possible1: -28: -28 dB2: -24: -24 dB3: -20: -20 dB4: -16: -16 dB5: -12: -12 dB6: -8: -8 dB7: -4: -4 dB8: 0: 0 dB9: 4: 4 dB10: 8: 8 dB11: 12: 12 dB12: 16: 16 dB13: 20: 20 dB14: 24: 24 dB15: 28: 28 dB Equal to FDD_Qoffset(MFS) Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -32 Maximum 28 Default -32
Coding rules
OMC Changes: PRC & SC RNO Changes: SEL Edit cell / UMTS This parameter is broadcast on BCCH and on PBCCH if there is a PBCCH allocated in the serving cell. No No
1165 / 1182
8.2.19 (FDD_RSCPmin) - (FDD_RSCPmin)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules FDD_RSCPmin FDD_RSCPmin
Minimum threshold of RSCP for UTRAN FDD cell re-selection. coded on 4bits:0 = -114 dBm, 1 = -112 dBm, 2 = -110 dBm, 3 = -108 dBm, 4 = -106 dBm, 5 = -104 dBm, 6 = -102 dBm, 7 = -100 dBm, 8 = -98 dBm, 9 = -96 dBm, 10 = -94 dBm, 11 = -92 dBm, 12 = -90 dBm, 13 = -88 dBm, 14 = -86 dBm, 15 = -84 dBm. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -114 Maximum -84 Default -102
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Available only if EN_CPICH_2G_3G_Reselection=1 No No
1166 / 1182
8.2.20 (LAC_3G(n)) - (LAC_3G(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition LAC_3G(n) LAC_3G(n)
This parameter indicates the Location Area Code as defined in 3GPP TS 24.008. It is used in the HANDOVER COMMAND message binary value on 16 bitsThe value of "-1" indicates that no LAC is provided by the operator (the default value, indicated here, is for implementation purposes). LAC_3G(n) is a mandatory parameter (must be different from "-1") Site (CAE) Number BSC 3G cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 65535 Default -1
Coding rules
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: The default value indicated here is for implementation purposes No No
1167 / 1182
8.2.21 (Qsearch_C) - (Qsearch_C)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Qsearch_C Qsearch_C
Threshold for searching for 3G cells in dedicated mode depending whether the received signal level of the serving cell is below or above the threshold. Coded value (binary): Value (dBm): Text displayed at the OMC0: -98: -98 dBm (below)1: -94: -94 dBm (below)2: -90: -90dBm (below)3: -86: -86dBm (below)4: -82: -82 dBm (below)5: -78: -78 dBm (below)6: -74: -74 dBm (below)7: -70: Always search for 3G neighbour cells8: -78: -78 dBm (above)9: -74: -74 dBm (above)10: -70: -70 dBm (above)11: -66: -66 dBm (above)12: -62: -62 dBm (above)13: -58: -58 dBm (above)14: -54: -54 dBm (above)15: -50: Never search for 3G neighbour cells In a cell where at least one 2G to 3G adjacency has been defined, Qsearch_C =-70, i.e. always search for 3G neighbour cells Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -98 Maximum -50 Default -70
Coding rules
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: This threshold is used to search for 3G cells if the received signal level is below (-98 dBm to "always search for 3G neighbour cells") or above (-78 dBm to "never search for neighbour cells") the threshold.This parameter is broadcast on SACCH No No
1168 / 1182
8.2.22 (Qsearch_I) - (Qsearch_I)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Qsearch_I Qsearch_I
Threshold for searching for 3G cells depending whether the received level average of the serving cell is below or above the threshold. Coded value (binary): Value (dBm): Text displayed at the OMC0: -98: -98 dBm (below)1: -94: -94 dBm (below)2: -90: -90dBm (below)3: -86: -86dBm (below)4: -82: -82 dBm (below)5: -78: -78 dBm (below)6: -74: -74 dBm (below)7: -70: Always search for 3G neighbour cells8: -78: -78 dBm (above)9: -74: -74 dBm (above)10: -70: -70 dBm (above)11: -66: -66 dBm (above)12: -62: -62 dBm (above)13: -58: -58 dBm (above)14: -54: -54 dBm (above)15: -50: Never search for 3G neighbour cells In a cell with FDD_ARFCN_list not empty, Qsearch_I =-70, i.e. always search for 3G neighbour cells Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -98 Maximum -50 Default -50
Coding rules
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: This threshold is used to search for 3G cells if the received signal level is below (-98 dBm to "always search for 3G neighbour cells") or above (-78 dBm to "never search for neighbour cells") the threshold.This parameter is broadcast on BCCH No No
1169 / 1182
8.2.23 (Qsearch_P) - (Qsearch_P)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Qsearch_P Qsearch_P
Threshold for searching for 3G cells in GPRS depending whether the received level average of the serving cell is below or above the threshold Coded value (binary): Value (dBm): Text displayed at the OMC0: -98: -98 dBm (below)1: -94: -94 dBm (below)2: -90: -90dBm (below)3: -86: -86dBm (below)4: -82: -82 dBm (below)5: -78: -78 dBm (below)6: -74: -74 dBm (below)7: -70: Always search for 3G neighbour cells8: -78: -78 dBm (above)9: -74: -74 dBm (above)10: -70: -70 dBm (above)11: -66: -66 dBm (above)12: -62: -62 dBm (above)13: -58: -58 dBm (above)14: -54: -54 dBm (above)15: -50: Never search for 3G neighbour cells In a cell with FDD_ARFCN_list not empty, Qsearch_P =-70, i.e. always search for 3G neighbour cells Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dBm Minimum -98 Maximum -50 Default -50
Coding rules
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: This threshold is used to search for 3G cells if the received signal level is below (-98 dBm to "always search for 3G neighbour cells") or above (-78 dBm to "never search for neighbour cells") the threshold in GPRS.This parameter is broadcast on BCCH and on PBCCH if there is a PBCCH allocated in the serving cell. No No
1170 / 1182
8.2.24 (Qsearch_P_PTM) - (Qsearch_P_PTM)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Qsearch_P_PTM Qsearch_P_PTM
Threshold for searching for 3G cells in GPRS packet transfer mode depending whether the received level average of the serving cell is below or above the threshold Coded value (binary): Value (dBm): Text displayed at the OMC0: -98: -98 dBm (below)1: -94: -94 dBm (below)2: -90: -90dBm (below)3: -86: -86dBm (below)4: -82: -82 dBm (below)5: -78: -78 dBm (below)6: -74: -74 dBm (below)7: -70: Always search for 3G neighbour cells8: -78: -78 dBm (above)9: -74: -74 dBm (above)10: -70: -70 dBm (above)11: -66: -66 dBm (above)12: -62: -62 dBm (above)13: -58: -58 dBm (above)14: -54: -54 dBm (above)15: -50: Never search for 3G neighbour cells Site (CAE) Number MFS cell Unit dBm Minimum -98 Maximum -50 Default -50
Coding rules
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: This threshold is used to search for 3G cells if the received signal level is below (-98 dBm to "always search for 3G neighbour cells") or above (-78 dBm to "never search for neighbour cells") the threshold in GPRS packet transfer mode.This parameter is sent in Packet Measurement Order on PACCH. No No
1171 / 1182
8.2.25 (RNC_ID(n)) - (RNC_ID(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition RNC_ID(n) RNC_ID(n)
This parameter indicates the RNC Identifier as defined in 3GPP TS 25.401. It is used in HO Required message sent to the MSC. binary value on 12 bits.The value of "-1" indicates that no RNCid is provided by the operator (the default value, indicated here, is for implementation purposes). MCC_3G(n), MNC_3G(n), RNC_ID(n) and CI_3G(n) shall together uniquely identify a 3G cellRNC_ID(n) is a mandatory parameter (must be different from "-1") Site (CAE) Number BSC 3G cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 4095 Default -1
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
1172 / 1182
8.2.26 (SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G(n)) - (SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G(n))

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G(n) SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G(n)
This parameter indicates the Primary Scrambling Code as defined in 3GPP TS 25.213 binary value on 9 bits.The value of "-1" indicates that no scrambling code is provided by the operator (the default value, indicated here, is for implementation purposes). EN_3G_DIVERSITY(n) can be True only if SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G(n) <> "-1"SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G(n) is a mandatory parameter (must be different from "-1")In any serving cell there shall be only one 3G target cell defined with the couple FDD_ARFCN(n) SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G(n) Site (CAE) Number BSC 3G cell Unit None Minimum 0 Maximum 511 Default -1
Coding rules
Mandatory rules
1173 / 1182
8.2.27 (T3121) - (T3121)

This timer is started by sending an INTER SYSTEM TO UTRAN HANDOVER message to the MS and is normally stopped when the MS has correctly seized the UTRAN channel(s). Its purpose is to keep the old channels sufficiently long for the MS to be able to return to the old channels, and to release the channels if the MS is lost. step size = 0.1 sec Site (CAE) Timer BSC BSC Unit sec Minimum 0 Maximum 25.5 Default 14
1174 / 1182
8.2.28 (TDD_FREQUENCY_LIST) - (TDD_ARFCN_LIST)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules TDD_FREQUENCY_LIST TDD_ARFCN_LIST
List of neighbour TDD UTRAN frequencies (TD-SCDMA) 0 = 0.0 MHz, 1 = 0.2 MHz, ... , 16383 = 3276.6 MHz. The value of "-1" indicates that no UTRAN TDD frequency is provided. The defined frequencies (i.e. not set to -1) in the set shall be different.Only following frequency bands are standardised : a) 1900 1920 MHz (UL/DL), 2010 2025 MHz (UL/DL) b) 1850 1910 MHz (UL/DL), 1930 1990 MHz (UL/DL) c) 1910 1930 MHz (UL/DL). Bands b) and c) are defined only for ITU region 2 (Americas). Site (CAE) List of numbers BSC BSS Unit MHz Minimum 0 Maximum 16383 Default -1
Mandatory rules
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: The TDD UTRAN frequencies are coded as the UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency Numbers (ARFCN) on the Air interface.The TDD UTRAN frequencies of the 3G neighbour cells are broadcast on BCCH. No No
1175 / 1182
8.2.29 (TDD_Qoffset) - (TDD_Qoffset)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition TDD_Qoffset TDD_Qoffset
Offset added to the received level average of the serving cell and of the neighbour GSM cells for UTRAN TDD cell re-selection. Coded value (binary): Value (dB): Text displayed at the OMC0: -32: Always select a 3G cell if possible1: -28: -28 dB2: -24: -24 dB3: -20: -20 dB4: -16: -16 dB5: -12: -12 dB6: -8: -8 dB7: -4: -4 dB8: 0: 0 dB9: 4: 4 dB10: 8: 8 dB11: 12: 12 dB12: 16: 16 dB13: 20: 20 dB14: 24: 24 dB15: 28: 28 dB Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -32 Maximum 28 Default -32
Coding rules
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: This parameter is broadcast on BCCH. No No
1176 / 1182
8.2.30 (THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT) (THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT
Load threshold determining whether a 3G to 2G handover request shall be rejected in load situation; the feature is deactivated by setting THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT to its maximum value 100%. binary value on 8 bits THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT shall be lower than the 2G load thresholds HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD or equal to 100%. Site (CAE) Number BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 100
1177 / 1182
8.2.31 (THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQ) - (THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQ)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQ THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQ
Load threshold on the serving cell below which handovers towards 3G cells are forbidden when I.E. Service Handover is missing (whatever EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HO value) Step size = 1 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit % Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Default 0
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Value 0 disables the feature. No No
1178 / 1182
8.2.32 (THR_ECNO_HO) - (THR_ECNO_HO)

Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules THR_ECNO_HO THR_ECNO_HO
Ec/No threshold above which a handover to UTRAN may be triggered step size = 0.5 dB, coded over 6 bits0: "HO to 3G attempted whatever the Ec/No", 1: -24.0,2: -23.5,3: -23, ...,48: -0.5,49: 0.0 Site (CAE) Threshold BSC cell Unit dB Minimum -24.5 Maximum 0 Default -15
1179 / 1182
1180 / 1182
9 Telecom Parameters
1181 / 1182
9.1 Site (CAE)

9.1.1 (LAC) - (LAC(n)(BSC))
Parameter Name HMI Name Logical Name Definition Coding rules Mandatory rules LAC LAC(n)(BSC)
Location Area Code of adjacent cell. LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same timeEqual to LAC(n)(MFS)A couple of mate extended cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall have the same Site (CAE) Reference BSC cell Unit None Minimum 1 Maximum 65535 Default 65535
OMC Changes: RNO Changes: Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here is for implementation purposes. No No
1182 / 1182

B10 para

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Deskripsi Asli:

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

B10 para

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Alcatel-Lucent GSM

Telecom Parameters Dictionary

OMC Document Reference Guide Release B10

3BK 21224 AAAA PCZZA Ed.10

BLANK PAGE BREAK

Status Short title

3BK 21224 AAAA PCZZA Ed.10

3BK 21224 AAAA PCZZA Ed.10

3BK 21224 AAAA PCZZA Ed.10

3BK 21224 AAAA PCZZA Ed.10

Audience Assumed Knowledge

3BK 21224 AAAA PCZZA Ed.10

3BK 21224 AAAA PCZZA Ed.10

1.1 Parameter Classification

1.2 Parameter Description

3BK 21224 AAAA PCZZA Ed.10

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

3BK 21224 AAAA PCZZA Ed.10

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1 Site (CAE)

OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No No

3BK 21224 AAAA PCZZA Ed.10

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1.2 (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET) (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(BSC))

Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value

OMC Changes: PRC only RNO Changes: No No

3BK 21224 AAAA PCZZA Ed.10

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1.3 (EN_INBAND_NOTIF) - (EN_INBAND_NOTIF)

OMC Changes: RNO Changes: No No

3BK 21224 AAAA PCZZA Ed.10

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1.4 (EN_INBAND_PAGING) - (EN_INBAND_PAGING)

OMC Changes: RNO Changes: No No

3BK 21224 AAAA PCZZA Ed.10

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1.5 (EN_UPLINK_REPLY) - (EN_UPLINK_REPLY)

OMC Changes: RNO Changes: No No

3BK 21224 AAAA PCZZA Ed.10

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1.6 (EN_VGCS) - (EN_VGCS)

Category Type SubSystem Instance Value

OMC Changes: RNO Changes: No No

3BK 21224 AAAA PCZZA Ed.10

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1.7 (INBAND_PAGING_THR) - (INBAND_PAGING_THR)

Mandatory rules Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value

OMC Changes: RNO Changes: No No

3BK 21224 AAAA PCZZA Ed.10

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1.8 (MAX_VGCS_TS) - (MAX_VGCS_TS)

Coding rules Mandatory rules

Recommended rules Category Type SubSystem Instance Value

Modifiable Parameter Access External Comment

Cell Type Dependent Nb of TRX Dependent

3BK 21224 AAAA PCZZA Ed.10

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters

2.1.9 (MIN_VGCS_TS) - (MIN_VGCS_TS)

Coding rules Mandatory rules Recommended rules

Category Type SubSystem Instance Value

3BK 21224 AAAA PCZZA Ed.10